Home

Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O Module

1. EOM 2 SE ST CL LO OO gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION SLOT Catalog 5 CATALOG DESCRIPTION 1 IC693ALGZZ0 INPUT ANALOG 4PT VOLTAGE amp IC693SALGe21 INPUT ANALOG 4PT CURRENT 3 IC693ALGZZ2 INPUT ANALOG 16PT VOLTAGE 4 IC693ALGZ23 INPUT ANALOG 16PT CURRENT 5 ALGIN4A GENERIC INPUT ANALOG 4 CH lt lt CURSOR TO THE DESIRED CATALOG NUMBER AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY gt gt lt lt PRESS PGDN KEY FOR NEXT PAGE PGUP KEY FOR PREVIOUS PAGE gt gt LNSOSLESSON r ONFIG VALID REPLACE 4 After pressing the Enter key the first detail screen shown below is displayed You can then configure the module as required for your application TEJ hl in fed out Jed mix feb in ee out fee nix ether c o o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK g SLOT E SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog MEn Gi Aen INPUT ANALOG 16FT VOLTAGE Active Chan 1 Ref fdr gt 4AIOO0O1 Ref Adr gt IO0001 Node gt SINGLEND I Size B Chamel 1 10U Alarm Low 0000 Alarm High 32000 I NLMSONLESSON aes ONFIG VALID REPLACE Note Only enabled active channels are displayed on the screen 5 Use the parameter descriptions provided in the following table to help you make selections for the parameters on this screen GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 19 10 20 Table 10 6 Parameter Descriptions for Configuration Enter a number from 1
2. 0 D 3 VO Face Plate Installation 4 suescea aes oaroesee ok hoes perks pane e eases D 3 Module Wiring Information 4 34 62hsedtelang ohh teeetseedeeescesoeeetan D 4 Cable Information 20 252 esas 62 ee sau 6o 30 6d Pate eee hee sate teconeeaeees D 4 Faceplate Connector Pin Out for 16 Point Modules D 5 Terminal Bl ck Information 42444420505350055R5004eGonerene tech doesees D 5 TBQC Components for 32 Point Dual Connector Modules D 11 Terminal BIOR o22icaccee ateesge eee ea ueee shed Ane eed woe eee ee eee D 11 Cable Selection and Cross Reference for 32 Point Modules D 12 Cable Cum dC RaUHO 24eccenes tat camadeneus s aaueahsco weus see sees D 12 Mod le and Cable Data 4544 486 as oes heeuseeedgere do4e deen d eee gern ges D 12 Terminal Block Dat 2ncc25 es oue betes cena 4 tee saeee eens deen saciasee D 12 Appendix E Personal Computer Interface Cards E 1 IC693PIF301 400 Personal Computer Interface PCIF Cards E 1 Appendix F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation 66 F 1 Step 1 Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation F 1 Step 2 Calculation for PLC Power Supplies 0 0 e eee eee F 2 Step 3 Output Calculations for Discrete Output and Combination Modules F 2 Step 4 Input Calculations for Discrete Input or Combination Modules F 4 Stepo Filial Calculation 32 042 ma 2 ee ede ae ene een aes a
3. Circuit A6 connects to terminal 8 J Lf PISIS SIS Hinged Cover Terminal 19 Indicates External Power Supply SJS SISIS SISIS Terminal 20 44A726782 015 FOR USE WITH IC693MDL940 a43082B Figure 13 1 Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections GFK 0898F L5 1 Module LED Indicators 13 2 Input Module LED Indicators When a discrete input device closes the corresponding input LED should light to indicate that the signal reached the module If the light does not turn ON a voltage check can be made on the module s terminal board or block If the correct voltage is present at the terminal the corresponding input bit can be checked in the PLC with your programming software If the software shows that the input bit is at logic 1 the module s LED circuit is defective If the correct voltage level is not present at the terminal a check can be made at the input field device to determine if the device or interconnecting wiring is defective If none of an input module s inputs are working it may be that the external field input power supply is defective is not powered up or is not connected properly As indicated in the connections diagram in the previous figure input and output devices are powered from an external power supply not from inside the module Input modules are not fused so the Fuse Indicator LED in the previous picture does not apply to them Output Module LE
4. H OPTIONAL CONNECTION REFER TO TEXT Figure 11 4 Field Wiring for Analog Voltage Output Module IC693ALG390 Note Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK 08S98F Analog Output Modules Analog Current Output 2 Channel IC693ALG391 The 2 Channel Analog Current Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides two output channels each capable of converting 12 bits of binary digital data to an analog output for use as required by your application The Analog Current Output module is capable of providing outputs in the range of 0 to 20 mA Resolution of the converted signal is 12 bits binary 1 part in 4096 The sign bit is not used in the conversion process Both channels are updated on every scan about 5 milliseconds User data in the AQ registers is in a 16 bit 2 s complement format The 13 most significant bits from the AQ register are converted to sign magnitude by the PLC and sent to the module Twelve of the bits are used by the D A converter the 13th bit sign is used to determine if negative data was sent to the module The placement of the 13 bits within the data word is shown below The relationship between the current output and the data from the D A converter is shown in Figures 3 34 and 3 35 MSB LSB X x pu pio o os v7 os os os os v2 oif oo x x x S
5. Specifications for IC693MDL731 Specifications for IC693MDL732 Specifications for IC693MDL733 Specifications for IC693MDL734 Specifications for IC693MDL740 Specifications for IC693MDL741 Specifications for IC693MDL742 Specifications for IC693MDL930 Load Current Limitations for IC693MDL930 Specifications for IC693MDL931 Load Current limitations for IC693MDL931 Table of Contents 6 13 6 15 6 17 6 19 6 22 6 27 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 6 7 10 7 12 7 15 7 18 7 20 7 22 7 24 7 26 7 28 7 30 7 32 7 33 7 35 Contents xxvii Contents Table 7 19 Specifications for IC693MDL940 0000 7 36 Table 7 20 Load Current Limitations for IC693MDL940 7 38 Table 7 21 Specifications for IC693MDL750 ce eee 7 39 Table 7 22 Specifications for IC693MDL751 cee ees 7 41 Table 7 23 Specifications for IC693MDL752 ccc eee 7 44 Table 7 24 Specifications for IC693MDL753 ccc eens 7 50 Table 8 1 Specifications for IC693MAR590 0 cece e eee 8 2 Table 8 2 Load Current Limitations for IC693MAR590 8 2 Table 8 3 Specifications for IC693MDR390 ccc cece eee 8 6 Table 8 4 Load Current Limitations for IC693MDR390 8 6 Guide to Chapter Location for Analog I O Module Specifications 9 1
6. 21 DRSEL 12 DRPERR gt 0 0 CABLE 13 DRPERR 9 FROM g DRMRUN I0 0 UPSTREAM 9 DRMRUN P oo 2 DPFRAME 05 3 DPFRAME i 0 7 ov ee NC gt 5 0 ONE el L 1 FGND _ 05 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE Metallized Shell Metallized Shell NOTE Bold dashed line shows continuous 100 shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together Figure B 5 Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram Note In remote baseplates IC693CHS393E and earlier and IC693CHS399D and earlier it is necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate This means that when using a factory made Wye cable IC693CBL300 you must break pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with one of these baseplates Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should be built using Figure 10 20 See the section Alert to Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions for more details GFK 08S98F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 9 Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F and later and C693CHS399E and later have a change inside the baseplate which alleviates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating cable When using factory made Wye cable with these baseplates it is not necessary to remove pin from the cable Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made using either Figure 10 20 or Figure 10 21
7. Alarm Limits Display To view the alarm limits for the channel currently displayed press the gt key again the first time caused the channel ranges to be available for editing The following screen is displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CH 1 LO 0 The display is the entry field for the low alarm limit for the displayed channel in this case Channel 1 You can enter the desired low alarm limit value using the numeric keys and the key for specifying negative values Enter the low alarm limit using a value within the valid limits as listed in Table 3 7 After you have entered the low alarm limit value press the gt key again to advance to the high alarm limit display for this channel The following screen is displayed at this time ROQO 03 HI DEN V gt S CH 1 HI 32000 The display shows the entry field for the high alarm limit for the currently displayed channel You can enter positive or negative numbers see table 3 7 using the and numeric keys After selecting the low and high alarm limits for channel 1 or the currently displayed channel you can view the next channel by pressing the key ROQO 03 HI DEN V gt S CHAN 2 0 10 Edit the range and low and high alarm limits as described for Channel 1 All active channels can be changed in this manner Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key or by pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed Chapter 10 Analog I
8. JJ 00 Figure 6 11 Field Wiring 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input Module IC693MDL645 a45135 16 30V SUPPLY 12 NUMBER OF INPUTS 8 ON 4 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 12 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL645 6 14 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Input Modules 6 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 16 Point IC693MDL646 This 24 volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 input points in one group with a common power input terminal The on and off response times for this module are typically 1 ms This input module is designed to have either positive logic or negative logic characteristics Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Power to operate the field devices can be supplied by the user or an Isolated 24 VDC supply on the power supply 24V OUT and OV OUT terminals can power a limited number of inputs LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom r
9. 10 to 10 volts 32767 to 32767 GFK O898F Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules 11 13 IC693ALG392 Field Wiring Connections Connections to this module from user devices are made to screw terminals on a removable 20 terminal connector block mounted on the front of the module The actual terminals used are described in the following table and are shown in the following wiring diagrams Terminal Assignments Pin assignments for the 20 terminal I O connector on the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module are as shown in the following table Table 11 4 Terminal Pin Assignments for C693ALG392 Nomer Sime sit eto OOOO Number Name Signal Definition 8 a seo e a ones Ow o o eao I 14 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Output Modules IC693ALG392 Analog Output Module Field Wiring Diagram The following figure provides information for connecting field wiring to the user terminal board on the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module TERMINALS alee FIELD WIRING FIELD WIRING CH 1 ICH3 1CH4 ICH5 a 1CH6 CH 7 oe COM FGND Optional Cable Shield Ground Figure 11 16 Field Wiring for 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module IC693ALG392 Note Each channel can be configured independent of other channels to operate as a voltage output or a current output not both simultaneously Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring
10. m status of the user supplied power to the module all ranges Power Requirements and LEDs This module requires a maximum of 95 mA from the 5V bus on the PLC backplane for the logic side The module s analog power must be supplied by a single user supplied 24 VDC power source This includes current loop output power and voltage output load power This user supply requires a maximum current of 129 mA There are two green LED indicators on the module which provide module and user supply status The top LED OK provides module status information and the bottom LED USOK indicates whether the user supply is present and is above a minimum designated level Note that both LEDs are powered from the 5V backplane power bus The LEDs have six possible status combinations which are described below LED Status Indications for IC693MDL442 1 OK ON Module OK and configured USOK ON User power is present 2 OK FLASH Module OK but not configured USOK OFF No user power 3 OK FLASH Module OK but not configured E ov opmneiepen 4 OK ON Module OK and configured o feal om poms o OO 5 OK OFF Module is defective or no 5V backplane power present Tesi ore uu povai mny ormas step OK OFF Module not OK feso on oem Location in System The Analog Combo module is compatible with all Series 90 30 CPU models and may be installed in any TO slot of any Series 90 30 baseplate Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 7 12 8
11. 11 19 Figure 11 18 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module Block Diagram PICO ALG 992 64 34440 50406055 166050500 5500040504400 45 11 30 Figure 12 1 A D Bits vs Current Input ccc cee eeees 12 4 Figure 12 2 A D Bits vs Voltage Input ccccecccees 12 5 Figure 12 3 Scaling for Current Output ceeeeeeees 12 6 Figure 12 4 Scaling for Voltage Output cc ccc eeeeees 12 6 Figure 12 5 Field Wiring for Analog Combo Module IC693ALG442_ 12 10 Figure 12 6 Analog Combo Module Block Diagram C693ALG442 12 11 Figure 12 7 Output Behavior in Ramp Mode and in Standard Mode 12 18 Figure 13 1 Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections 13 1 Figure C 1 Detail of I O Bus Expansion Cables 0005 C 2 Figure C 2 How to use Split Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield C 6 Figure C 3 Point To Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables C 8 Figure C 4 Point To Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Im anhini DIA eee ce eeta E ee E se eee E eciae oe aeseeess C 8 Figure C 5 Earlier rsions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram C 9 Figure C 6 Current Remote baseplate IC693CHS393 399 Custom Wye Cable Wiring Dia C 10 Still 424 sbonabene ce cehee ees chee ee se eee EER Rao ee es oa eee GFK O898F Table of Contents xxiv GFK O0898F Figure C 7 Figure C 8 Figure C 9 Figure
12. A5 A6 Oar O A8 Bi ORRE B3 oog 13 5 B5 14 5 B6 o 8 B7 W O B8 Je 17 a OPTICAL _ COUPLER 19 Orn OTHER CIRCUITS Figure 6 3 Field Wiring 120 Volt AC Input Module IC693MDL240 wovAc 5 16 INPUTS ON NUMBER OF INPUTS 8 9 INPUTS ON ON 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 4 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL240 6 6 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Input Modules 6 24 Volt AC DC Positive Negative Logic Input 16 Point IC693MDL241 The 24 volt AC DC Positive Negative Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 input points in one group with a common power input terminal This input module is designed to have either positive or negative logic characteristics in the DC input mode This input module is designed to function with AC or DC user inputs Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Power to operate the field devices can be supplied by the user or the Isolated 24 VDC output on the power supply bottom two power supply terminals can be used to power a limited number of DC inputs LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located a
13. GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 13 7 14 Installing and Removing IC693MDL730 Terminal Boards with Holding Screws Discrete output modules IC693MDL730F and later versions and IC693MDL731F and later versions have a special terminal board that is equipped with holding screws as shown in the figure below These screws prevent the terminal board to module connections from deteriorating in applications where the PLC is subjected to severe vibration a43082B A1234 5678 B1234 5678 lt Hinged Cover Holding Screw Removeable Terminal Board g 2 Z 2 SISISIS Holding Screw Module Catalog Number Figure 7 12 Terminal Board with Holding Screws Removing To Remove these terminal boards first loosen the two holding screws on the front of the terminal board then follow the standard removal instructions in the section Removing an I O Module s Terminal Board The holding screws are held captive in the terminal board and do not have to be completely removed Installing To install these terminal boards follow the standard installation instructions in the section Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board then tighten the two holding screws to 8 to 10 inch pounds 1 Newton meter of torque Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic Output 2 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL731 The 12 24 volt DC
14. Output Characteristics Inrush Current 5 2 amps for 10 ms Output Voltage Drop 1 2 volts maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 130 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on following page Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL742 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC positive logic ESCP 1 amp output module a45241 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING i geet OTHER JT ESCP CIRCUITS Figure 7 26 IC693MDL742 Output Module Field Wiring a45242 4 AMPS PER 8 GROUP 3 AMPS PER TOTAL 6 GROUP MODULE LOAD 4 CURRENT AMPS 2 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 27 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL742 GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 29 7 30 Isolated Relay Output N O 4 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL930 The 4 Amp Isolated Relay Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 normally open relay circuits for controlling output loads provided by the user The output switching capacity of eac
15. Outputs per Module 32 four groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Output Current 0 3 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum each common Output Characteristics Output Voltage Drop 0 24 volts maximum Off state Leakage 0 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Internal Power Consumption 21 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Wiring to Field Devices Direct Method This method uses cables that have a mating female connector on the module end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end You can purchase a pre wired cable either catalog number IC693CBL308 3 feet 1 meter or catalog number IC693CBL309 6 feet 2 meters or if required for your application build your own cables Refer to the IC693CBL308 309 data sheet in Appendix C of this manual for cable information Using a Weidmuller Terminal Block You may purchase a Weidmuller 912263 terminal block from your electronics dealer to use with a GE Fanuc prewired cable GE Fanuc Cables IC693CBL306 3 feet Imeter or IC693CBL307 6 feet 2 meters have connectors on each end These connect from the module connector to a connector on the DIN rail mounted Weidmuller terminal block Appendix C has a data sheet for these cables which includes a figure showing how they connect between the module and the Weidmuller
16. Rack Number Rack Numbers for Expansion and Remote baseplates are selected by setting a DIP switch located on each baseplate directly above the connector for Slot 1 Rack number 0 must always be present and is assigned by default to the CPU rack the CPU baseplate does not have this DIP switch Racks do not need to be contiguously numbered although for consistency and clarity it is recommended that rack numbers not be skipped use 1 2 3 not 1 3 5 Rack numbers must not be duplicated within a system The following table shows the DIP switch positions for rack number selection Table 3 1 Rack Number Selection Switch Settings Rack numbers 5 6 and 7 only valid for CPUs 350 and higher Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Baseplates The particular CPU module used determines how may expansion and remote baseplates are allowed The 331 340 and 341 CPUs support a total of 4 Expansion and or Remote racks The 350 351 352 360 363 and 364 CPUs support a total of 7 Expansion and or Remote racks Each baseplate has a label above the DIP switch that shows the settings for each rack number The following figure shows this DIP switch package with an example of rack 2 number selected Note Use a ball point pen to set the DIP switches In general it is best to avoid using a pencil to set DIP switches since graphite a gritty conductive material from the pencil can en
17. References Used and Maximum Modules per System Consider ations The number of IC693ALG442 Analog Combo modules that can be installed in a system depends on the amount of WAQ AI and I references available Each module uses 2 AQ references and 4 AI references depending on status configuration and 8 16 or 24 I references depending on alarm status configuration The number of these references is dependent on the type of CPU in your system Please refer the the Maximum Number of Analog Modules per System table in Chapter 8 to determine how many Analog Combo modules can be installed for the various CPU models Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module IC693ALG442 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections GFK O898F Connections to this module from user devices are made to screw terminals on a removable 20 terminal connector block mounted on the front of the module The actual terminals used are described in the following table and are shown in the following wiring diagrams Terminal Assignments Pin assignments for the 20 terminal I O connector on the Analog Combo module are as shown in the following table Table 12 2 Terminal Pin Assignments for IC693ALG442 nomer Sime Sint etn OO Number Name Signal Definition e en Seeve comeon or aee anoeia e E srs ami rcomesine 2500 ens essor rC Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12
18. GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications GFK O0898F July 2000 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy completene
19. Note Connect the and terminals together for all unused inputs in order to minimize any fluctuations in the analog input table for the unused points Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules Table 10 1 Specifications for Analog Voltage Input Module IC693ALG220 Voltage Range Calibration Update Rate Resolution Absolute Accuracy Linearity Isolation Cross Channel Rejection Input Impedance Input Filter Response Internal Power Consumption 10 to 10 volts Factory calibrated 4 msec all four channels 5 mV 20 WA 1 LSB 5 mV 10 mV 40 LA typical over operating temperature 30 mV 160 uA maximum over operating temperature lt 1 Least Significant Bit 1500 volts between field side and logic side gt 80 db gt 9 Megohms voltage mode 250 ohms current mode 17 Hz 27 mA from 5 volt bus on the backplane 98 mA from the isolated 24 volt backplane bus Refer to Appendix C for product standards and general specifications F Both inputs must be within 11 volts of COM including any noise present on the inputs In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 100 mV 400 uA Analog Voltage Input Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 4 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module INVERTER n REGULATOR Om AND VOLTAGE 15V EN SUPERVISOR 5V 5V gt 15V BACKPLANE
20. Point Discrete 120 VAC Input Module in Chapter 6 gives the following information Input Current 12 mA typical at rated voltage Use this value for all of the input calculations for this module In this example eight of the Input Module s points are used for switches that for normal operation stay on closed 100 of the time These include the Emergency Stop Over Temperature Lube Pressure OK and similar switches Use the formula Average Power Dissipation Input Voltage x Input Current in Amps x Percent expressed as a decimal of on time x 0 10 power factor constant 120 x 012 x 1 0 x 0 10 0 144 Watts per input Then multiply this result by 8 0 144 Watts x 8 inputs 1 152 Watts total for the 8 inputs Also in this example two input points on this 16 point module are for the Control On and Pump Start pushbuttons Under normal conditions these pushbuttons are only pressed once per day for about one second just long enough to start up the control and pump Therefore their effect on our power calculation is negligible and we will assume a power dissipation of zero for them 0 0 Watts total for 2 inputs F 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation For the remaining six inputs of our sixteen point module it is estimated that they will be on for an average of 20 of the time So the following calculation is made for these six inputs Using the formula of Av
21. RO 03 HI DEN V gt S AI16 AI_ To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be RO 03 EMPTY gt S Selecting Module Mode To display the module mode press the key The display will show the current mode of the module The default mode is Single Ended Initial Display RO 03 HI DEN V gt S HI DEN V SINGLE You can toggle between the Single Ended and Differential modes by pressing the key Each mode will be selected as shown The range selected is the one currently displayed Initial Display RO 03 HI DEN V gt S HI DEN V DIFFERE When the desired mode for the module is displayed on the screen you can selected it by pressing the ENT key Selecting Input Channel Ranges The range for each of the 16 channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below Assume that the AI address is as previously selected Initial Display RO 03 HI DEN V gt S HI DEN V SINGLE 10 24 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F GFK O898F Analog Input Modules To display the channel ranges press the key The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CHAN 1 0 10 You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown The range selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S CHAN 1 10 10
22. TEN i in PA out ed nix ee in ea out ea nix oter ee Active Chan 1 AQ Ref Adr AQOOL xI Ref Adr Stop Mode HOLD xI Size Channel 1 0 10V 10001 a ONF IG B 5 Enter the remaining configuration parameters on this screen You can move your cursor from field to field by pressing the Arrow cursor control keys When you are in the field you want to modify you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections or Shift Tab to reverse the direction of the selection list The default number of Active Channels Active Chan is 1 You will not be able to configure additional channels until you change this field by typing in the correct number 1 through 8 or by pressing the Tab key to increment the number below shows the default selections after changing the Active Chan field gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK 3 SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog ICH9SALGS92 I LN9ON TES THIG TS Ta REPLACE OUTPUT ANALOG GPT EN i in eA out ed nix ee in fea out Penix koter ee Oe Active Chan T AQ Ref dr AQOO3 zI Ref Adr Stop Mode HOLD xI Size Channel 1 6 10U Channel 2 0 10U Channel 3 6 10U Channel 4 6 10U Channel 5 6 10U Channel 6 6 10U Channel 7 6 10U Channel 6 6 10U 10001 a ONF IG MLE Note The entry in the Stop Mode field HOLD
23. analog current output module 2 channel M7 analog voltage input module 4 channel analog_voltage output module 2 channel M12 high capacity ac dc power supply 4 5 input simulator module 6 17 relay output 2 amp module 7 36 relay output 4 amp module 7 30 relay output n c and form C 8 amp mod ule 7 33 standard ac dc power supply 4 3 Standard AC DC power supply ac power source connections s de power source connections 4 5 illustration of 4 2 overvoltage protection devices 4 5 4 20 specifications Status reporting analog combo module GFK O898F GFK O0898F analog current voltage output module iie 1 16 Y TBQC See Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC selection for 16 point modules 2 23 for 32 point modules 2 22 2 24 Technical support telephone number 2 1 Telephone numbers Customer Service GE Fanuc help 2 1 13 9 Horner Electric Terminal assignments 16 ch current input module 10 39 16 ch voltage input module 10 13 8 ch current voltage output module 11 14 analog combo module 12 9 Terminal block selection guide 2 22 Terminal Block Quick Connect D 1 32 point cables D 12 cables D 3 cables and kits for 32 point modules I O face plate D 3 installation terminal blocks Terminal Block Quick Connect for 16 Point modules 2 19 Terminal blocks interposing D 2 D 11_ Terminal board connect
24. fear Data sheet IC693ACC308 baseplate adapter bracket EE 2 10JB 22 1C693CBL330 D 12 1C693ACC308 Bracket 19 rack mounting IC693CBL330 Data sheet C 31 1C693CBL33 IC693ACC313 Bracket recessed 19 rack Data sheet mount 2 12 B 23 1C693CBL332 D 12 1C693ACC329 TBQC D 6 Data sheet C 31 1C693ACC330 TBQCD 7 1C693CBL333 D 12 Data sheet C 31 1C693ACC331 TBQC D 8 1C693CBL334 D 12 1C693ACC332 TBQC D 9 Data sheet Coal 1C693ACC333 D 10 1C693CHS392 figure 3 9 Index 6 GFK OS9SF GFK O0898F IC693CHS393 figure 3 11 remote baseplate 3 11 1C693CHS398 figure 3 8 1C693CHS399 figure 3 10 I1C693CPU311 figure 3 5 IC693CPU3 13 figure 3 5 IC693CPU323 figure 3 5 IC693DVM300 connections module drawing specifications table 7 2_ valve driver module IC693PWR321 power supply 4 2 IC693PWR322 power supply 4 7 IC693PWR328 power supply 4 10 IC693PWR330 power supply 4 4 IC693PWR331 power supply 4 13 IC693PWR332 power supply 4 16 Indicator lights relating to I O terminals 13 1 see LED indicators also 13 2 Input modules 120 vac isolated 8 ots 6 1 120 vac 16 pts 125 vdc pos neg logic 8 pts 6 9 24 vac or vdc pos neg logic 16 pts 6 7 24 vdc pos neg logic FAST 16 pts 6 15 24 vdc pos neg logic FAST 32 pts J 6 19 analog combo 12 1 analog current 16 channel 10 27 analog current 4 channel a
25. for a drawing of these modules See GFK 0898 the Series 90 30 PLC YO Module Specifications Manual for details about these modules Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F GFK O89SF I O Cable Data Sheets 16 point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I O faceplate adaptor See Appendix J for information on the TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connector Use the C693CBL328 right side cable for this application If a different length cable is required you can build your own cable but only straight connector kits are currently available See Building Custom Length Cables below Specifications Cable Length 10 feet 3 meters Fujitsu FCN 365S024 AU Connector Depth for Cables C693CBL327 328 The following figure shows that these cables extend 2 out from the face of the modules they are connected to The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the 2 depth added by this connector Series 90 30 I O Module 2 0 gt Figure B 18 Dimension for Depth of Connector for IC693CBL327 328 Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 27 C 28 Building Custom Length 24 pin Connector Cables Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for individual applications You must purchase the mating female socket type 24 pin connectors The 24 pin connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Fanuc Catalog numbers for
26. s Manual GFK 0695 Series 90 30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0726 Series 90 30 PLC State Logic Processor User s Guide GFK 0732 Series 90 30 PLC ECLiPS User s Manual GFK 0747 Series 90 30 PLC OnTOP User s Guide GFK 0750 OnTop for Series 90 30 State Logic Program User s Manual GFK 0781 Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90 30 PLC Follower Mode User s Manual GFK 0823 Series 90 30 I O LINK Master Module User s Manual GFK 0828 Series 90 30 Diagnostic System User s Manual GFK 0840 Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90 30 PLC Standard Mode User s Manual GFK 1028 Series 90 30 I O Processor Module User s Manual GFK 1034 Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1037 Series 90 30 FIP Remote I O Scanner User s Manual GFK 1056 Series 90 30 State Logic Control System User s Manual GFK 1084 Series 90 30 TCP IP Ethernet Communications User s Manual GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 30 PLC Station Manager Manual GFK 1179 Series 90 PLC Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards GFK 1464 Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1466 Temperature Control Module for the Series 90 30 PLC User s Manual GFK 1742 Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 200
27. B4 B5 B7 ol z 45 COM B _ Lol CIRCUIT LOAD MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING G 24V D Figure 7 37 Field Wiring 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic 32 Point Output Module IC693MDL750 7 40 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Discrete Output Modules 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL751 The 12 24 volt DC Positive Logic Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 outputs in four groups of eight with two common pins for each group The Output module is designed to have positive logic characteristics in that it sources current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The output device is connected between the negative power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user Connections from the output circuits are made to the user s output devices through a 50 pin connector mounted on the front of the module This module does not have LED indicators to indicate circuit status This output module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 22 Specifications for C693MDL751 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15
28. Discrete Input Modules 6 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 16 Point IC693MDL645 The 24 volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 input points in one group with a common power input terminal This input module is designed to have either positive logic or negative logic characteristics Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Power to operate the field devices can be supplied by the user or an Isolated 24 VDC supply on the power supply 24V OUT and OV OUT terminals can power a limited number of inputs LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slo
29. NOTE This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emis sions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications iii Preface The following statements are required to appear in the Series 90 30 Installation Manual and the Series 9O 30 I O Specifications Manual for Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations 1 EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I GROUPS A B C and D DIV 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A B C DOR NON HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY 2 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I DIVISION 2 3 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON HAZARDOUS 4 ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES MUST BE POPULATED WITH FILLER MODULES C693ACC310 OR EQUIVALENT iv Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Preface Please Note the Following Important Information _ The I O modules described in this manual can be controlled in two different ways 1 With a Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller PLC 2 By a Personal Computer PC that has a Personal Computer Interface card If you are using Series 90 30 I O as part of a Series 90 30 PLC system you should also refer to GFK 0356 the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller
30. Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 8 one group Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Output Current 0 5 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum per common Output Characteristics Output Voltage Drop 0 5 volts maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 50 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL733 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 8 point 12 24 volt DC negative logic 0 5 amp output module a45118 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING Pm al va K e 6 Q a MO 1G OTHER 10 4 _ CIRCUITS 11 NC 12 NC 13 NC 14 nc 15 NC GeH NC 17 NC 18 1 NC NC 20 NC Figure 7 18 IC693MDL733 Output Module Field Wiring a45051 2 0 TOTAL 1 5 MODULE LOAD CURRENT 1 0 AMPS 0 5 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 19 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL733 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 21 125 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic 1 Amp Output 6 Point IC693MDL734 The 125 volt DC Positive Negative
31. REMOTE E X P A N S l O N POWER O SUPPLY 1C693CHS399 5 Slot Remote Baseplate 3 10 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 a44969 DIP EXPANSION RACK SW 12 34 567 1 x X PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X CONTROLLER 3 XX X BASE 10 SLOT X CLOSED REMOTE NON CPU SLOTS NON CPU SLOTS E X P A N S l O N oooo0o00000000 ooo0o000000000 oooo0o00000000 ooo0o000000000 e00000000000 eo00000000000 e0000000000N0 e00000000000 e00000000000 eo00000000000 e00000000000 ooo0o0o00000000 POWER o SUPPLY Figure 3 9 IC693CHS393 10 Slot Remote Baseplate GFK O898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 1 3 12 I O Bus Expansion Cables Five prewired I O Bus Expansion cables are available from GE Fanuc Catalog numbers and lengths of these cables are listed in the following figure You can build custom cables to suit the needs of your application if cable lengths other than those listed are required Refer to the Cables chapter for detailed information on cable type and connectors Note that the same cables can be used with both Expansion and Remote baseplates however the cables used in a remote expansion system must use the cable type described in the Cables chapter FEMALE CONNECTOR a43853A Figure A 5 3 6 26 FOOT CABLES C MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure B 5 50 FOOT CABLE MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Ca
32. Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Combination Modules Relay contact life when switching inductive loads will approach resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads The 1A 100V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4934 The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components available from most electronics distributors eer AC LOADS 943192A DC LOADS 022 1002 1A 100V SERIES 90 30 6eooy 1 2W SERIES 90 30 RELAY OOA OUTPUT Load Coil RELAY OUTPUT COM COM DC SUPPLY AC SOURCE Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input and load devices and power source s to the 24 Volt Input Relay Output module GFK 0898F Chapter 8 Discrete Combination Modules 8 7 8 8 a45044 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER CIRCUITS aL A A optical COUPLER fe ee OTHER CIRCUITS Figure 8 2 Field Wiring 24 VDC Input Relay Output Module C693MDR390 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Chapter General Analog Module Information 9 This chapter describes the Analog Input and Output modules for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller Module specifications and w
33. Table 9 1 Load Requirements mA for Analog I O Modules 9 4 Table 9 2 Equation Values for Analog Modules 9 7 Table 9 3 User Reference and Current mA Requirements 9 12 Table 9 4 User References Available per System 9 12 Table 9 5 Maximum Number of Analog Modules per System 9 12 Table 10 1 Specifications for Analog Voltage Input Module IC693ALG220 Table 10 2 Specifications for Analog Current Input Module IC693ALG221 10 6 Table 10 3 Specifications for 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Ey 728 WF 092929 eee 10 10 Table 10 4 Terminal Pin Assignments for IC693ALG222 10 13 Table 10 5 Configuration Parameters for IC693ALG222 10 17 Table 10 6 Parameter Descriptions for Configuration 10 20 Table 10 7 Specifications for 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module TCG IS ALG 22D goa oor ee ee A ee eee ee es 10 28 GFK O898F Table of Contents xxviii Contents Table 10 8 Configuration Parameters cece eee eeees 10 30 Table 10 9 Parameter Descriptions for Configuration 10 33 Table 10 10 Terminal Pin Assignments ccceeeeees 10 39 Table 11 1 Specifications for Analog Voltage Output Module IC693ALG390 11 2 Table 11 2 Range Settings vs Voltage Outputs 006 11 6 Table re Specifications for Analog Current Output Module IC693ALG391 Table 11 4 Terminal Pin Assignments for IC693A
34. The modules that use these cables are C693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 and IC693MDL751 The connector on the module is oriented with the notch towards the top of the module with pin 1 at the top of the the right row of pins as you are looking at it as shown below a45149 8Beo2ee 0000008088 OS 33 ol Cable Specifications Cable Length I1C693CBL306 3 feet 1 meter 1C693CBL307 6 feet 2 meters Connectors 50 pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module 50 pin male connector on end that connects to Connector Interface Assembly We recommend the use of a terminal block for connecting field wiring to the 50 pin high density I O modules The use of a connector interface provides a convenient method of terminating field wiring to the modules Weidmuller Electrical and Electronic Connection Systems makes a suitable terminal block assembly RS MR 50 B catalog number 912263 female Honda connector An example of using an IC693CBL306 or 307 cable to connect a 32 point I O module to one of these terminal blocks is shown in the following figure GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 13 i SERIES 90 30 PLC 50 Pin 32 Point I O Module Extension Cable a44838A Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block DIN Rail Mounted telge jejje 2 26 27 28 2930 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
35. The outputs are positive logic or sourcing type outputs in that they switch the loads on the positive side of the power supply and therefore supply current to the load The outputs can switch user loads over the range of 12 through 24 VDC 4 20 15 and are capable of sourcing a maximum current of 0 5 amps per point Two pins are provided on the user I O connectors for each group common Each pin has a current handling capability of 3 amperes It is recommended that connections are made to both pins when connecting the common however it is a requirement for high current applications between 3 and 4 amperes Each group can be used to drive different loads For example group A B and C can drive 24 VDC loads while group D can be reserved for driving 12 VDC loads Power to provide current to the loads must be provided by the user The module also draws a minimum amount of power from the user supply to provide gate drive to the output devices Backplane isolation between the field side and logic side is provided by opto couplers on the module All 32 outputs are forced OFF when the CPU is stopped There are no special fault or alarm diagnostics reported LED indicators labeled Al A8 B1 B8 C1 C8 D1 D8 at the top of the module provide the ON OFF status of each output point This module is configured as a 32 point output type and uses 32 bits of discrete Q output data This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 1
36. above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit available for I SIZE values 32 and 40 9 ALARM LO 9 ALARM HI 10 ALARM LO 10 ALARM HI 11 ALARM LO 11 ALARM HI 12 ALARM LO 12 ALARM HI 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 the location in AI memory where input data to the module begins Each channel provides 16 bits of analog input data as an integer value from 0 to 32 760 or 32 767 to 32 752 depending on the range GFK O089SF Analog Input Modules Table 10 6 Parameter Descriptions for Configuration continued Parameter Description I Size Fifth eight I locations available for I SIZE value 40 cont d 1 32 Channel No 13 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 33 Channel No 13 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal
37. gt S 14032 Selecting I Reference At this point the starting I reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 40 is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 35 Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the sta tus field Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as I17 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed ROQO 03 HI DEN C gt S I40 117 156 Selecting AI Reference 10 36 After the starting I address has been selected pressing the ENT key again will cause the following screen to be displayed RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 AI_ This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AI reference Note that the length of the status field 16 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AI on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer
38. in place on the modules or remove them from the modules before wiring Although removing them may help make wiring easier a previous section Working with Removeable Terminal Boards shows how to remove a terminal board care should be taken to avoid mixing them up and installing them on the wrong module each terminal board has the catalog number of the module printed on it and the hinged cover has a wiring diagram for that module type If you are using wire duct routing each module s wires through the opening in the duct directly under the module will help to keep each terminal board in its correct position and thus avoid its being installed on the wrong module I O Modules with terminal blocks Some modules may use optional terminal blocks that mount to the enclosure panel This includes all 32 point modules and can include other I O modules if they are fitted with the optional Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly Connect the terminal blocks to the connectors on the modules with the correct cables Connect the signal switches sensors solenoids etc wires to the terminal boards or terminal blocks strips If wiring to module terminal boards these can be removed for ease of wiring if desired See the section Removing a Module s Terminal Board in this chapter When finished wiring any I O terminal boards if you removed them from the I O modules for ease of wiring re install them on the modules being careful to mat
39. selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S HLS DEF DEF LOW When the desired mode for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt Key Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules Ha 11 28 Selecting Output Channel Ranges The range for each of the 8 channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below There are two current and two voltage ranges that can be selected Initial Display RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S I16 10017 10032 To display the channel ranges press gt The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first available range RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 0 10 V You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown Each of the ranges are shown below The range that will be selected is the one currently displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 10 10 RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 4 20 MA RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 1 0 20 MA When the desired range for the module is displayed on the screen it can be accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the lt key To view the next channel s range display press the key RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S CHAN 2 0 10 V Edit this channel s range the same as you did for the first channel The range of all active channel
40. terminal block GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 41 IC693MDL751 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC positive logic output module TYPICAL CIRCUIT a44847 i a an Heal CIRCUIT MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING o o z A2 A3 alo z E A6 A7 ol lo 2 EE MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING o o z B2 B3 B4 B5 Je bl OOHOOOOGE ej a e JJ 42 OV A mN B OUTPUT USER _ OUTPUT _ USER S c LOAD Lol Srcu DX rean MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING OG Q 9 o lo e C2 C3 e B R K o o OVONGCGOGOQGOOQ se C7 C8 ol OUTPUT CIRCUIT o OUTPUT LOAD CIRCUIT Figure 7 38 Field Wiring IC693MDL751 32 Point Output Module 7 42 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Output Modules 5 24 Volt DC TTL Negative Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL752 The 5 24 volt DC TTL Negative Logic Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 discrete outputs The outputs are arranged in four isolated groups of eight Al A8 B1 B8 C1 C8 and D1 D8 each
41. 13 cb0seescunes sheet ceweteausen ates ewes 2 17 Discrete I O Module Connection Methods 0 0 cece eee ee 2 18 Connections to I O Module Terminal Boards 0 0 e eee 2 18 Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16 Point Discrete Modules 2 19 Installation of 32 Point 50 Pin Connector Discrete Modules 2 19 Installation of 32 Point Dual 24 Pin Connector Discrete Modules 2 21 Terminal Block Selection Guide for Discrete I O Modules 2 22 General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules 0000s eee 2 25 General Analog Input Wiring Methods 0 0 cee cee nee 2 25 Analog Input Module Wiring Methods for Noise Suppression 2 26 Shielding for Analog Input Modules 222060 40 c0edus cased daeeeeed wees 2 26 Wiring Diagrams for Current Transducers 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 2 31 Analog Output Module Wiring cee cee eee eee nee 2 34 Analog Output Shield Grounding Example One 00005 2 35 AC Power Source ConnecuiOns scsesd5ee boe55e4esehed dee eensadee ues 2 38 Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems 2 40 Definition of Floating Neutral SyStems lt 2c0secccnceeneced savescedseens 2 40 Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems 2 41 DC Power Source Connections 4 ue duce ee paea ai nes E R RE 2 42 Basic Installdition Procedure 4 624 508 pies E
42. 14 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines All baseplates grouped together in a Series 90 30 PLC system must have a common ground connection This is especially important for baseplates that are not mounted in the same control cabinet Grounding 19 Rack Mounted Baseplates There are two Adapter Brackets choices for mounting a 10 slot Series 90 30 baseplate to a 19 Rack Regardless of which of the two Adapter Brackets is used the 19 Rack should be grounded as per the instructions in System Grounding Procedures section For details on the Adapter Brackets see the Mounting a Baseplate to a 19 Rack section earlier in this chapter Nineteen Inch rack mounted PLC baseplates should be grounded according to the guidelines in the Baseplate Safety Grounding section using a separate ground wire from the PLC baseplate as shown in the previous figure If using the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket IC693ACC313 the ground wire can be installed as shown in Figure 2 11 with the ground attached to the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket An additional ground wire connecting the Adapter Bracket to a solid chassis ground on the 19 Rack should be installed Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown in the previous figure If using the Surface Mount Adapter Bracket IC693ACC308 the ground wire should be run from the baseplate as shown in
43. 2 00 lt S AIO4 AI _ Selecting AI Reference This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AI reference by specifying the starting reference in the AI field Note that the number of references 04 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AI on the second line of the display You can select the next available address or enter a specific address Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as AI35 press the key sequence 3 5 ENT Note The configured reference addresses will not be shown until all three reference types I AI and AQ have been assigned starting addresses Once this is done the configured addresses can be viewed by scrolling backward using the key You can press the CLR key while entering the starting address to clear the address field and enter a different address After selecting the starting AI address and pressing the ENT key the following screen is displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S AQ02 AQ _ GFK O898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 25 Selecting AQ Reference This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AQ reference by specifying the starting reference in the AQ field Note that the number of references 02 is displayed a
44. 2 00 lt S I24 I Selecting I Reference 12 24 At this point the starting I reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 24 is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held Programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as I17 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Note The configured reference addresses will not be displayed until all three reference types I WAI and WAQ have been assigned starting addresses Once this is done the configured addresses can be viewed by scrolling backward using the key You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY After selecting the starting I address and pressing the ENT key the following screen is displayed RO 03 AIO
45. 23 6 eetgetetatae benders ESETEI ES 7 10 IC693MDL390 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 11 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 2 Amp 8 Point O NOLI O ui te cecdesctee eter urn eee e a E 7 12 IC693MDL730 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 13 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic Output 2 Amp 8 Point ICO MDE SL pee au t pAr ee es EE so ep nee E Ges E E R 7 15 IC693MDL731 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 16 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 0 5 Amp 8 Point TEOD MDE pareve EEr EE AEE Gone E 7 18 IC693MDL732 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 19 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic 0 5 Amp Output 8 Point ICO MDE pate area ee seu ris rika Ekeren EEEREN 7 20 IC693MDL733 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 21 125 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic 1 Amp Output 6 Point Gc Ib bye eee eee rr er ee eee eee ea 7 22 IC693MDL734 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 23 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 0 5 Amp 16 Point PCG OID ILIA padeeanteson nay irris bene idoni Eat eeeeeteae een bese 7 24 IC693MDL740 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 25 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic 0 5 Amp Output 16 Point OOM DOLIA 405445 seed bom etek ee EE RE E TEREE E erases 7 26 IC693MDL741 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 27 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic ESCP Output 1 Amp 16 Point IE
46. 24 Selecting VAI Reference 25 45 4 9 05 04 oe ened ene eaded duce eee sane veces bess 12 25 Selecting PAO Reference lt 2 c2 42505 6540564044 hee ho ses gan ea ea gea ease 12 26 Removing Module From Configuration 0 cece eee eee eens 12 26 Selecting Module Stop Mode 25 2540 0c402dee lt s008 4040sueaden oes ae e 12 27 Selecting Input Channel Ranges sc c0 so 06 aacced nen dene haw aus oe deere se 12 28 Selecting Low and High Alarm limits 4 6 aw lt aseccaae neces eee ee en eae ne 12 29 Proze NOG psig beens eagereeestus PENER EE EREN ENERE E ERIE se 12 29 Saved COMmeulaOUS t15c2 en eda s vas a aR RE a E E Ra A EREE 12 30 Maintenance and IroubleSsnOOUGE 2 05e aeax weed gece sid arein skao 13 1 Troubleshooting Features of Series 90 30 Hardware 00 000 13 1 Module LED Tadi OIS sreski rr veya Sane ee ha anes Kees SEERE SENEN EN 13 2 Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software 0008 13 3 Replacing Modules 2 05454 6425t2 sbhescerectducstorscaaus EIENEN 13 5 Series 90 30 Product Repair 4 24 022204245055 eabb0 een ctadaess cbse ee gos 13 5 Module Fuse ist 2 4 6cb1cs00 aprep rni eect seiesestebiebeneeeeeaeeuer 13 6 Spare Replacement Pas 24 0i24 taeetadeews esi bows badd dawg ees Sows gon 13 7 Preventive Maintenance Suggestions 0 0 cece eee eee eee nee 13 8 Getting Additional Help and Information 0 0 0 0c e eee eee 13 9 Appendix A Glossary of Analog Terms
47. 240 VAC 5 to 30 volts DC 5 to 250 volts AC 50 60 Hz 8 two groups of four outputs each 1500 volts RMS between field and logic side 500 volts RMS between groups 2 amps maximum per output 4 amps maximum per common 10 mA 5 amps 15 ms maximum 15 ms maximum 80 mA all I O on from 5V backplane bus 70 mA all outputs on from relay 24V backplane bus Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Table 8 2 Load Current Limitations for IC693MAR590 Maximum Current for Load Type Lamp or Solenoid Operating Voltage Typical Contact Life number of Operations For inductive loads Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Combination Modules Relay contact life when switching inductive loads will approach resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads The 1A 100V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4934 The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components available from most electronics distributors eer AC LOADS DC LOADS 022 1002 1A 100V SERIES 90 30 6eooy 1 2W SERIES 90 30 RELAY OOA OUTPUT Load Coil RELAY OUTPUT COM COM DC SUPPLY AC SOURCE Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user
48. 25 V 0 to 850 ohms Output Load Capacitance current mode 2000 pF Output Load Inductance current mode 1H Maximum Output Loading voltage mode 5 mA 2K ohms minimum resistance 2000 pF maximum capacitance Isolation 1500 volts between field and logic side Internal Power Consumption 30 mA from 5V supply 215 mA from Isolated 24 VDC backplane supply or user supply Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications 1 Allowable load on the voltage output option can be calculated from the total module current shown in Figure 3 38 2 Allowable user supply is dependent on the current load and the ambient temperature as shown in Figure 3 38 3 In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to uA 4 to 20 mA range uA 0 to 20 mA range GFK O898F Chapter II Analog Output Modules 11 7 265V a44660 50 51mA 40 40mA TOTAL NOTE MODULE 4 EN WHEN IN VOLTAGE MODE LOAD ASSUME 20 5 mA PER CURRENT CHANNEL IN ADDITION TO mA 20 Vour LOAD CURRENT PER CHANNEL EXAMPLE BOTH CHANNELS IN 0 TO 10V MODE WITH 2K LOADS 51 mA 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 11 9 Load Current Derating IC693ALG391 Analog Current Output Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 2 channel Analog Output module SDN p 44556 SDIN DO CS1 SURE 5 D1 CS2 D A lOWT VOUTI GGS i ICH1 IOCLK EN D3 D14 i
49. 250 ohm loads AMBIENT Shorted loads TEMPERATURE C CURRENT MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ACTIVE CHANNELS o unanneia Y Maximum Operating Temperature Select the line for the number of voltage 2 Channels V 4 Channels V channels used then add the number of cur rent channels This is the total number of channels used AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C To determine the maximum operating tem perature select the total active channels used from the bottom of chart then draw a vertical line to the line for the number of voltage channels VuseR 30V MIXED VOLTAGE AND CURRENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOLTAGE CHANNELS HAVE 2K ohm LOADS ACTIVE CHANNELS CURRENT AND VOLTAGE MIX CURRENT CHANNELS HAVE SHORTED LOADS NOTE For maximum performance and module life it is recom mended that the module be operated at maximum load resis tance to offload heat from the module Figure 11 17 Module Derating Curves for IC693ALG392 GFK O898F Chapter II Analog Output Modules 11 19 Configuring the C693ALG392 Analog Output Module The 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro or CIMPLICITY Control Programming Software configurator function or with the Hand Held Programmer The parameters that can be configured are described in the following table Configuration procedures using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software and the Hand Held Programmer are described in the follow
50. 364 system a CPU baseplate with up to 7 expansion and or remote baseplates A Series 90 30 I O system controlled by a Personal Computer can consist of A PC with an installed C693PIF301 card and up to 4 expansion and or remote baseplates A PC with an installed C693PIF400 card and up to 7 expansion and or remote baseplates Series 90 30 I O Module Types GE Fanuc offers the following types of Series 90 30 I O modules Discrete inputs modules have either 8 16 or 32 points Discrete outputs output modules have from 5 to 32 points Discrete combination modules have a combination of inputs and outputs on one module Analog input modules are available with 4 or 16 channels Analog outputs analog output modules have 2 or 8 channels GFK 0898F ded 1 2 Analog combination module has 4 input channels and 2 output channels I O modules are retained in their baseplates by molded latches that easily snap onto the upper and lower retainer slots of the baseplates This is described in detail in Chapter 2 The following figure shows a typical Series 90 30 I O module iene a43082A A1234 5678 Status LEDs B12345678 Fuse Indicator LED Hinged Cover Front View OUTPUT Module Type RELAY N O 2 AMP Er OUTPUT a indicafes Typ RELAY N O 2 AMP ae ad O of Module Pilot Light 1 Pilot Light 2 Control ON icon A4 Emargency Stop Pump 1 ON Removable Terminal Board lt Hinged Cover Connection Diagram on
51. 41 12 24 vdc positive logic 8 pts J7 12J 7 18 12 24 vdc 0 5A positive logic 32 pts 7 49 120 vac 12 pts 120 vac 8 pts 7 8 120 240 vac isolated 5 pts 7 10 Za 120 240 vac 8 pts 7 6 125 vdc positive negative logic 6 pts 17 22 5 24 vde TTL neg logic 32 pts J 7 43 fiat analog combo analog current 2 channel analog current voltage 8 channel 11 11 analog voltage 2 channel isolated relay n c and form c 8 pts isolated relay n o 8 pts negative logic 5 8 positive logic 5 7 relay n o 2 amp 16 pts Overvoltage protection devices 4 5 4 20 jumper strap installation 2 39 Parts kits mechanical spare 13 7 PCIF PCIF2 description E 1 Personal Computer Interface Data sheet E 1 PLC customer service 2 1 PLC hotline 2 1 Positive and negative logic definitions 5 7 Positive logic input modules 5 7 Positive logic output modules 5 7 Posts terminal board 2 9 GFK O898F GFK O0898F Power requirements analog combo 12 7 Power Supply DC input only 4 7 Power supply 24 vdc output connections 2 42 24 48 VDC input 4 7 48 VDC input 4 10 ac power source connections 2 38 AC DC input 4 2 Backup battery location 4 24 Feature comparison 4 1 field wiring to DC input supply 4 19 field_wiring to standard AC DC supply high capacity 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC 44 4 high capacity 24 VD
52. 9 IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module Field Wiring Diagram The following figure provide information for connecting field wiring to the user terminal board on the Analog Combo module TERMINALS ate FIELD WIRING FIELD WIRING 24VIN G 2 mea Oas on fi ws or om 18 V COM 20 FGND ADD JMP1 JMP4 for 250Q SENSE RESISTOR CURRENT INPUT MODE ONLY OPTIONAL SHIELD CONNECTION COM I RET Figure 12 5 Field Wiring for Analog Combo Module C693ALG442 Notes 1 Each Input channel can be configured independent of other Input channels to operate as a voltage input or a current input not both simultaneously 2 Each Output channel can be configured independent of other Output channels to operate as a voltage output or a current output not both simultaneously 3 Please see Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection information 12 10 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the Analog Combo module a47046 PEEPS Y a O CHy CURRENT VOLTAGE ip INPUT SELECT MICRO PROCESSOR Mex 2 REFERENCE 15V VIN 15V COM S CONVERTER gt 5V 5V O O FGND g E SUPERVISOR OPTO ISOLATION M DATA TRANSMIT RECEIVE MULTIPLEXOR D A lout O CURRENT eral DRIVER B SERIES 90 30 PLC BACK
53. Analog Combination I O Module configuration parameters using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro configurator software or the Hand Held Programmer In the 0 to 10 volt range user data is scaled so that 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 Full 12 bit resolution is available over either range Since converters used in the analog input channels are 12 bit converters not all of the 16 bits in the data tables contain data required for the conversion A version of the 12 bits is placed within the 16 bit data word corresponding to the analog point in the AI table The Series 90 30 PLC system handles the integration differently for the various analog modules The CPU does not manipulate the data from the input channels before placing it within the word in the AI data table The bits in the AI data table which were not used in the conversion by the input channel are forced to O zero by the analog input channel Placement of the 12 data bits from the A D converter for an analog current input data word for the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module in unipolar range is shown below MSB LSB _x pn io ps ps pv pe os os os o oif vof x x x X not converted bits Analog values are scaled over the range of the converter Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit resolution to a multiple of full scale that is 2 5 mV bit for unipolar 5 mV bit for bipolar This cali
54. BASEPLATE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE Figure D 1 Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90 30 I O Software GE Fanuc s PC Control software package which runs under Windows NT allows you to configure and create application programs for your system See GFK 1424 Using PC Control Software A C Language Interface software product available from Horner Electric works with both Borland Turbo C and Microsoft C The source code for this interface is available from Horner Electric catalog number HE693SRC844 Visit Horner Electric on the web at www hornerelectric com Documentation Documentation for these PCIF cards is noted in the table above additional user documentation is available from Horner Electric Inc Documentation on the GE Fanuc PC Control software is found in the manual Using PC Control Software GFK 1424 Series 90 30 PLC I O Specifications July 2000 GFK OS89SF Appendix Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation F Most PLCs are mounted in an enclosure The enclosure should be capable of properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it This appendix describes how to calculate heat dissipation for a Series 90 30 PLC The strategy is to calculate a heat dissipation value in Watts for each individual module in the PLC Then these individual values will be added together to obtain a total heat dissipation figure for the PLC When making your calculations don t forget the following To c
55. Back of Insert User can Write B gt cR2 oon ee se 44A726782 015 FOR USE WITH IC693MDL940 lt Module Catalog No Figure 1 1 Example of a Series 90 30 I O Module LED Indicators Circuit status of each I O point on discrete modules is indicated by a green LED mounted at the top of the module and viewable through a clear plastic lens There are two horizontal rows of LEDs with eight LEDs in each row Each LED is identified by a letter and number identification which is illuminated when the applicable LED turns on These letters and numbers clearly identify each LED to assist in program monitoring and trouble shooting The top row is labeled A1 through 8 and the bottom row is labeled B1 through 8 Additionally a blown fuse status for fused or electronically protected output modules is provided by an LED labeled F on the LED cover note that the F is labeled on all discrete I O modules although it is only relevant to fused or electronically protected output modules Front Door Insert Each module has an insert that goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Introduction to the Series 90 30 I O System wiring information for that module type and the outside surface has space to record circuit identification information The outside left edge
56. Bed nix Bh in fee out fae nix Bother eo o o SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog 1 M I D NLM9ONLESSON RAT LESSON ONFIG VALID REPLACE 2 Press the a in softkey F4 to display a list of available analog input modules and their catalog numbers am in Peat out Bev nix Be in fe out fie nix Mother c o o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog CATALOG DESCRIPTION TYPE 1 I C693ALG2Z20 INPUT ANALOG 4PT VOLTAGE IALGV4 2 IC693ALG2Z21 INPUT ANALOG 4PT CURRENT IALGI4 3 IC693ALG2Z22 INPUT ANALOG 16PT VOLTAGE IALGUF 4 IC693ALG223 INPUT ANALOG 16PT CURRENT IALGIF 3 ALGIN4 GENERIC INPUT ANALOG 4 CH lt lt CURSOR TO THE DESIRED CATALOG NUMBER AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY gt gt lt lt PRESS PGDN KEY FOR NEXT PAGE PGUP KEY FOR PREVIOUS PAGE gt gt I D NLM9ONLESSON cots ONFIG VALID REPLACE GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 3 3 To select the 16 Channel Analog Input Module position the cursor on the catalog number for the module IC693ALG223 and press the Enter key am ft in feat out Be mix eb in Jee out Pee nix Bother o o o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog CATALOG DESCRIPTION IC693ALG220 INPUT ANALOG 4PT VOLTAGE IC693ALG221 INPUT ANALOG 4PT CURRENT IC693ALG222 INPUT ANALOG 16PT VOLTAGE IC693ALG223_ INPUT ANALOG 16PT CURRENT IALGIF ALGIN4 GENERIC
57. Black C5 A3 2 Red C6 B3 8 White C7 A4 2 Red Black C8 B4 8 White Black C Common A5 3 Orange N C B5 9 Gray N C A6 3 Orange Black 24V OUT B6 9 Gray Black 0 VOLTS A7 4 Yellow N C B7 10 Pink N C AS 4 Yellow Black D Common B8 10 Pink Black D8 A9 5 Dark Green D7 B9 11 Light Blue D6 A10 5 Dark Green Black D5 B10 11 Light Blue Black D4 All 6 Dark Blue D3 B11 12 Light Green D2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black D1 B12 12 Light Green Black Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0S98F Chapter Discrete Output Modules IC693DVM300 5VDC Input 24VDC Output Digital Valve Driver Module This 4 channel digital valve driver module is capable of driving loads of up to 1 6 Amps at 24 VDC Although it mounts in a standard Series 90 30 PLC slot it does not connect to the PLC backplane Its control power and output power are supplied externally The GE Fanuc IC690PWR124 stand alone power supply would be a suitable choice for the 24VDC output power This module is designed for TTL level 5 Vdc inputs DIGCH 10 03 20 O4 OUTPUT 28V 1 6A max 28V IN 28V RET AUX OUT 15 AUX OUT 15 DIGITAL 1 IN DIGITAL 2 IN DIGITAL 3 IN DIGITAL 4 IN DIGITAL RET 28V1 IN 28V2 IN 28V1 amp 2 RET VALVE 1 OUT VALVE 1 RET VALVE 2 0UT VALVE 2 RET VALVE 3 OUT VALVE 3 RET VALVE 4 0UT Figure 7 1 C693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module Indicator LEDs DIG CH 1 4 These light when their corresponding input is a
58. C 140 F R ED ZZ et Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are m temperature at 25 C 77 F full load m temperature at 60 C 140 F 50 of full load GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 21 Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19 Rack Mounting 3 22 Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10 slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19 inch rack Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets Be sure to follow grounding instructions in Chapter 2 when using these adaptor brackets Failure to properly ground the PLC can result in improper operation damage to equipment and injury to personnel IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Used to mount a baseplate to the front face of a 19 rack Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the plastic baseplate cover NOTE Although the figure below shows the plastic baseplate cover removed this is for illustration purposes only It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket With the bracket in place insert and tighten the two screws included with the bracket through the back of the baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Used to recess mount a baseplate inside a 19 rack A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapt
59. C for cable data sheets m Wire I O devices to the terminal block strip See the applicable chapter for module pin out information Direct Method Connect the IC693CBL327 and C693CBL328 cables both are required or custom made cables to the module s faceplate connectors and wire the stripped ends of the cables directly to the field devices See Appendix C for cable data See the applicable chapter for module pin out information GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 21 Terminal Block Selection Guide for Discrete I O Modules This section shows how to select terminal blocks and related components for three catagories of discrete I O modules 1 32 point input or output modules with a single 50 pin connector 2 16 point input or output modules with standard terminal boards 3 32 point input or output modules with two 24 pin connectors 1 Applying a Terminal Block to 32 Point 50 Pin Connector I O Modules NOTE These modules cannot use Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC components lolelele ejejejejelelelal ejejejejejejejejejejoje je ea eee eee lOl2 2 2lelele 2 2 2 2 2 e 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 o PT RE Procedure The step numbers in the following procedure correspond to the numbers in the figure above See Appendix C for cable data sheets 1 Select a 32 point discrete I O module with a 50 pin connector There are four GE Fanuc modules in this category IC693MDL652 IC693MD
60. Figure 2 11 to a solid chassis ground on the 19 Rack Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown in the previous figure Programmer Grounding For proper operation a computer programmer running PLC software must have a ground connection in common with the applicable baseplate when connecting to a CPU or intelligent module such as a PCM or DSM Normally this common ground connection is provided by ensuring that the programmer s power cord is connected to the same power source with the same ground reference point as the baseplate If the programmer ground is at a different potential than the PLC ground a shock hazard could exist Also damage to the ports or converter if used could occur when the programmer serial cable is connected between the two If it is not possible to ensure this common ground scheme use a port isolator IC690ACC903 between the programmer and PLC serial port connection and avoid touching the programmer and PLC at the same time Warning Failure to follow programmer grounding recommendations could result in personal injury equipment damage or both GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 15 Module Shield Grounding In general the aluminum PLC baseplate is used for module shield grounding On many Series 90 30 I O modules shield connections to the removable terminal block on the module are routed to the baseplate through the module s backplane connector
61. GE Fanuc sales office or visit the GE Fanuc web site www gefanuc com 1 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GF K O898F Chapter General Installation Guidelines 2 This chapter discusses general installation details Other more specific details for particular products are discussed in the applicable chapter Important Note The installation instructions described in this chapter apply to PLC installations that do not require special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments For installations that must conform to more stringent requirements such as CE Mark see GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards Also see Appendix B GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals Standards General Specifications Receiving your Products Visual Inspection When you receive your Series 90 30 PLC system carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage that may have occurred during shipping If any part of the system is damaged notify the carrier immediately The damaged shipping container should be saved as evidence for inspection by the carrier As the consignee it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage that happened during shipment However GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you if such action is necessary Pre installation Check After unpacking Series 90 30 PLC racks cables modules etc record all serial numbers Serial numbers are p
62. However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field In the AI field you can select the next available address the default by pressing the ENT key or by entering a specific address To enter a specific address press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key for example 3 5 then ENT RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AT16 AI035 AI051 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Input Modules Removing Module From Configuration If required this module can be removed from the current configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence Initial Display ROQO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 AI_ To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be RO 03 EMPTY gt S Selecting Input Channel Ranges The range for each of the 16 channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below Assume that the AI address is as previously selected initial display RO 03 HI DEN C gt S AI16 AI035 AI051 To display the channel ranges press the key The display will show Channel 1 or the currently selected channel and the first avail
63. INTERFACE ISOLATION CIRCUITRY wae TIMING GENERATOR ICS A D VOLTAGE CIRCUITS CONVERTER REFERENCE a43844 LL com Kv 4 250 Q 0 5W Lar ame DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER POT ADJUST Figure 10 3 Analog Voltage Input Module Block Diagram for IC693ALG220 GFK 08S98F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 3 IC693ALG220 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides information for connecting field wiring to the 4 Channel Analog Voltage Input module a43103 FIELD WIRING TERMINALS FIELD WIRING J CURRENT INPUT MODE JUMPER OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS SEE TEXT Figure 10 4 Field Wiring for 4 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Note The side of the voltage source can also be tied to the COM terminal if the source is floating to limit common mode voltages The COM connection provides access to the common of the analog circuitry in the module The GND connection provides access to the baseplate frame ground Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details 10 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules Analog Current Input 4 Channel IC693ALG221 The 4 Channel Analog Current Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides four input channels each capable of converting an analog input signal to a digital signal for use as required by your application This mod
64. Ki IC693MDL230 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 120 volt AC Isolated input module Note that since each input is isolated separate from each of the other inputs each input can be powered by a separate AC power source a45030 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING A1 a 7 A2 e lt 7 A3 E e OS B1 O O 7 oo FEO B3 err Oe B4 aera NC Figure 6 1 Field Wiring 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module IC693MDL230 6 2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Input Modules 6 240 Volt AC Isolated Input 8 Point IC693MDL231 The 240 volt AC Isolated Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 isolated input points each with a common power input terminal The input circuits are reactive resistor capacitor inputs Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user This module requires an AC power source it cannot be used with a DC power source LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has a hori
65. MODULE LOAD CURRENT 2 AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 25 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL741 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 27 7 28 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic ESCP Output 1 Amp 16 Point IC693MDL742 The 12 24 volt DC Positive Logic 1 Amp Electronic Short Circuit Protection ESCP Output module for the Series 90 30 PLC provides 16 output points in two groups of eight with a common power output terminal for each group This output module is designed to have positive logic characteristics in that it sources current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The output device is connected between the negative power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators that provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row with the top row labeled Al A8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 B8 points 9 through 16 A red LED labeled F on the right centered between the two rows of green LEDs functions as a tripped electronic short circuit protection indicator it turns ON when any short circuit protection trip occurs The common
66. MODULE OK provides module status information on power up as follows ON status is OK module configured OFF no backplane power or software not running watchdog timer timed out Continuous rapid flashing configuration data not received from CPU m Slow flashes then OFF failed power up diagnostics or encountered code execution error The bottom LED Power Supply OK indicates that the internally generated user side 5V supply is above a minimum designated level Location in System This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system References Used The number of 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input modules which may be installed in a system depends on the amount of AI and I references available Each module uses 1 to 16 AI references depending on the number of channels enabled and from 8 to 40 I references depending on alarm status configuration The available AI references are 64 with CPUs 311 313 and 323 128 with CPU331 1024 with CPUs 340 and 341 and 2048 with CPUs 350 364 GFK O89SF Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 9 10 10 The maximum number of 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input modules which may be installed in a system are m 4inasystem using CPUs 311 313 or 323 m 8 ina system using CPU331 m 12 in a system using CPUs 340 or 341 m 51 in a system using CPUs 350 364 When planning the module configuration for your application you must al
67. Modules Use with the following 16 point I O modules IC693MDL240 IC693MDL645 IC693MDL646 a45586 QDC IOYP OG OYP Maximum wire size per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm2 Width 4 44 112mm Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm OOOO ww amp amp 000000000 amp p OOO0O0000000000O0O O O OO O isee noe OO I 1 1 J Bw Figure C 3 IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block Note The common row terminals labeled with the letter C are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to the applicable chapter in this manual for module wiring diagrams Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail D 6 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D IC693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block for 16 Point Modules Use with the following 16 point I O modules IC693MDL740 IC693MDL742 a45587 szeszes napio 14 AWG 2 10 mm2 Width 4 64 117 86mm T Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm TERMINAL BLOCK 000000000 0 00 ojoo o oe 0O00 000000 A 4 QOGDOOAOAAAO _ Figure C 4 C693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block
68. Modules 6 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 8 Point IC693MDL634 The 24 volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 input points in one group with a common power input terminal This input module is designed to have either positive logic or negative logic characteristics Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Power to operate the field devices can be supplied by the user or an Isolated 24 VDC supply on the power supply 24V OUT and OV OUT terminals can power a limited number of inputs LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 is used by this module An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC syste
69. Negative Logic 2 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 output points in one group with a common power output terminal This output module is designed to have negative logic characteristics in that it sinks current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus The output device is connected between the positive power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row This module uses only the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 A red LED labeled F on the right and centered between the two rows of green LEDs functions as a blown fuse indicator it turns ON when any fuse is blown The module has two 5 amp fuses with each fuse protecting four outputs the first fuse protects Al A4 the second fuse protects A5 A8 The fuses are electrically connected to the same common An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The ou
70. No 3 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 14 Channel No 4 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 15 Channel No 4 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit I Size Third eight I locations available for I SIZE values 24 32 and 40 1 16 Channel No 5 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 17 Channel No 5 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 18 Channel No 6 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 19 Channel No 6 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 20 Channel No 7 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 21 Channel No 7 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 22 Channel No 8 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 23 Channel No 8 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit Fourth eight I locations available for I SIZE values 32 and 40 1 24 Channel No 9 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 25 Channel No 9 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 26 Channel No 10 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 27 Channel No 10 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 28 Channel No 11 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 29 Channel No 11 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 30 C
71. Option Module Replace annually Check the option module user s manual backup battery for additional instructions Check Chapter 6 of GFK 0356P or later for instructions on how to avoid loss of memory contents when replacing battery Ventilation If using ventilation fan in enclosure check for proper operation Keep fingers and tools away from moving fans Clean or replace ventilation air filter if using one at least monthly Mechanical With power OFF check that connectors and modules are tightness seated securely in their sockets and that wire connections are secure For low vibration installations perform annually For high vibration installations check at least quarterly Enclosure Check annually With power OFF remove manuals prints or other loose material that could cause shorts or ventilation blockage or that are flammable from inside of enclosure Gently vacuum dust and dirt that has collected on components Use vacuum cleaner not compressed air for this task Program backup Do this initially after creating any application programs such as the ladder logic program motion programs etc Then any time a change is made to a program make at least one several is better new backup copy Keep old copies clearly marked for a reasonable period of time in case you need to go back to the old design Document each backup copy as to what equipment it is for date it was created or modified version number if a
72. Power Supply is rated for 30 watts output For applications requiring greater 5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply IC693PWR321 this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed from the 5V supply It can operate from an input voltage source in the range of 85 to 264 VAC or 100 to 300 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 4 I1C693PWR330 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Nominal Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts a45625 O PWR STATUS Series 90 30 O RUN INDICATORS O BATT HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT 100 240 VAC 50 60 HZ 100VA CONNECTIONS FOR eae aw AC DC POWER SOURCE E 24 VDC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX B RS 485 BATTERY LITHIUM 7 ee CONNECTOR oS BACK UP BATTERY E oooo0oo0o000 INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC Figure 4 2 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PW R330 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 3
73. Red A6 B3 8 White A7 A4 2 Red Black A8 B4 8 White Black A Common A5 3 Orange AVIN B5 9 Gray AVIN A6 3 Orange Black N C B6 9 Gray Black N C A7 4 Yellow BVIN B7 10 Pink BVIN A8 4 Yellow Black B Common B8 10 Pink Black B8 A9 5 Dark Green B7 B9 11 Light Blue B6 A10 5 Dark Green Black B5 B10 11 Light Blue Black B4 All 6 Dark Blue B3 B11 12 Light Green B2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black B1 B12 2 Light Green Black Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 08S98F GFK 08S98F Discrete Output Modules Wiring for Module Groups C and D connector on left front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number C1 Al l Brown C2 Bl 7 Violet C3 A2 1 Brown Black C4 B2 J Violet Black C5 A3 2 Red C6 B3 8 White C7 A4 2 Red Black C8 B4 8 White Black C Common A5 3 Orange CVIN B5 9 Gray CVIN A6 3 Orange Black N C B6 9 Gray Black N C A7 4 Yellow DVIN B7 10 Pink DVIN A8 4 Yellow Black D Common B8 10 Pink Black D8 A9 5 Dark Green D7 B9 11 Light Blue D6 A10 5 Dark Green Black D5 B10 11 Light Blue Black D4 All 6 Dark Blue D3 Bll 12 Light Green D2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black D1 B12 12 Light Green Black Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 53 Chapter Discrete Combination I O Modules S 120 Volt AC Input Relay Output 8 Inputs 8 Outputs IC693
74. Red White Brown Orange White Brown Yellow White Brown Green White Brown Blue Violet White Brown Violet Gray White Brown Gray White White Red Orange White Black White Red Yellow White Brown White Red Green White Red White Red Blue White Orange White Red Violet White Yellow White Red Gray White Green White Orange Yellow White Blue White Orange Green White Violet White Orange Blue White Gray White Orange Violet White Black Brown White Orange Gray White Black Red White Yellow Green White Black Orange White Yellow Blue White Black Yellow White Yellow Violet White Black Green White Yellow Gray White Black Blue White Green Blue O OANNWN MN FWY e O ONIN MN FWY GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 15 IC693CBL310 T O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules Note This cable is obsolete Please use 1C693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 See the data sheet for these cables for details The replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC Function of cable This 10 3 meterO prewired cable was used with all Series 90 30 high density 32 point I O modules that use the Fujitsu 24 pin user I O connector Each of these modules has two of these connectors mounted side by side I O Interface cables have a 24 pin female connector on one end for connection to the module and stripped and tinned wires on the other end Catalog numbers for 32 point modules having two 24 pin conn
75. Set Reference Manual GFK 0467 includes a System Status Reference Table Reference Tables There are two types of reference tables standard and mixed These tables show groups of memory addresses and their status The status of discrete addresses will be shown as either logic 1 or logic 0 For analog and register addresses values will be displayed Standard reference tables display only one type of memory address such as all of the I bits Mixed reference tables are created by the user who selects what addresses to display in the tables These mixed tables can contain discrete analog and register references all in one table This makes them useful for gathering numerous related addresses on one screen where they can all be viewed or monitored at the same time This saves time compared with searching or scrolling through the ladder logic screens to find these addresses Override feature This feature must be used with caution to ensure the safety of personnel and equipment Normally the machine should not be cycling and all conditions should be such that the output device can be turned on without any harm being done This method can be used to check an output circuit from the ladder screen all the way to the device being controlled For example when overriding and toggling a Q output to an ON state the relay solenoid or other device being controlled should turn on or pick up If it does not the status light on the output module c
76. Six Terminal Board Five Terminal Board Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections to the Isolated 24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for external circuits within power limitations of the supply If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted the Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation GFK 0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 19 Common Series 90 30 Power Supply Features Status Indicator Lights on all Power Supplies Four LEDs are located on the upper right front of the power supply faceplate The purpose of these LEDs is as follows PWR OK RUN BATT The top green LED labeled PWR provides an indication of the operating state of the power supply The LED is ON when the power supply has a correct source of power and is operating properly and OFF when a power supply fault occurs or power is not applied The second green LED labeled OK is steady ON if the PLC is operating properly and OFF if a problem is detected by the PLC The third green LED labeled RUN is steady ON when the PLC is in the RUN mode The bottom red LED labeled BATT will be ON if the memory backup battery voltage is too low to maintain the memory under a loss of power condition otherwise it remains OFF If this LED is ON the Lithium battery must be replaced before removing power from the rack or PLC memory may be
77. Solenoid number of Operations 24 to 120 VAC 150 000 24 to 120 VAC 500 000 24 to 120 VAC 1 000 000 240 VAC 50 000 240 VAC 500 000 240 VAC 200 000 24 VDC 50 000 24 VDC 100 000 24 VDC 500 000 24 VDC f 1 000 000 125 VDC i 300 000 Assumes a 7 ms time constant Relay contact life when switching inductive loads will approach resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads The 1A 200V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression example is an industry standard 1N4935 The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components available from most electronics distributors a45152A a45151A AC LOADS DC LOADS PTR 022 1000 Output Module soov 1 2W IC693MDL930 1A 200V YY Y Load Coil AC SOURCE DC SUPPLY Figure 7 30 Load Suppression Examples for C693MDL930 Output Module Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules Isolated Relay Output N C and Form C 8 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL931 This 8 Amp Isolated Relay Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 4 normally closed and 4 Form C relay circuits for controlling output loads provided by the user The output switching capacity of each circuit is 8 amps for the normally closed contacts or the normally open contacts Each output relay is isolated
78. Terminal Boards 2 18 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module terminal boards have either 10 or 20 screw terminals that will accept from two AWG 22 0 36 mm to two AWG 16 1 3 mm or one AWG 14 2 1 mm copper 90 C 194 F wire s Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires but the wires into any given terminal should be the same type both solid or both stranded to ensure a good connection Wires are routed to and from the terminals out of the bottom of the terminal board cavity The suggested torque for the I O terminal board connection screws is from 9 6 in lbs to 11 5 in lbs 1 1 1 3 Newton meters Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines For 24 volt DC input modules an internal 24 volt power connection is provided on the terminal board to supply a limited number of input devices Also a 24 volt DC output is available on the power supply module s terminal board to supply a limited number of output devices Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16 Point Discrete Modules The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is an option for certain Series 90 30 discrete I O modules See Appendix D to select the applicable TBQC components If using this option follow these installation steps m Remove standard terminal board from module This terminal board will not be used with the TBQC components so you may store it as a spare for other modules m Install the C
79. VAC or 240 VAC is present on the AC Power Supply The cover protects against accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the operator or maintenance personnel Both the Standard IC693PWR321 and High Capacity IC693PWR330 AC DC power supplies currently have six terminals for user connections Early versions of some Series 90 30 power supplies had five terminals see next figure The wiring methods for both five terminal and six terminal types is similar except that step 3 below does not apply to the five terminal type The power supply terminal boards will accept one AWG 14 2 1 mm or two AWG 16 1 3 mm copper 75 C 167 F wires Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires but the wires in any given terminal should be the same type The suggested torque for the power supply terminal board is 12 in Ibs 1 36 Newton meters Open the door protecting the terminal board and make the following connections from the AC power source and ground connections system grounding requirements are described in detail later in this chapter 1 These are wide range supplies that can operate from an AC power source within the nominal range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50 60 Hz This may vary 15 to 10 for a total maximum range of 85 VAC to 264 VAC These are auto ranging supplies that do not require jumper or switch settings for selection of power source voltage 2 Connect the hot and neutral wires or lines L1 and L2 to the
80. Watt Power Supply Littlefuse 313005 IC693TCM302 Temperature Control 2A 1 N A Littlefuse 273002 303 Module 1 Mounted in clip Accessible by removing circuit board from module housing 2 Line fuse Mounted in clip Accessible by removing module front cover 3 1C693PWR321W and later versions and IC693PWR330E and later versions have two fuses Earlier versions have one fuse 13 6 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual July 2000 GFK O898F Maintenance and Troubleshooting Spare Replacement Parts Two kits IC693ACC319 and IC693ACC320 provide mechanical spare parts for Series 90 30 modules One covers I O CPU PCM and other modules the other is for power supply modules These kits provide parts such as module levers front covers cases etc The following table describes the contents of each kit Table 13 2 Spare Replacement Parts 1C693ACC319 qty 10 I O CPU PCM case lever Spare parts kit for I O qty 10 Spring pins cap CPU and PCM modules qty 2 PCM module front cover qty 2 PCM lens cap qty 2 CPU module case 1C693ACC320 qty 2 Power supply lever Spare parts kit for power qty 2 Spring pin for power supply lever supplies qty 2 Spring for power supply lever qty 2 Power supply lens cap qty 2 Power supply terminal cover 1C693ACC301 see Note qty 2 Memory backup battery for CPU and PCM Memory Backup Battery modules Fuses See Fuse List For Series 90 30
81. all of the required wiring information in one table This table has the following information module point number m O connector pin number O cable pair number m wire color code base color or base color with tracer color Al A8 BI B8 Cl C8 D1 D8 voltage and common points Al through A12 and B1 through B12 pair 1 through pair 12 Columns are also provided for circuit references and customer wire numbers Please copy and use the work sheets on this and the following page as needed when wiring the 5 12 VDC TTL Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input module Wiring for Module Groups A and B connector on right front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number Al Al 1 Brown A2 B1 7 Violet A3 A2 l Brown Black A4 B2 7 Violet Black A5 A3 2 Red A6 B3 8 White A7 A4 2 Red Black A8 B4 8 White Black A Common A5 3 Orange N C B5 9 Gray N C A6 3 Orange Black 5V OUT B6 9 Gray Black 0 VOLTS A7 4 Yellow N C B7 10 Pink N C AS 4 Yellow Black B Common B8 10 Pink Black B8 A9 5 Dark Green B7 B9 11 Light Blue B6 A10 5 Dark Green Black B5 B10 11 Light Blue Black B4 All 6 Dark Blue B3 B11 12 Light Green B2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black B1 B12 12 Light Green Black Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK 08S98F Discrete I
82. are reported when the input current drops below 4mA In this mode if OmA is input the value reported to the PLC is 8 000 Alarm Low Enter a value that causes an alarm low indication to be passed to the PLC Each channel has a low limit alarm value ALARM LO which causes I points to be set Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive Value checking should be done to determine if the alarm low values are allowed for the appropriate range The values allowed are 4to20mA Range 0 to 32759 Qto20mA Range 0 to 32759 4to20mA Range 8 000 to 32759 Alarm High Enter a value that causes an alarm high indication to be passed to the PLC Each channel has a high limit alarm value ALARM HI which causes I points to be set Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive Value checking should be done to determine if the alarm high values are allowed for the appropriate range The values allowed are 4to20mA Range 1 to 32760 Qto20mA Range 1 to 32760 4to20mA Range 7999 to 32760 Default selection 6 Press Rack Shift F1 or the Escape key to return to the rack display 10 34 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules Configuring IC693ALG223 Using Hand Held Programmer You can also configure the 16 Channel Analog Current Input module using the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer In addition to the information in this section refer to GF
83. as the obsolete cables Description These cables each have a right angle 24 pin connector on one end and a set of stripped wire ends on the other These two cables are identical except for their opposite connector orientations This difference in the cables connector orientations is for the purpose of matching the opposing connector orientations on the dual connector type of 32 point I O modules 10 Feet 3 Meters ____ gt Figure B 17 IC693CBL327 328 Cables Note Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps If using these cables with a 16 point Output module with a higher output current rating you must use the lower value of 1 2 for the maximum load current rating If you have field devices that require more than 1 2 Amps do not use a TBQC assembly Use the standard Terminal Board instead Applications These cables are for use with Series 90 30 I O modules that have the Fujitsu 24 pin user I O connector There are two categories of these modules 32 point modules with two 24 pin connectors IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 The IC693CBL327 cable is for the modules left side connector front view and the IC693CBL328 cable is for the modules right side connector The modules nght side connector interfaces with I O circuit groups A and B the modules left side connector interfaces with groups C and D See Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules
84. be installed and used in conformance with product specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals standards and general specifications The information in this appendix is also available in a separate data sheet GFK 0867 AGENCY APPROVALS OVERVIEW Comments Quality Assurance in Design Development ISO9001 Certification by BSI Quality Assurance Production Installation amp Servicing Safety for Industrial Control Equipment UL508 Certification by Underwriters Laboratories C UL gt CSA22 2 or Certification by Underwriters Laboratories 142 M1987 C UL gt or Canadian Standards Association for selected Series 90 Genius VersaMax and Field Control modules UL1604 Certification by Underwriters Laboratory for with C UL gt VersaMax Field Control and selected Series 90 and Genius modules Safety for Hazardous Locations FM3611 Certification by Factory Mutual for selected Class I Div II A B C D Genius and Series 90 70 modules CSA22 2 213 M1987 Certification by Canadian Standards Association for selected Genius modules Safety for Hazardous Locations CENELEC Certification by DEMKO through Underwriters Class I Zone 2 A B C D prEN50021 Laboratory for selected Series 90 30 and Field Control modules and VersaMax products UL2279 Certification by Underwriters Laboratory for IEC 79 15 VersaMax products and selected Series 90 30 and Field Control modules European EMC and Low Voltage CE Mark Certification by Compete
85. below limit 1 above or 1 10 Input Ch 2 ALARM LO 0 indicates value above limit 1 below or The third eight locations available for 1 SIZE values 24 1 16 Output Ch 1 BROKEN WIRE 0 OK 1 Wire Broken Current modes only I 17 Output Ch 2 BROKEN WIRE 0 OK 1 Wire Broken Current modes only 1 18 through I 23 Reserved for future modules Not used in this module One of four input or output ranges can be selected two are voltage ranges The default range is O to 10V where input or output voltage values range from O to 10 volts In input mode they report O to 32767 integer values to the CPU and in output mode values between O and 32767 are sent to the module In the 10 to 10V range values between 32768 to 32767 are sent or received from the CPU over an input voltage range of 10 to 10V The two current ranges are 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA In each of the current ranges values between 0 and 32767 are reported back from the module to sent to the module for the entire range Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Values Sent From CPU to Module for Output Channels The following tables show values sent from the CPU to the module for the Output channels Module Mode Allowed Values Sent values from CPU 10 to 10 V 32768 to 32767 32768 to 32767 4 to 20 mA 0 to 32000 0 to 32767 0 to 20 mA 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 Allo
86. blue to indicate a low voltage module There are no fuses on this module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 13 Specifications for C693MDL741 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 16 two groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between groups Output Current 0 5 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum per common Output Characteristics Output Voltage Drop 0 5 volts maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 110 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL741 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC negative logic 0 5 amp output module a43100 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING L rete wo l 8 i A NO z N A OTHER H CIRCUITS z g O1 oO z g P INS i N B IF 0000 i Figure 7 24 IC693MDL741 Output Module Field Wiring a45049 TOTAL 3
87. board is still in good condition Simply remove the wired terminal board from the old module and install it on the new module if it is good condition The terminal board screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring voltages while testing or troubleshooting m Hinged Front Cover The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board connections For normal operation it is kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally touching a hot terminal Note in the following figure that the back side of the front cover insert contains a schematic diagram of the terminal board connections The module catalog number IC693ALG391 in this example is printed on the bottom of the front cover insert The module catalog number is also printed on the label on the side of the module However in order to see this side label the module has to be removed from the PLC On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module s I O points You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for each point on the appropriate line to aid in testing or troubleshooting Also on the front side of the front cover insert running vertically on the left edge of the insert is a colored line that identifies the type of module Blue DC Red AC and Gray Analog Module Lens Cap Located on the top front of the module it covers the LED Light Emitting Diode OK status light This light indicates the basic status of th
88. cccceeeeees A 1 Appendix B GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals Standards B 1 Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets cece cece e ees C 1 C693CBL300 301 302 312 313 314 I O Bus Expansion Cables 4onececcnecese goss Gores euesenesssene see C 2 Building Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables C 4 IC693CBL306 307 Extension Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules C 13 xiv Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications GFK O898F Contents IC693CBL308 309 I O Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules 20005 C 15 IC693CBL310 I O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules C 16 IC693CBL315 I O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules C 19 1C693CBL321 322 323 I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector 24 Pin C 23 1C693CBL327 328 I O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24 Pin Connector C 26 1C693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables 24 Pin I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector C 31 Appendix D Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D 1 TBOC Components for 16 Point Modules 0 0 cece eee eee D 2 Terminal BIOCKY 24 i240 nse5beheetastase osudeacuscnses eu gecd ae es ox D 2 Cable Current AUN 24405 40244554 tee ne as ERRENA ae ERNE Ea D 2 Cable Selection and Cross Reference for 16 Point Modules D 3 IC693ACC334 I O Face Plate for 16 Point Modules
89. connector interfaces with groups C and D The other end of the cables connect to the TBQC IC693ACC337 terminal block See GFK 0898 the Series 90 30 PLC VO Module Specifications Manual for details about these modules See Appendix J for information on the TBQC components 16 point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I O faceplate adaptor Use the C693CBL330 332 334 right side cables for this application See Appendix J for information on the TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connector components GFK O898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 33 Appendix Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D This appendix describes the optional terminal block components for certain Series 90 30 discrete I O modules This system is referred to as the Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC system The advantage of this system is that it allows the listed discrete I O modules to be quickly connected to TBQC terminal blocks In this system the TBQC terminal block shown below is snapped onto a standard DIN rail Then a factory made cable is connected between the terminal block s connector and the I O module s connector Some I O modules come equipped with connectors and others have terminal boards an I O module that has a terminal board instead of a connector is converted into a connector type using an adapter faceplate NOTE The TBQC system is not recommended for use with Analog modules because it does not meet the shielding recommendations for Anal
90. devices are made to screw terminals on a removable 20 terminal connector block mounted on the front of the module The actual terminals used are described in the following table and are shown in the following wiring diagrams Terminal Assignments Pin assignments for the 20 terminal I O connector on the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module are as shown in the following table Table 10 4 Terminal Pin Assignments for IC693ALG222 Namee Sime sit eto OOOO Number Name Signal Definition e Sk as Diet as 2 czar e S Et Ge ioc Che Nee e ci Sn Est ae Disc Ch Pose ei GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 13 IC693ALG222 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Diagrams 10 14 The following figures provide information for connecting field wiring to the user terminal board on the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module TERMINALS AALUII FIELD WIRING FIELD WIRING I CH10 I CH12 tI CH14 GHE GND NOT CONNECTED OPTIONAL SHIELD CONNECTION Figure 10 11 Field Wiring for 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module IC693ALG222 Single Ended Mode Note Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0S98F Analog Input Modules TERMINALS 247018 FIELD WIRING FIELD WIRING 2 E N E CH2 f hy CH3 H t o p i Le 1 cage ons H Ly ce g oa iT CHe L
91. done to determine if the alarm high values are al lowed for the appropriate range The values allowed are Oto 10V Range 0 to 32760 10to 10V Range 32767 to 32752 Default selection 6 Press Rack Shift F1 or the Escape key to return to the rack display GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 2 Configuring C693ALG222 Using Hand Held Programmer You can also configure the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module using the Hand Held Programmer In addition to the information in this section refer to GFK 0402 the Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual for more information on configuration of Intelligent I O modules Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 16 If a module had been previously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 16 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AJ You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but can not change the number of actively scanned channels Module Present 10
92. every possible layout Instead this section offers guidelines and an example to help you lay out your system Benefits of a Good Layout Safe Reliable and Accessible The layout of your system has a lot to do with how reliably your system will operate how easy it will be to install how well it will look and how easy and safe it will be to maintain Safety and Maintenance A good layout helps minimize the chance of electrical shock to personnel working on the system It lets maintenance technicians easily access the unit to make measurements load software check indicator lights remove and replace modules etc A good layout also makes it easier to trace wiring and locate components while troubleshooting which helps reduce equipment downtime Reliability Proper layout promotes good heat dissipation and helps eliminate electrical noise from the system Excess heat and noise are two major causes of electronic component failure Installation Efficiency A well designed layout allows sufficient room to mount and wire the unit This saves time and frustration Appearance A neat and orderly layout gives others a favorable impression of your system It lets others know that careful thought went into the design of the system PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement The following list provides PLC rack mounting location guidelines For an example layout see the figure Series 90 30 Example Layout on the next
93. from 12 VDC to 30 VDC Although it is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 12 VDC it will not start with initial input voltages of less than 18 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 10 IC693PW R331 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power F Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts P a45625A PWR IC693PWR331 GE Fanuc ok Deus Series 90 30 O RUN INDICATORS O BATT HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER u 24 VDC 50 WATT CONNECTIONS FOR DC POWER SOURCE E t INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR Sie MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC OBA MAX RS 485 T SERIAL PORT a BATTERY LITHIUM CE CONNECTOR BACK UP pe BATTERY E Figure 4 8 Series 90 30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply IC693PW R331 Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 13 Table 4 11 Specifications for IC693PW R331 Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage Input Voltage Range Start Run Input Power Inrush Current Output Power Outp
94. from field to field by pressing the Cursor Movement or Arrow keys When you are in the field you want to modify you can either type in your choice or press the Tab key to scroll through the available selections or Shift Tab to reverse the direction of the scrolling Note The entry in the Stop Mode field HOLD or DEFLOW DEFault LOW determines how the outputs will behave when the module is toggled from RUN to STOP mode When this value is set to HOLD default the outputs will retain their last state When you change this value to DEFLOW the output will go to Zero Other Configuration Considerations 12 14 The entry in I Size will only accept 8 16 and 24 and will accept only I addresses This field denotes the number of bits returned to the user The only allowable entries for the SAI Ref Adr are AI addresses Similarly the only allowable entries for the AQ Ref Adr are AQ addresses The Alarm Low limit for each channel must be less than its corresponding Alarm High limit The AI Ref Adr field is the reference address for the AI data and points to the start of the locations in the AI memory where the input data to the module begins Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32 767 or 32768 to 32 767 depending on the range type selected The AQ Ref Ader field is the reference address for the AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the WAQ memory where the outpu
95. from the other relays and each relay has a separate common power output terminal The relay outputs can control a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate the field devices connected to this module There are no fuses on this module LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row This module uses the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 for output status the bottom row is not used and the fuse LED is not used An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 17 Specifications for C693MDL931 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC 120 240 volts AC 50 60 Hz nominal see the following table for exceptions Output Voltage Range 5 to 30 volts DC 5 to 250 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 8 isolated outputs Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between groups Maximum Lo
96. increase in the output The net effect for an input module is that an increased input will not cause the LSB Least Significant Bit of the data word in the AI table to change The size of the step depends on the range of the analog signal the resolution of the conversion and the number of LSBs disregarded These factors can be used to calculate the size of the step For example the analog output module provides outputs from 4 to 20 mA in 12 bits Therefore each bit represents 20 4 mA 2 bits 3 906 uA bit However factory calibration adjusts for an even number of microamps per bit 4 uA bit Since the three LSBs in the AQ output are not used in the conversion an 8 count 2 3 increase in the AQ output is needed to change the analog output by 4 uA The software rounding algorithm causes the step to rotate between a count of 7 and a count of 9 instead of 8 The values supplied in Table 3 3 provide you with the information needed to calculate step sizes The following figure shows a portion of the analog current output versus the corresponding data word in AQ a44648 4 020 4 016 4 012 CURRENT mA 4 008 4 004 4 000 0 5 12 21 28 37 44 AQ decimal Figure 9 6 Stair Step Effect on Analog Values Although the analog signals are stair step they can be approximated with a linear graph The following figures show the relationship between voltage and current in the WAQ and AI data words a44649 a44650 decimal 32
97. length 0 5 Meter IC693CBL334 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL323 Cable length 0 5 Meter Cable Kits IC693CBKO002 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL329 left side and IC693CBL330 right side cables IC693CBKO03 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL331 left side and IC693CBL332 right side cables IC693CBKO004 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL333 left side and IC693CBL334 right side cables Connector Depth The following figure shows that the cable connectors extend 2 out from the face of the Series 90 30 modules they are connected to The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the 2 depth added by this connector Series 90 30 I O Module 2 0 gt Figure B 21 Dimension for Depth of Connector C 32 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F I O Cable Data Sheets Applications These cables connect from Series 90 30 I O modules that use the Fuyitsu 24 pin I O connector to Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC blocks There are two categories of these modules 32 point modules with two 24 pin connectors IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 The IC693CBL329 331 333 cables are for the modules left side connector front view and the IC693CBL330 332 334 cables are for the modules right side connector The modules right side connector interfaces with I O circuit groups A and B the modules left side
98. need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor Three of the largest US distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at 800 522 0084 Milgray at 800 MILGRAY and Vantage at 800 843 0707 If none of these distributors service your area then contact Fujitsu Microelectronics in San Jose California USA via telephone at 408 922 9000 or via fax at 408 954 0616 for further information It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution If you have any further questions about this issue please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support Hotline at 1 800 GE FANUC 1 800 433 2682 or International dial direct 804 978 6036 Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table Cables are made of 12 twisted pairs wire size is 24 AWG 0 22mm2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets Table B 5 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Al 1 BROWN Bl 7 VIOLET A2 1 BROWN BLACK B2 7 VIOLET BLACK A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE A4 2 RED BLACK B4 8 WHITE BLACK A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY A6 3 ORANGE BLACK B6 9 GRAY BLACK A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK A8 4 Y
99. no more than 30 watts The power required by external circuits connected to the 24 VDC OUTPUT terminals on the power supply terminal strip should be added to the calculation Example 1 Series 90 30 Model 323 Embedded CPU 10 slot baseplate AV Isolated 24V Relay TCP Embedded CPU Baspa 0 OO ooo TC693PRG300 Hand Held Programmer 10 J sA Analog Output TOC ICGB3ALG220 Andog a f TS TARS Come f o ooo o ooo PEVDC Input TSpomsy f s t o o C E e CMD Omp Mode mo f f CMD mp Mode w ooo ooo TCMB Output Mode a0 f f MDO Relay oMa r Cd o C S Sid Totals milliamps 1281 458 205 Watts 6 41 10 99 4 92 Tol Watts 22 32 OOOO S S Example 2 Series 90 30 Model 363 Modular CPU 10 slot baseplate AV Isolated 24V Relay TECHS Modular CPU Bavephte 20 SST eses CPU Mode f o ooo ooo FICSHOACCIOI Miniconvener K wo f eMM Mode as ooo o o ooo TAO Analog Output a O o ooo TSAO Andog a f TC A00 HS Comer f o ooo o ooo CA E e CMD Omp Mode mo f f CMD Input Module o ooo ooo CA 300 OMD Relay Out Moa 7 dT o Totals milliamps 2336 338 135 Watts 11 68 8 11 3 24 Total Watts 2303 OOOO S S Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Chapter General Discrete I O Module Information 5 This chapter contains specifications and wiring information for Series 90 30 Discrete I O modules Modules are listed by module type Input Output mixed Input Output and High Density T
100. not sufficient to only solder the drain wire to the connector shell It is required that the cable s shield be continuous across the entire length of the cable including at the terminations The figure below shows the recommended method for folding the braided shield back before inserting the cable into a metallized cover a45524 Foil amp Braid to be folded back over ferrule and Split Ring Cable ground wire Ferrule Jacket Conductors Ground Wire Attach to Pin 1 for custom length cables OR Fold back for custom Wye cables See Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions for description of when to attach drain wire to pin 1 Figure B 2 How to use Split Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield For typical industrial applications all expansion and remote baseplate cables can be made with plastic shell covers and should be wired as shown in Figure 10 19 In either case pin 1 should be wired into both ends of the custom length cable and the recommendations listed below should be followed for the Wye cables treatment in the remote IC693CHS392 399 baseplates When using 100 shielded cables all local CPU and expansion baseplates in the system must be solidly referenced to the same ground point or a potential difference between baseplates could disturb signal transmission Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions In early remote baseplates versions IC693CHS393E and earlier and C693CHS
101. of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts a44854A l PWR32 O PWR C693 328 GE Fanuc o ok SYSTEM o STATUS Series 90 30 V RUN INDICATORS O BATT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STANDARD POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER OQ see CONNECTIONS ews FOR 50 WATT DC POWER SOURCE ToT E INTERNAL POWER HH l SOURCE FOR i o MODULES REQUIRING j 24 VDC OUTPUT 24VDC f 0 8A MAX P RS 485 T SERIAL PORT E e BATTERY E LITHIUM ee IE CONNECTOR BACK UP Coe E BATTERY a Figure 4 6 Series 90 30 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWR328 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Table 4 9 Specifications for IC693PWR328 Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 48 VDC Input Voltage Range 38 to 56 VDC Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load Inrush Current 4A peak 100 ms maximum Output Power 5 VDC 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 24 to 28 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4to7V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 4 A maximum Ride Through Time 14 ms minimum Standards Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PW R328 The follo
102. of connector shells as shown in figure on next page The connector on the I O faceplate is oriented as shown below with the rows labeled A1 A12 and B1 B12 A1 and B1 are towards top of module faceplate GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 23 Top of I O Faceplate Pin A1 Pin B1 Pin A12 Pin B12 Figure B 14 Connector Orientation on I O Faceplate a I gt cl Length o B1 B12 A12 IC693CBL321 3 feet 1 meter IC693CBL322 6 feet 2 meters IC693CBL323 1 5 feet 0 5 meter Length is measured from backs of connector shells as shown above Figure B 15 I O Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable C 24 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F I O Cable Data Sheets Connector Depth The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector PLC Side View 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure B 16 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC GFK O898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 25 IC693CBL327 328 I O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24 Pin Connector C 26 Note These cables replace obsolete I O Interface cable IC693CBL315 These replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clear ance space required in front of the PLC These replacement cables use the same pin outs
103. one group of eight outputs Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Output Current 2 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum per fuse at 60 C 140 F 4 amps maximum per fuse at 50 C 122 F Output Characteristics Inrush Current 9 4 amps for 10 ms Output Voltage Drop 1 2 volts maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 55 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on next page Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL730 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC positive logic 2 amp output module a43097 ello MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING orcun 5A 0i Fuse for OTHER __ 5A A5 A8 O Fuse for Outputs A1 A4 gt 1 uf OHROHOHO Hf T Ol l l ix O OO O O OTHER Figure 7 10 IC693MDL730 Output Module Field Wiring a43836 1A PER r a POINT 2A PER POINT TOTAL MODULE CURRENT AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 11 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL730
104. oo a o oe ooe S o e ES a S EAE E S 4 26 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GF K O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Catalog 24 VDC 24 VDC cease Sa Lage PO Wome E E TCSSDSNIETSTE Motion Mate DSNIIE orDSMBTA Mowe BR IC693MAR590 120 VAC Input relay Output 8 In 8 Out PF 80 fT 1C693MDL230 120 VAC Isolated 8 Point Input i ee ae Be aoaea o o o ee y E e a G 8 ee e o o o e e ao o BS A EE E Eene a A SO o ee a e s o Eene e e a o een A e o o o eo ae Son pa 8 ce BBC Pee oe Pott E E ieee BE VBC Rega gis TOP E S ices A ans RT TOTO E 24 VDC Negative Logic FAST 16 Point Input 120 E To Pa at LEEN AVDE Peer gis FAST Te Pott 125 VDC Pos Neg Logic 6 Point Output W e Rg NOAA Poa SN o Eon 27D pt Ry Oo ARO y o CSTE Temps Como E E Tt Refer to module specifications in Chapter 6 for more details t Note that the model 350 364 CPUs do not support the A version IC690ACC901A of the Miniconverter o e E E a GFK 0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies ADT 4 28 Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples Following are examples of calculations for determining the total load placed on a Series 90 30 PLC power supply by the Series 90 30 PLC hardware All current figures are expressed in milliamps Note that although each output is rated at 15 or 20 watts with the exception that the 5 VDC output for the High Capacity power supply is rated at 30 watts the total combined output can be
105. or an electronics catalog The percent of on time can be estimated by someone familiar with how the equipment operates or will operate Multiply the Output Voltage Drop times the current value times the estimated percent of on time to arrive at average power dissipation for that output Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F GFK O898F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation Repeat for all outputs on the module To save time you could determine if several outputs were similar in current draw and on time so that you would only have to make their calculation once Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Output modules in the rack Discrete Output Module Example The IC693MDL340 section of Chapter 7 lists the following for the IC693MDL340 16 Point Discrete 120VAC Output Module Output Voltage Drop 1 5 Volts maximum Use that value for all of the calculations for this module In this example two of the Output module s output points drive solenoids that control the advance and retract travel of a hydraulic cylinder The solenoid manufacturer s data sheet shows that each solenoid draws 1 0 Amp The cylinder advances and retracts once every 60 seconds that the machine is cycling It takes 6 seconds to advance and 6 seconds to retract Since the cylinder takes equal time to advance and retract both solenoids are on for equal lengths of time 6 seconds out of every 60 seconds which is 10 of the time T
106. orientation is preferred for maximum heat dissipation Other mounting orientations will require derating the Power Supply current capabilities Please see the section Load Ratings Temperature and Mounting Position in Chapter 3 for information on this All baseplates must be grounded The Baseplate Safety Grounding section of this chapter has details The Rack Number Selection switch must be set on each Expansion or Remote baseplate A CPU baseplate does not require this switch Rack numbers should be assigned by the system designer Failure to set the Rack Number Selection switches properly will result in system malfunction See Chapter 3 for details on setting these switches Mounting a Baseplate to a 19 Rack 2 10 Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10 slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19 inch rack Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Used to mount a baseplate to the front face of a 19 rack Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the plastic baseplate cover NOTE Although the figure below shows the plastic baseplate cover removed this is for illustration purposes only It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket With the bracket in place insert and tighten the two screws included with the bracket through
107. power present gt eson ore lepine ormas mae penaa OK OFF Module not OK feso on inipon Location in System This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system References Used The number of 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output modules which may be installed in a system depends on the amount of AQ and lI references available Each module uses 8 WAQ references depending on the number of channels enabled and 8 or 16 I references depending on open wire detect configuration There are 32 AQ references available in a Model 311 Model 313 and Model 323 system 64 AQ references available in a Model 331 system 256 AQ references available in a Model 340 and Model 341 system and 512 AQ references available in a Model 351 and Model 352 system Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Output Modules The maximum number of 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output modules that can be installed in a system are m 4 in a system using CPU Models 311 313 or 323 m in a system using CPU Model 331 m 32 in a system using CPU Models 340 and 341 m 64 ina system using CPU Models 350 364 Other Configuration Considerations When planning the module configuration for your application you must also consider the load capacity of the installed power supply and the total load requirements of all modules that are installed in the baseplate Ref
108. pts 120 vac out 0 5 amp 12 pts 7 4 120 vac out 0 5 amp 16 pts 7 8 120 240 vac isolated out 2 amp 5 pts 7 10 120 240 vac out 2 amp 8 pts 7 6 125 vdc pos neg logic in 8 pts 125 vdc pos neg logic out 1 amp 6 pts 17 22 24 vac or vdc pos neg logic in 16 ots 6 7 24 vdc in relay out 8 in 8 out 8 5 24 vdc pos neg logic in FAST 16 pts 24 vdc pos neg logic in FAST 32 pts 240 vac isolated in 8 pts 6 3 5 12_vdc TTL pos neg logic in 32 pts 5 24 vdc TTL negative logic out 32 pts za analog combo module 12 1 analog current in 16 channel analog current in 4 channel 10 5 analog current out 2 channel analog current voltage out 8 channel nici analog voltage in 16 channel 10 9 analog voltage in 4 channel 10 1 analog voltage out 2 channel Input simulator 8 16 pts J 6 17 isolated relay n c and form c out 8 amp 8 pts 7 33 isolated relay n o 4 amp 8 pts relay n o out 2 amp 16 pts I O Modules 32 point features 5 5 Index 5 Index 50 pin 32 point figure 5 6 1C693ACC334 TBQC faceplate D 3 ane pea 1C693ACC377 TBQC D 13 andard density 5 1C693CBKO002 cable kit D 12 eee ta 9 11 IC693CBK002 003 004 cable kits f general data 9 1 y CAOS KSO Figure 9 3 TBQC C 32 load requirements 9 3 1C693CBK003 D 12 maximum number per system 9 12 1C693CBK004 user_references and current requiremen
109. resistive maximum per output 2 amps pilot duty per output 20 amps maximum per module for UL installations Minimum Load 10 mA Maximum Inrush 5 amps On Response Time 15 ms maximum Off Response Time 15 ms maximum Int Power Consumption 6 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane 70 mA all outputs on from relay 24V bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on following page Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL930 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 4 amp Relay Output module a43102 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING D A 3 V a lm a 4 V a2 hH a 6 V A3 8 G0 H NOT USED 11 NOT USED 13 gt Br Bi a 14 Q B2 16 w 17 D B3 o odra 20 NOT USED Figure 7 28 IC693MDL930 Output Module Field Wiring a43838 TOTAL MODULE LOAD CURRENT AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 29 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL930 GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 31 7 32 Table 7 16 Load Current Limitations for IC693MDL930 Operating Maximum Current for Load Type Typical Contact Life Voltage Lamp or
110. sense which allows the load common or ground to be different than the supply of the output module by a small voltage Current loop signals are less susceptible to differences in voltage between circuit components see compliance Differential inputs permit series inputs with current loops since the signal can be offset from common Do not confuse differential inputs with isolated inputs differential requires the common tie point reference for all inputs of the group usually either ground or the supply common When a conductor is grounded in more than one place ground potential differences can induce currents producing voltage drops in the wire If the conductor is also used to carry an analog signal these voltage drops produce an accuracy error or noisy values If a single point ground is used the voltage difference between locations may still appear in series with the desired signal This is overcome by using differential or isolated inputs and running a separate return from the A 1 A 2 Isolated Normal Mode Single ended Unipolar remote source This preserves the integrity of the signal and the ground voltages appear as common mode voltage at the receiving end Isolated inputs are usually two wire and are dialectrically insulated from supplies and ground Sometimes additional connections are provided for excitation of transducers such as RTDs but these signals are not shared with other I O points Isolated modules allow high vo
111. settings on the module itself You do however have to ensure that you install the correct module type in a particular slot Be aware that some intelligent modules such as the CPU PCM APM or DSM302 may contain application programs that will need to be reloaded after the module is replaced For such modules make sure that up to date copies of the application programs are maintained in case they have to be restored later For I O modules with terminal boards you do not have to rewire a new terminal board in order to replace the module If the old terminal board is not defective it can be removed from the old module and reinstalled on the new module without removing any of the wiring Procedures for removing and installing modules and terminal boards are found in Chapter 2 Series 90 30 Product Repair The Series 90 30 products are for the most part not considered to be field repairable The one exception is that some modules have replaceable fuses The next section Module Fuse List identifies these modules and their applicable fuses GE Fanuc offers a repair product warranty service through your local distributor Contact you distributor for details GFK 0898F Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 5 Module Fuse List Replace a fuse only with the correct size and type Do not jumper out a fuse Using an incorrect fuse or jumpering out a fuse can result in harm to personnel damage to equipment or both T
112. sign bits X not applicable to this discussion a44647 a44659 4000 A000 Se SS SS D A BITS D A decimal BITS decimal CURRENT mA CURRENT mA 0 TO 20mA RANGE 4 TO 20mA RANGE Figure 11 5 D A Bits vs Current Figure 11 6 D A Bits vs Current Output 4 to 20 mA Output 0 to 20 mA If the module is sent negative data it outputs the low end of the current range that is 4 mA for the 4 to 20 mA range If a value which is out of range is entered that is greater than 32767 the software does not accept the value This module provides two output ranges The default range is 4 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that a count of 0 corresponds to 4 mA and a count of 32000 corresponds to 20 mA with each 1000 counts representing 0 5 mA When a RANGE jumper either RANGE or RANGE2 is added to the I O terminal board the output range is 0 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that a count of 0 corresponds to 0 mA and a count of 32000 corresponds to 20 mA with each 800 counts representing 0 5 mA The range of each output can be programmed individually The module provides a full 12 bits of resolution in either range Scaling of the output is as shown in Figures 3 36 and 3 37 Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules a44683 a44684 32000 32000 AQ AQ decimal decimal 0 CURRENT mA CURRENT mA 4 TO 20mA RANGE 0 TO 20mA RANGE Figure 11 7 Scaling for Current Figure 11 8 Scaling for Current Output 4 to 20 mA Output 0
113. so 0034 cent eaasewe te aeiee dares nee hehe nee 4 7 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322 4 8 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR328 4 11 IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply 24 VDC Input 4 13 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR331 4 15 IC693PWR332 High Capacity Power Supply 12 VDC Input 4 16 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR332 4 18 Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input Only Power Supplies 4 19 Common Series 90 30 Power Supply Features 0 cece eee eens 4 20 Output Voltage Connections to Backplane All Supplies 4 21 Calculating Power Supply Loading 0 ccc cee eens 4 25 Chapter 5 General Discrete I O Module Information 5 1 VO Module Specifications 2 2540 00secercee reas enan oeeee gas eeedes Hees 5 1 Discrete WO MOGUICS 4 2405 440544 oe t ENE ARTIE AE EE EE EEO ERE E 5 3 Definition of Positive and Negative Logic sasccncdcawesweeceuraeeesawess 5 7 Positive Logic Input Modules 25 so 202540003504 toes duwe doen g ses does ges 5 7 Positive Logic Output Modules 0 0 cece ee eens 5 7 Negative Logic Input Moduls sce s oor ewes rsin needa SEA ENERET ANEN 5 8 Negative Logic Output Modules 0 0 ccc eee eee eens 5 8 Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 08 6 1 120 Volt AC Iso
114. supplied input and load devices and power source s to the 120 Volt Input Relay Output module GFK 0898F Chapter amp Discrete Combination Modules 3 8 4 a45045 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER CIRCUITS Al B8 Os cee Se an o 6 4 G N teu Vie al stat p M OH _ COUPLER 2 5 O O O 10 NOT USED OTHER CIRCUITS Q o ee 1 13 4 eano OGL s 18 20 Figure 8 1 Field Wiring 120 VAC Input Relay Output Module IC693MARS590 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Combination Modules 24 Volt DC Input Relay Output 8 Inputs 8 Outputs IC693MDR390 The 24 volt DC Input Relay Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 input points with one common power input terminal and 8 normally open relay circuits in the same module The input circuits are designed to have either positive or negative characteristics in that they sink or source current to from the input devices to from the user common and are arranged as one group of 8 inputs The relay output circuits are arranged in two groups of four circuits each Each group has a common power output terminal Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Current through an input results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Power t
115. system connections 3 171C 12 example of using wye cables C 10 example point to point wiring applica tions requiring less noise immunity wye cable wesc diagram earlier version baseplates Replacing modules RS 485 compatible serial port 4 23 S SER instruction 13 4 Serial number Baseplates 3 2 locating on modules 2 4 Serial numbers recording 2 1 Serial port connector on power supply 4 23 Index 9 Index Index 10 when functional 4 23 Series 90 30 48 VDC supply 4 10 Serieg 90 30 PLC backplane 3 14 baseplate installation 3 18 recording serial numbers visual inspection of new system 2 1 Series 90 30 power supply 12 VDC input Series 90 30 125 vdc supply 4 2 4 4 24 48 VDC supply 4 7 high capacity 24 VDC suppl high capacity ac dc supply I O module example of 1 2 V O system 1 1 power supplies standard ac dc supply Shield grounding general information 2 16 Shield treatment cables C 6 Shielded cable making a C 7 Slot number Defined 3 3 Smart modules 1 4 SNP port connection 4 23 Spare parts kits 13 7 Spare parts kits mechanical 13 7 Specifications 12 VDC input supply specs j 4 17 12 24 vdc negative logic 0 5 amp output module 16 points 7 26 12 24 vdc negative logic 0 5 amp output module 8 points 7 20 12 24 vdc eis logic 2 amp output module 7 15 12 24 vdc negative l
116. system that includes both remote and expansion baseplates A system can have a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as long as the distance and cable requirements are followed CPU BASEPLATE er CPU p TTT BASEPLATE aT IC693CHS391 im a VO ee Gt J EXPANSION 1 BASEPLATE Coc se EXPANSION BASEPLATE Maximum Cable Distance from CPU 50 Feet 15 METERS ae PASE PLAE _ f CARRAR HU Ha i REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CHS393 REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CHS399 REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CHS393 Maximum Cable Distance from CPU 700 Feet 213 METERS D Standard Wye Cable 2 Custom Built Point to Point Cable 3 IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable Used as Wye Jumper 4 1C693ACC307 Bus Terminator Figure 3 13 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 17 Baseplate Mounting Dimensions 3 18 Series 90 30 PLC baseplates are designed to be panel mounted Each baseplate has standard attachment flanges for mounting on an electrical panel Baseplate dimensions and proper spacing requirements for installation purposes for both the 5 and 10 slot baseplates with embedded CPU Models 311 and Model 313 are 5 slot baseplates Model 323 is a 10 slot baseplate and the 5 and 10 slot baseplates for Modular CPUs are shown in figures 3 1 through 3 4 Note All 5 slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions and all 10 slot base
117. the back of the baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Used to recess mount a baseplate inside a 19 rack A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using four 8 32 4 mm screws nuts lockwashers and flat washers The Adapter Bracket bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of the 19 rack using applicable hardware lockwashers recommended Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines a43726B ea ee RIGHT SIDE OF _ BASEPLATE gt Insert two screws 1 at top 1 at bottom from back of baseplate through baseplate mounting holes into tapped holes in bracket Tighten screws to secure bracket to baseplate Note Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes It is not necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket Figure 2 8 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation Dimensions for rack mounting a 10 slot baseplate with the C693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket are shown in the following figure 18 89 a45047 480 o CO g DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES Figure 2 9 Dimensions for 19 Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket GFK O898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 1 0 160 4 06 dia x 4 0 280 7 1 4 000 101 6 i 0 842 21 4 et 1 368 3
118. the full capacity of the power supply If you are using the 24VDC output on the power supply s terminal strip you should calculate the power drawn divide the value by 2 and add it to the total for the power supply Since each Series 90 30 rack has its own power supply each rack should be calculated on an individual basis Step 3 Output Calculations for Discrete Output and Combination Modules Discrete solid state Output modules and output circuits of Combination I O modules require two calculations one for the module s signal level circuits which was already done in Step 1 and one for the output circuits This output circuit calculation is not required for the Relay Output modules Since the solid state output switching devices in these modules will drop a measurable amount of voltage their power dissipation can be calculated Note that the power dissipated by the output circuits comes from a separate power source so it 1s not included in the figure used to calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2 To calculate output circuit power dissipation In the Chapters 7 or 8 find the value for the Output Voltage Drop for your particular Output or Combination I O module Obtain the required current value for each device such as a relay pilot light solenoid etc connected to an output point on the module and estimate its percent of on time To obtain the current values check the device manufacturer s documentation
119. their length These cables have right angle connectors on the module end to minimize the space required in front of the modules These three cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight connectors Use the following table to choose a cable Table C 2 TBQC Cable Selection Table for 16 Point Modules Cable Catalog Description Replaces Obsolete Number Cable Number IC693CBL330 Cable Assembly 24 pin 90 Deg Right Side IC693CBL321 1 0 Meter length IC693CBL332 Cable Assembly 24 pin 90 Deg Right Side IC693CBL322 2 0 Meter length IC693CBL334 Cable Assembly 24 pin 90 Deg Right Side IC693CBL323 0 5 Meter length IC693ACC334 I O Face Plate for 16 Point Modules The IC693ACC334 I O Face Plate has a 24 pin connector which provides the connection to the applicable terminal block through one of the cables listed in the table above This face plate replaces the standard terminal board on the listed modules I O Face Plate Installation Step 1 Install terminal block assembly on DIN rail Place the terminal block over the desired location on the DIN rail and snap into place Step 2 Remove 20 pin terminal assembly from module a43061 a43715 JACKING LEVER Open the plastic terminal board cover Grasp pull tab towards you until contacts have separated from module housing and hook has Push up on the jacking lever to release disengaged for full removal the terminal block GFK 0898F Appendix D Terminal Block
120. to 20 milliamps Each output channel is capable of converting 15 to 16 bits depending on the range selected of binary digital data to an analog output for use as required by your application User data in GFK O0898F 12 1 12 2 the AI and AQ registers is in a 16 bit 2 s complement format In current modes an open wire fault is reported to the CPU for each channel The module can go to a known last state when system power is interrupted As long as user power is applied to the module each output will maintain its last value or reset to the low end of the scale range as determined by how you have configured the module Each output channel can be configured to operate in ramp mode using ladder logic In ramp mode changes in AQ data cause the corresponding output channel to ramp to the new WAQ value The ramp output consists of steps taken each millisecond until the final value is reached High and low alarm limits can be set for all input channels and an open wire fault current output modes is reported to the CPU for each output channel All six analog channels may be updated on every scan depending on the scan time Table 12 1 Specifications for IC693ALG442 Analog Output Specifications Number of Output Channels Update Rate Analog Current Output Output Current Ranges Resolution 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Absolute Accuracy All Current Modes Maximum Compliance Voltage User Load Output Load Capacitance Output Load
121. to configure the module using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configuration function Control Software Version 2 00 or later is required to configure the module using the Control software configuration function Chapter II Analog Output Modules 11 11 IC693ALG392 Current Voltage Ranges and Output Modes 11 12 Current Operation In the 4 to 20 mA range user data is scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 In the O to 20 mA range user data is scaled so that 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to 32000 Note that in the 0 to 20 mA mode you can enter a value up to 32767 which provides a maximum output of approximately 20 5 mA Scaling of the current output for both the 4 to 20 mA range and the 0 to 20 mA range is shown below In current mode the module also provides an open loop fault detect which is reported to the PLC in the I table a44683 a44684 32000 32000 AQ AQ decimal decimal 0 0 4 20 0 CURRENT mA CURRENT mA 4 to 20 mA Range 0 to 20 mA Range Figure 11 13 Scaling for Current Output Voltage Operation For Voltage Operation in the default unipolar mode 0 to 10 volts user data is scaled so that 0 volts corresponds to a count of O and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 In this mode you can enter up to 32767 for an overrange of approximately 10 24 volts output In the 10 to 10 volt range user data is scaled so that 10
122. upper two terminals on the terminal board Connect the safety ground wire to the ground terminal which is the third terminal from the top and is marked with a ground symbol 3 For power supplies with six terminals the factory jumper between the 3rd and 4th terminals see figure below should be left in place for normal installations However this jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors installed in installations with a Floating Neutral input Please see the section Special Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems later in this chapter for details 4 After all connections to Power Supply terminal board have been completed the protective cover plate should be carefully reinstalled Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F GFK 0898F INPUT 100 240 VAC 50 60HZ 90VA 125 VDC 50W Input Power lt Factory Jumper 24 VDC Output For I O Modules Six Terminal Board General Installation Guidelines INPUT 100 240 VAC 50 60HZ 90VA 125 VDC 50W 24 VDC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX 24 VDC Output For I O Modules m Input Power i Five Terminal Board Figure 2 26 Power Supply Terminal Boards Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices On power supplies with six terminal boards the overvoltage protection devices are connected internally to pin 4 of the terminal board This pin is normally connected to frame ground p
123. volts corresponds to a count of 32000 and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 In this range you can enter 32767 to 32767 for an overrange of approximately 10 24 volts to 10 24 volts Scaling of the voltage output for both the O to 10 volt range and the 10 to 10 volt range is as shown in the following figure a45718 a44658 32000 aches AQ AQ decimal decimal 32000 4 0 VOLTAGE V VOLTAGE V Bipolar Mode Unipolar Mode Figure 11 14 Scaling for Voltage Output Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Output Modules CPU Interface to the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module The Series 90 30 PLC uses the data within the AQ data table to record analog values for use by the programmable controller This scheme for the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module is shown below More information on the CPU interface to analog modules can be found at the beginning of this chapter a47036 USER CONNECTIONS SERIES BACKPLANE MICRO OPTO D A 90 30 INTERFACE PROCESSOR ISOLATION CONVERTER _C CPU VLSI Figure 11 15 Basic Block Diagram for C693ALG392 The following table summarizes the above information including the module output range user input data range and the resolution of the selected range Module User Input Output Range Data Range Resolution 4 to 20 mA 0 to 32000 0 to 20 5 mA 0 to 32767 0 to 10 volts 0 to 32767
124. with Remote racks which will have an impact on performance The impact will be relatively small for discrete I O and slightly more for other modules such as the High Speed Counter or Genius Communications Module The increase in time needed to communicate with modules in a remote baseplate will usually be small with respect to the overall scan time For more detailed information on scan time calculations refer to Chapter 2 of GFK 0467 the Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual Another important scan time consideration is the cable type used for communicating at longer distances Data propagation delay must be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins Any deviation in cable type may result in erratic or improper system operation Suggested cable types are specified in Appendix C in the IC693CBL300 etc data sheet Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System Expansion and remote baseplates can be used in the same system as long as certain requirements are met You do not exceed the 50 foot 15 meter maximum cable distance from the CPU to the last Expansion baseplate You do not exceed the 700 foot 213 meter maximum cable distance from the CPU to the last Remote baseplate The cable type recommended for use with Remote baseplates must be used throughout the system The exception to this requirement is that the prewired 3 foot 1 meter cable C693CBL300 can be used as a Wye adapter to si
125. you want to be Faxed to you Up to three documents can be ordered per call GE Fanuc Telephone Numbers If you need to speak with a GE Fanuc technical help person use the applicable telephone number from the following list Table 13 4 Technical Support Telephone Numbers North America Canada Mexico Technical Support Toll Free 800 GE Fanuc Hotline Direct Dial 804 978 6036 Latin America for Mexico see above Direct Dial 804 978 6036 France Germany Luxembourg Switzerland and United Toll Free 00800 433 268 23 Kingdom GFK O898F Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 9 Appendix A Bipolar Common Mode Current Loop Differential Ground Loop GFK 08S98F Glossary of Analog Terms This appendix explains some general terms relating to measurements at analog I O terminals Bipolar signals can reverse polarity in operation Reversed signal connections to a bipolar input will produce data of opposite sign This is the voltage between the analog signal wires and the common point of the power supply of a differential signal or to ground in the case of an isolated signal It is desirable that all common mode signals are ignored by the circuit but in practice there is some error introduced in the data This is specified as Common Mode Rejection Ratio CMRR usually expressed in decibels db Differential circuits also have a maximum common mode voltage specification usually stated as a maximum volt
126. 0 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Analog Input Modules CPU Interface to the IC693ALG223 Analog Current Input Module GFK O898F The Series 90 30 PLC uses the data within the AI data table to record analog values for use by the programmable controller This scheme is shown in Figure 3 25 for the 16 Channel Analog Current Input module More detailed information on the CPU interface to analog modules can be found at the beginning of this chapter a47020 USER CONNECTIONS BACKPLANE PROCESSOR INTERFACE VLSI Figure 10 14 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module Block Diagram IC693ALG223 Placement of A D Bits within the Data Tables Since converters used in the analog modules are 12 bit converters not all of the 16 bits in the data tables contain data required for the conversion A version of the 12 bits is placed within the 16 bit data word corresponding to the analog point in the AI table The Series 90 30 PLC system handles the integration differently for the various analog modules The CPU does not manipulate the data from the input modules before placing it within the word in the AI data table The bits in the AI data table which were not used in the conversion by the input module are forced to O zero by the analog input module Placement of the 12 data bits from the A D converter for an analog current input data word for the 16 Channel Analog Current Input module is shown below MSB
127. 0 GFK O898F Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to the Series 90 30 I O System 1 1 Series 0 30 SySIOI 25 545 65b ta Setoeetese55 a thadsesh oes tee bee uees ou 1 1 Series 90 30 VO Module Types 23 4 i001 deue awe hee REE E EE RER tenes 1 1 Option MOUUICS E EE EE TEE EE EEE EE 1 3 Horner Electric and Third Party Modules 0 cece eee eee 1 4 Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 4 4 2 1 Receiving your Products Visual Inspection 0 0 c cee eee eee 2 1 Pre installation Check 4 4 2t 4eb5 as nade eos eaSeeruseeeduee douse geny uns 2 1 Ware ClO eas ok 2s Behe ees KEE SAREE oe ene agrees ornare 2 1 System Layout Guidelines 432 2scecsee seseucs eceAuwesesesanearseneeen 2 2 Series 90 30 PLC Layout Example 6134505 3440d000 peeadcande4tdaws ya 2 3 Working with Series 90 30 Modules 6452 24206aee0cee seb ebsaetas en cases 2 4 Baseplate Installation and Mounting 5 006 c 0c2ee5c aera neeeawde rede aged 2 10 Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel 0 cece cee eee nee 2 10 Mounting a Baseplate to a 19 Rack o 3t onawcaeecdee cad iewaeeen rene ees 2 10 roundino PROCCOUICS esrin r Estner IKES ERESI SENATEN keen ewes PSEA Ewes 2 13 System Grounding Procedures 0 0 cece nener nereo 2 13 Series 90 30 PLC Equipment Grounding 2 4 02 40 0400 lt e0t0844een sede aes 2 14 Module Shield GroundiDE 4034515040 cueceuea bac gees KAES SESENTA ENIN 2 16 General Wiring Guidelines
128. 0 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Input Modules 6 Table 6 12 Specifications for IC693MDL655 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC Positive or Negative Logic Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC Inputs per Module 32 four groups of eight inputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 250 volts between groups Input Current 7 0 mA typical ON current 24 VDC Input Characteristics On state Voltage 11 5 to 30 volts DC Off state Voltage 0 to 5 volts DC On state Current 3 2 mA minimum Off state Current 1 1 mA maximum On response Time 2 ms maximum Off response Time 2 ms maximum Internal Power Consumption 195 mA maximum from 5V bus on backplane 29 mA 0 5 mA point ON 4 7 mA LED ON 224 mA typical from isolated 24V bus on backplane or from user input supply 24 VDC and all 32 inputs ON Maximum number of inputs ON is dependent on ambient temperature as shown in the figure below Refer to data sheet GFK 0867F or later revision for product standards and general specifications a45137 8 24V SUPPLY NUNE P 30V SUPPLY OF INPUTS GROUP AINPUTS ON 4 4 _ PER GROUP ON ee Oe a ee 3 INPUTS i PER GROUP ON 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 19 Input Points vs Temperature for IC694MDL655 GFK 0898F Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 27 Ki IC693MDL655 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following two figures pro
129. 0 Power Supplies Table 4 5 Specifications for C693PWR330 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input Voltage Range AC 85 to 264 VAC DC 100 to 300 VDC Input Power 100 VA with VAC Input Maximum with Full Load 50 W with VDC Input Inrush Current 4A peak 250 ms maximum Output Power 5 VDC 30 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 24 to 28 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4to7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 7 A maximum Ride Through Time 20 ms minimum Field Wiring Connections for the AC DC Input Power Supplies The two AC DC input power supplies have six terminals for user connections These connections are described below AC Power Source Connections The Hot Neutral and Ground wires from the 120 VAC power source or L1 L2 and Ground wires from the 240 VAC power source connect to the system through the top three terminals of the terminal strip on the front of the power supply DC Power Source Connections Connect the and wires from the 125 VDC nominal power source to the top two terminals on the terminal connector These connections are not polarity sensitive on an AC DC input power supply however for systems with more than one baseplate the in
130. 0 VAC 200 000 240 VAC 500 000 24 VDC 100 000 24 VDC 300 000 24 VDC 500 000 24 VDC 1 000 000 125 VDC 300 000 Assumes a 7 ms time constant Relay contact life when switching inductive loads will approach resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads The 1A 200V diode shown in the DC load suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4935 The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components available from most electronics distributors a45152A a45151A AC LOADS DC LOADS 022 100 Q 1A 200V SERIES 90 30 goovV 1 2W SERIES 90 30 RELAY RELAY RRA OUTPUT Load Coil OUTPUT Load Coil COM COM DC SUPPLY AC SOURCE Figure 7 36 Load Suppression Examples for IC693MDL940 Output Module 7 38 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Output Modules 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL750 The 12 24 volt DC Negative Logic Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 output points in four groups of eight with two common pins for each group The Output module is designed to have negative logic characteristics in that it sinks current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus The output device is connected between the positive power bus and the module output The output characteristics are c
131. 0 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Connections from the output circuits are made to the user load devices from two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B The connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D Wiring to Field Devices Direct Method This method uses cables that have a mating female connector on the module end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end You can purchase a pair of pre wired cables catalog numbers IC693CBL327 and C693CBL328 or if required for your application build your own cables Refer to Building Cables for 24 Pin Connectors in the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Appendix C of this manual for more information Using a TBQC The Terminal Block Quick Connect method uses a pair of cables with connectors on each end These connect from the module connectors to connectors on DIN rail mounted terminal blocks The TBQC components are discussed in Appendix D GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 49 Table 7 24 Specifications for C693MDL753 Rated Voltage 12 through 24 volts DC positive logic Output Voltage Range 10 2 to 28 8 volts DC Outputs per Module 32 four groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 250 volts between groups Output Current 0 5 amps per po
132. 000 10 0 10 VOLTAGE V CURRENT mA Figure 9 7 Voltage vs Data Word Figure 9 8 Current vs Data Word GFK_0898F Chapter 9 General Analog Module Information 9 9 i Scaling The data may be changed to a scale more suited to your application This may be accomplished through programming with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software The formula for the data conversion is shown below Data Word AQ or AT Application Data Value Application Offset 32000 Application Maximum Value Application Minimum Value For analog inputs the application data value is what you will need to calculate for based on the analog data word For analog outputs the analog data word is what you will need to calculate for based on the application data value and maximum range An example of scaling is a O to 10 volt signal that actually represents 0 to 2000 rpm For an output signal the following factor would be used Data Word Xrpm 0 32000 2000 rpm 0 rpm Solving the above equation scaling an input in a program Xrpm PAI 16 scaling an output in a program as AQ Xrpm X 16 Another example would be a 1 to 5 volt signal which actually represents 4 to 20 mA If you want to use values in your program that are actually mA values use the following equation for calculating scaling factors Data Word XmA 4 mA 32000 20mA 4 mA Solving the above equation scaling an input in a program Xma AI 2000 4 scaling an o
133. 049 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR NON CPU SLOTS NON CPU SLOTS ZO Mn2Z2 gt U0x lt M oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo POWER o SUPPLY Figure 3 5 IC693CHS391 10 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 7 Expansion Baseplates Figures 3 6 and 3 7 Description Label There can be no more than a total of 50 feet 15 meters of cable interconnecting Expansion baseplates and the CPU baseplate An Expansion baseplate cannot stand alone It must be connected to a system that has a CPU The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card see Chapter 11 Maximum number of Expansion baseplates allowed per system depends on the type of CPU they are used with For CPUs 331 340 and 341 the maximum is 4 For CPUs numbered 350 and higher the maximum is 7 Each Expansion baseplate has a 25 pin female D type I O Bus Expansion connector mounted at its right end for connection to other baseplates Available in two versions 5 slot IC693CHS398 and 10 slot IC693CHS392 An Expansion backplane does not support the following intelligent option modules PCM ADC BEM330 and CMM These modules must be mounted in a CPU baseplate All other I O and option modules can be
134. 08 UL840 1 5KV for modules rated from 51v to 250v IEC664 POWER SUPPLY Input Dips Variations EN 61000 4 11 During Operation Dips to 30 and 100 Variation for AC 10 Variation for DC 20 EN 61000 4 x series of tests are technically equivalent to the IEC 1000 4 x and IEC 801 x series Note l Module specific approvals are listed on the GE Fanuc web site GEfanuc com support plc After accessing that page download the file Agency zip then extract the xls spreadsheet containing the data Note 2 Refer to module specific data sheets amp installation guidelines in the following publications GFK 0600 Series 90 70 PLC Data Sheets Manual GFK 0262 Series 90 70 PLC Installation Manual GFK 0356 Series 90 30 PLC Installation Manual GFK 0898 Series 90 30 I O Specifications Manual GEK 90486 1 Genius I O System User s Manual GEK 90486 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual GFK 0825 Field Control Distributed I O and Control System Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual GFK 0826 Field Control Distributed I O and Control System I O Module s User s Manual GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards GFK 1503 VersaMax System PLC Reference Manual GFK 1504 VersaMax System I O and Option Modules GFK 1535 VersaMax System Network Communications User s Manual Note 3 Selected modules may be derated Note 4 Applies to GE Fanuc products designed and built in Charlottesville Not
135. 1 10002 S CONST R0001 T0003 00000 T0001 12 22 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module T0003 MO0001 S RO0002 CONST 0002 CONST 0000 T0002 CONST 00000 T0002 R T0004 s R0001 Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 23 Configuring IC693ALG442 with Hand Held Programmer You can also configure the Analog Current Voltage 4 Channel Input 2 Channel Output module using the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer In addition to the information in this section refer to Chapter 6 of the Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402F or later version for more information on configuration of Intelligent I O modules Module Present If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into the configuration file For example assume that an 4 Channel Input 2 Channel Output Analog Current Voltage module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the T and arrow cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot Initial Display To add the IC693ALG442 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY ENT key sequence The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO
136. 1 313 4 10 slot baseplate Model 323 8 Model 331 12 Model 340 341 51 Model 350 364 IC693ALG390 Voltage Output Module 2 Channel 5 5 slot baseplate Model 311 313 6 10 slot baseplate Model 323 16 Model 331 30 Model 340 341 48 Model 350 364 IC693ALG391 Current Output Module 2 Channel 15 Model 331 2 15 Model 340 341 2 24 Model 350 364 2 8 Model 331 32 Model 340 341 64 Model 350 364 IC693ALG442 5 5 slot baseplate Model 311 313 21 Model 331 340 341 Combination Input Output Module 4 Ch In 2 Ch Out 10 10 slot baseplate Model 323 79 Model 350 364 1 Maximum I O slots available per system Model 311 313 5 Model 323 10 Model 331 340 341 49 Model 350 364 79 2 More if 24 VDC is user supplied 32 for Model 331 49 for Model 340 341 79 for Model 350 364 3 5 slot baseplate Model 311 313 3 10 slot baseplate Model 323 1C693ALG392 Output Module 8 Channel 4 5 slot baseplate Model 311 313 4 10 slot baseplate Model 323 9 12 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Chapter Analog Input Modules 10 Analog Voltage Input 4 Channel IC693ALG220 The 4 Channel Analog Voltage Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides four input channels each capable of converting an analog input signal to a digital signal for use as required by your application The An
137. 10 5 msec both channels This update rate is approximate since it is determined by I O scan time and is application dependent 2 5 mV 1 LSB 2 5 mV 5 mV at 25 C 77 F 1 mv maximum 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 5 mA 2K ohms minimum resistance 2000 pico farads maximum 1500 volts between field side and logic side 32 mA from 5 volt supply 120 mA from 24 volt supply isolated backplane or user supply Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Y In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 50mV Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Output Modules IC693ALG390 Analog Voltage Output Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 2 Channel Analog Voltage Output Module IC693ALG390 a43843 POT ADJUST 2 CH VOLTAGE ORF ERENCE O GENERATOR V01 DUAL BACKPLANE D A R INTERFACE gt gt woz ISOLATION CIRCUITRY gt gt y gt DEFO E INVERTER GND AND CD a S nawv O Figure 11 3 Analog Voltage Output Module Block Diagram IC693ALG390 GFK 0898F Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules 11 3 IC693ALG390 Analog Output Module Field Wiring Diagram The following figure provides information for connecting field wiring to the Analog Voltage Output module a43104 TERMINALS FIELD WIRING a Le 6 COM 1 o 7 GND GND DEF 0 ee To 7 24V
138. 1234 5678 B12345678 LED Indicators C1234 5678 D1234 5678 INPUT 5 12 VDC POS NEG LOGIC 3 0 mA Pt at 5VDC Pin B12 Pin A12 8 5 mA Pt at 12VDC Pin A1 AB Left Side Right Side Connector Connector Pin B1 Pin A12 Figure 5 2 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL654 With Dual Connec tors GFK O898F Chapter 5 General Discrete I O Module Information 5 5 co INPUT 32 PT 24 VDC ISOL NEG POS LOGIC ooo o o o o o ooo0oo0oo0oo0o0 o o o 2 o 2 o 2 o 2 o 2 o 2 o 2 o o o o o O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ooo0oo0oo000 ooo0oo0oo000 N 7 5 mA Pt Connector Pin Numbering Figure 5 3 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL653 With Single Connector 5 6 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 08S98F General Discrete I O Module Information Definition of Positive and Negative Logic The IEC definitions for positive logic and negative logic as applied to Series 90 30 I O modules are defined as follows Positive Logic Input Modules Input modules designed with positive logic characteristics sink current from the input device to the user common or negative power bus The input device is connected between the positive power bus and the input terminal IEC 24V SINK IN O if O Positive Logic Output Modules Output modules designed with positive logic chara
139. 15 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR331 30 Watts 24 VDC 5 VDC 30 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR332 30 Watts 12 VDC 5 VDC 30 watts Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts 4 1 AC DC Input Power Supplies IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input The IC693PWR321 is a 30 watt supply that can operate from an input voltage source in the range of 85 to 264 VAC or 100 to 300 VDC This power supply provides three outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 2 1C693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Nominal Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts a45613 IC693PWR321 O PWR GE Fanuc oo a SERIES 90 30 O RUN INDICATORS O BATT STANDARD POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 100 240 VAC 50 60HZ 90 VA CONNECTIONS FOR AC DC POWER SOURCE INTERNAL POWER SOURCE MODULES REQUIRING RS 485 COM
140. 19 GFK O898F Table of Contents Contents XX Contents Figure 7 17 Load Current vs Temperature for C693MDL732 7 19 Figure 7 18 IC693MDL733 Output Module Field Wiring 7 21 Figure 7 19 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL733 7 21 Figure 7 20 IC697MDL734 Output Module Field Wiring 7 23 Figure 7 21 Load Current vs Temperature for C693MDL734 7 23 Figure 7 22 C693MDL740 Output Module Field Wiring 7 25 Figure 7 23 Load Current vs Temperature for I C693MDL740 7 25 Figure 7 24 C693MDL741 Output Module Field Wiring 7 27 Figure 7 25 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL741 7 27 Figure 7 26 IC693MDL742 Output Module Field Wiring 7 29 Figure 7 27 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL742 7 29 Figure 7 28 IC693MDL930 Output Module Field Wiring 7 31 Figure 7 29 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL930 7 31 Figure ee Load Suppression Examples for IC693MDL930 Output Module Figure 7 31 IC693MDL931 Output Module Field Wiring 7 34 Figure 7 32 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL931 7 34 Figure ne Load Suppression Examples for IC693MDL931 Output Module Figure 7 34 IC693MDL940 Output Module Field Wiring 7 37 Figure 7 35 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL940 7 37 Figure i Load Suppression Examples for IC693MDL940 Output Module Figure 7 37 Field Wiring 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic
141. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 o 2 2 2 o 2 a 123 45 6 7 8 9 101112 13 14 151617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Mounts on DIN Rail VIEN Figure B 9 32 Point I O Module to Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block C 14 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets IC693CBL308 309 I O Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules Function of cable This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50 pin Honda connector mounted on the front of the module The modules that use these cable are IC693MDL652 IC693MDL653 IC693MDL750 and IC693MDL751 The I O cables have a female connector on one end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end Each of the stripped and tinned wires has a label attached to it for ease of identification The numbers on these labels correspond with the pin number of the connector wired to the opposite end Specifications Cable Length I1C693CBL308 3 feet 1 meter I1C693CBL309 6 feet 2 meters Connectors 50 pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module Opposite end has stripped and tinned labeled wires for connection to Connector Interface Assembly Wiring Information Table B 2 Wire List for 32 Point I O Cables Connector Label Num Connector Label Num Pin ber Loose Pin ber Loose Amber Color Code End Number Color Code End Black Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White Black Violet White Black Gray White Brown
142. 22 If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into it For example assume that a 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the Up and Down cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot Initial Display To add the IC693ALG222 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY key The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S I40 I Selecting I Reference At this point the starting I reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 40 is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Input Modules Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as I17 press the key se
143. 32 Point Output Module ICGISMDLIS0 peame raorir esis eee E EER 7 40 Figure 7 38 Field Wiring IC693MDL751 32 Point Output Module 7 42 Figure 7 39 Field Wiring 5 24 Volt DC TTL Neg Logic 32 Point Output Module GFK O898F Table of Contents XXI Contents K OMD oser rakne eae eee ee a ene ne wen ees 7 45 Figure 7 40 Examples of Connections to User Loads 7 46 Figure 7 41 Field Wiring 12 24 Volt DC 0 5A Positive Logic 32 Point Output Module IC693MDL753 ic 6643464 s 640 8o08 060484408 e eres 7 51 Figure 8 1 Field Wiring 120 VAC Input Relay Output Module C693MAR590 8 4 Figure 8 2 Field Wiring 24 VDC Input Relay Output Module C693MDR390 8 8 Figure 9 1 Example of Series 90 30 Analog Current Output Module 9 3 Figure 9 2 Analog Input Block Diagram cceeeeees 9 5 Figure 9 3 Analog Input Common Mode Voltage 9 5 Figure 9 4 Analog Output Block Diagram 0000 9 6 Figure 9 5 D A Bits vs Current Output for C693ALG391 9 8 Figure 9 6 Stair Step Effect on Analog Values 06 9 9 Figure 9 7 Voltage vs Data Word Figure 9 8 Current vs Data Word Figure 10 1 A D Bits vs Voltage Input ccccceceees 10 1 Figure 10 2 Scaling for Voltage Input ccceeeceees 10 2 Figure 10 3 Analog Voltage Input Module Block Diagram for IC693ALG220 10 3 Figure 10 4 Field Wiring for 4 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module 10 4 Figu
144. 399D and earlier it is necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate This means that when using a factory made Wye cable such as IC693CBL300 you must break pin out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with one of these baseplates Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should be built using Figure 10 20 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F and later and C693CHS399E and later have a change inside the baseplate which eliminates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating cable When using factory made Wye cable with these baseplates it is not necessary to remove pin from the cable Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made using either Figure 10 20 or Figure 10 21 Figure 10 21 shows how the standard factory made Wye cables are made By removing pin 1 in custom built Wye cables made for the earlier versions of remote baseplates the pin 7 OV signal reference originates in the main CPU baseplate In these earlier versions of the remote baseplates pin 1 was tied to pin 7 OV and also AC coupled to the remote frame ground When using these baseplates in combination with the 100 shielded Wye cables the pin 7 OV reference would be improperly DC coupled to the remote frame ground through the D subminiature connector shell which is DC coupled to the remot
145. 4 7 0 346 8 8 Inside 16 850 428 18 122 460 3 0 439 11 2 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES Figure 2 10 IC693ACC313 Recessed Adapter Bracket for 19 Rack Mounting 2 12 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines Grounding Procedures System Grounding Procedures In addition to the following grounding information we strongly urge that you follow all applicable codes that apply to your area For example in the United States most areas have adopted the National Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its requirements In other countries different codes will apply For maximum safety to personnel and property you must follow these codes Failure to do so can mean injury or death to personnel damage to property or both All components of a programmable logic control system and the devices it is controlling must be properly grounded This is particularly important for the following reasons m A low resistance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes exposure to shock in the event of short circuits or equipment malfunction m The Series 90 30 PLC system requires proper grounding for correct operation The importance of a proper grounding cannot be over emphasized Ground Conductors Ground conductors should be connected in a tree fashion with branches routed to a central earth ground point shown in the f
146. 5 VDC provides primary power to operate most internal circuits m 24 VDC Relay Power provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay modules m 24 VDC Isolated provides power to operate a number of input circuits input modules only and any external circuits connected to the 24 VDC Output terminals on the power supply terminal strip Note that the figures listed in the following table are maximum worst case requirements not typical requirements GFK O898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 25 Table 4 14 Load Requirements in milliamps Number _ peeriton as voc ney Power ttt Number Description 5 VDC Relay Power Isolated ADELA Sas Lape Por Meme ICEACCSOO pur Simalaor WIPE TOBSACCSOT pansion Bax amination PP IC690ACC900 RS 422 RS 485 to RS 232 Converter RSTORSAT ORS DAC a E IC690ACC901 RS 422 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter Kit Version A 150 eee Eesti Lm PL TOSADCHTT Aiphanomere Dipay CopwceworMomie PO ICSALGEAD Analog npr Wolase TChameel PP ICHPSALGEEE Araiog pat Voase High E E ICHSALGES Araiog pat Cones High E E oo Moon Mae APNOEA o o oan Moton Mae APMEOD EAS o o oos ores ooo o o E E IC693BEM321 T O Link Interface Master Module w o optical adapter 415 with Optical Adapter 615 IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller 300 fe IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller maximum 1 2A typical 800 a E E a E E a E E E E S E E E E E S BSS E S oe oo a o we ooe a o oe oo oa o oe
147. 50 mA is available through the I O connectors on the front of the module This supply is generated on the module and is isolated from the backplane Its power input comes from the 5V logic supply on the PLC backplane By installing jumpers on the appropriate pins on the I O connector you can choose to power the inputs from this internal supply instead of powering them with an external user provided supply If this internal supply is used to power the inputs additional loading will be placed on the PLC s 5V power supply Backplane isolation between the field side and logic side is provided by opto couplers on the module There are no special fault or alarm diagnostics reported LED indicators labeled Al A8 B1 B8 Cl C8 D1 D8 at the top of the module provide the ON OFF status of each input point This module is configured as a 32 point input type and uses 32 bits of discrete I input data Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Connections to the input circuits are made from the user s input devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B The connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D Wiring from the module s con
148. 66 G1 e ere eea eet ens ORATE EARR teense 10 35 Selecine SAL Referente spetacelasamectyase sertett es irte oe seen ees 10 36 Removing Module From Configuration 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 10 37 Saved Configurations 27 4 4 0 465 02554 40640 2555600 e6 gn oteuse sue toe nren 10 38 IC693ACC223 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections 10 39 Terminal ASSionMCits s c3 02 54000 4u01c4nae dae see EE ee ease wes 10 39 IC693ACC223 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Diagrams 10 40 IC693ACC223 Analog Current Input Block Diagram 10 42 Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules ceeeeeeees 11 1 Analog Voltage Output 2 Channel ODDALO 0 e erres iare RaR EE VERSES 11 1 IC693ALG390 Analog Voltage Output Block Diagram 11 3 IC693ALG390 Analog Output Module Field Wiring Diagram 11 4 Analog Current Output 2 Channel O ALOE eee eee a ey eee eee errs eee nee ee ee eee 11 5 IC693ALG391 Analog Current Output Block Diagram 11 8 IC693ALG391 Analog Output Module Field Wiring Diagrams 11 9 Analog Current Voltage Output 8 Channel ICODGAISG 2 STETE es cies eek odes ese ae as doawen sees mmerances 11 11 IC693ALG392 Current Voltage Ranges and Output Modes 11 12 GFK O0898F Table of Contents Contents xiii Contents IC693ALG392 Field Wiring Connections 520450 225c6 vewseceotertveseweks 11 14 Configuring the IC693ALG392 An
149. 693ACC334 TBQC faceplate it has a 24 pin connector Mount the applicable TBQC terminal block It has a 24 pin connector and a terminal strip and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN rail Mount the terminal block close enough to the PLC so the cable see next step will reach Connect a TBQC cable between the TBQC faceplate connector on the module and the connector on the TBQC terminal block Use one of the following cables Cable Catalog Number Wire I O devices to the terminal block Installation of 32 Point 50 Pin Connector Discrete Modules These 50 Pin modules are an older design and are not generally used on new systems unless to fulfill standardization requirements They are mainly used as replacements for existing installations For new installations we recommend the dual 24 pin connector style modules because they have additional features LED indicators TBQC terminal block IC693ACC337 not found on the older modules and it is easier to fabricate custom length cables for them Installation information is provided here for the convenience of those still using these 50 pin connector modules Using Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block Note Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC components are not available for these modules but you may purchase a Weidmuller 912263 terminal block from a Weidmuller distributor for this application For distributor information visit the Weidmuller web site at www weidmuller com See figure on n
150. 7 9 Specifications for C693MDL732 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 8 one group of eight outputs Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Output Current 0 5 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum per common Output Characteristics Inrush Current 4 78 amps for 10 ms Output Voltage Drop 1 volt maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 50 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL732 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC positive logic 0 5 amp output module a44567 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING ji J A 5 0000 Jojolo elfel e l gt N 0o OTHER CIRCUITS 0000 O Figure 7 16 IC693MDL732 Output Module Field Wiring a43704 2 2 AMPS TOTAL 19 MODULE LOAD CURRENT AMPS 5 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 17 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL732 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 19 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic 0 5 A
151. 8 It was replaced by two cables 1C693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 See the data sheet for these cables for details The replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC Function of cable This prewired cable is available for use with all Series 90 30 high density 32 point I O modules that use the Fuyitsu 24 pin user I O connector Each of these modules has two of these connectors mounted side by side I O Interface cables have a 24 pin connector on one end for connection to the module and stripped and tinned wires on the other end Catalog numbers for 32 point modules having two 24 pin connectors are C693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 Connections to input circuits are made from the user s input devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B the connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D If a different length cable is required for connections to these modules you can build your own cable B1 A129 B12 Connector Fujitsu FCN 365S024 AU Length 10 3 meters Figure B 12 IC693CBL315 Cable GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 19 C 20 Building Cust
152. 8 l pia TYPICAL 130 NOTE 4 00 DOOR IF THE CABLE IS USED ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE 1 02 ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING Z 5 5S nanan jt Figure 3 16 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 19 a45423 jroo 5 a A001 17 44 400 l DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 102 443 i i 102 200 MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS 6 85 428 iken i 102 REMOVABLE TERMINAL 142 eel L L LINIE LO 7 Shas E E E m El E E B E NOTE 7 z 20DIA 5 08 5 12 TYPICAL 130 a Eo L L a rT 4 O 79 NOTE FRONT VIEW HINGED SIDE VIEW 20 IF THE CABLE IS USED ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE DOOR ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING Figure 3 17 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements 3 20 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Baseplates Load Ratings Temperature and Mounting Position The power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the ambient temperature The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is m 100 at 60
153. 8 5 Table 8 3 Specifications for IC693MDR390 Inputs Rated Voltage 24 volts DC 30 to 32 volts DC 8 one group of eight inputs Input Voltage range Inputs per Module Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field and logic side 500 volts RMS between inputs Input Current 7 5 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On State Voltage Off State Voltage On State Current 4 mA minimum Off State Current 1 5 mA maximum On Response Time 7 ms typical 15 to 32 volts DC 0 to 5 volts DC Off Response Time 7 ms typical Outputs Rated Voltage 24 VDC 120 240 VAC 5 to 30 volts DC 5 to 250 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 8 two groups of four outputs each Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field and logic side 500 volts RMS between groups 2 amps maximum per output Operating Voltage Maximum Load 4 amps maximum per common Minimum Load Maximum Inrush On Response Time 10 mA 5 amps 15 ms maximum 15 ms maximum 80 mA all I O on from 5V backplane bus 70 mA all outputs on from relay 24V backplane bus Off Response Time Internal Power Consumption Y Maximum load current is dependent on operating voltage as shown in the following table Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Table 8 4 Load Current Limitations for IC693MDR390 Operating Maximum Current for Load Type Typical Operations Voltage Lamp or Solenoid number of Operations For inductive loads
154. 9 Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 7 Ki IC693MDL241 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 24 volt AC DC positive negative logic input module a45032 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER CIRCUITS O UO OO oO oO O 0 OO ODO OO OO OC 2 Qz A gt gt P JaN lt Pa OPTICAL gt gt O COUPLER gt N vvv jv v INIS JA A JOJN O za 24V OUT OV COM NC Figure 6 5 Field Wiring 24 Volt AC DC Pos Neg Logic Input Module IC693MDL241 a45135 16 30V SUPPLY 12 NUMBER OF INPUTS 8 ON 4 a 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 6 Input Points vs Temperature for C693MDL241 6 8 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Input Modules 6 125 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 8 Point IC693MDL632 This 125 volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input module provides 8 input points in two isolated groups with four points in each group Each group has a separate common associated with it the two commons are not tied together inside the module The input module is designed to have either positive logic characteristics in that it sinks current from the in
155. 9 left side and IC693CBL330 right side cables IC693CBKO003 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL331 left side and IC693CBL332 right side cables IC693CBKO004 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL333 left side and IC693CBL334 right side cables Cable Current Rating Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps which is more than adequate to handle the current requirement of any of the 32 point I O modules listed in the table on the previous page Module and Cable Data Module connection data is found in Chapters 6 and 7 and cable data is found in Appendix C Terminal Block Data Only the IC693A CC337 terminal block can be used with 32 point modules Data for this terminal block is found on the next page D 12 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D I1C693A CC337 TBQC Terminal Block for 32 Point Modules Use with the following 32 point I O modules 2 terminal blocks required per module IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 IC693MDL753 Maximum wire size per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm2 Width 4 45 112mm Height all blocks 2 1 5 57mm Depth all blocks 7 7716 45mm a diodo BLOCK PIPPIP PPPT Dar Figure C 9 IC693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block Note The common row terminals labeled with the letter C are provided for wiring convenience The
156. 93MDL330 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 7 7 8 120 Volt AC Output 0 5 Amp 16 Point IC693MDL340 The 120 volt 0 5 Amp AC Output module provides 16 output points in two isolated groups with eight points in each group Each group has a separate common associated with it the two commons are not tied together inside the module This allows each group to be used on different phases of the AC supply or they can be powered from the same supply Each group is protected with a 3 amp fuse and an RC snubber is provided for each output to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line This module provides a high degree of inrush current which makes the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads AC Power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied by the user This module requires an AC power source LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module There are two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row and a red LED centered between and to the right of the two rows This module uses the two rows of green LEDs labeled A1 through 8 and B1 through 8 for output status The red LED labeled F is a blown fuse indicator that turns ON if either of the fuses should blow A load must be connected to the blown fuse for the indicator to light An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The su
157. 98F General Installation Guidelines Installing a Module s Terminal Board Note Modules IC693MDL730F and later and C693MDL731F and later have special terminal boards that are equipped with holding screws For Installation and Removal instructions please see the section Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws later in this chapter The high density 32 point I O modules have one or two connectors instead of terminal boards To install a terminal board refer to the figure below 1 Hook the pivot hook located on the bottom of the terminal board to the lower slot on the module 2 Push the terminal board towards the module until it snaps into place 3 Open the terminal board cover and ensure that the latch on the module is securely holding the terminal board in place Caution Compare the module catalog number on the label on the back of the hinged door see Figure 2 8 and the label on the side of the module see figure below to ensure that they match If a wired terminal board is installed on the wrong module type damage to the module may occur when the system is powered up a43062 Module Label REFER TO TEXT FOR INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Figure 2 5 Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board GFK O898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines e EF Removing a Module s Terminal Board To remove a terminal board m Open the plastic terminal board cover Push up
158. A 16 points 1 Terminal Block C693ACC329 may be used with most discrete I O modules that have up to 16 I O points cannot be used with 32 point modules Jumpers may have to be added see module specs for wiring details GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 23 2 24 3 Applying TBQC Components to 32 Point Dual 24 Pin Connector I O Modules Procedure The step numbers below refer to numbers in the figure above See Appendix D for additional Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC details and Appendix C for cable data sheets 1 Select a 32 point I O module with dual 24 pin connectors There are four GE Fanuc modules in this category IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 C693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 2 Select a left side cable from the following table Left Side Cable Catalog Number 3 Select a right side cable from the following table Right Side Cable Catalog Number 4 Use two TBQC terminal blocks The only choice is catalog number C693 ACC337 Note You can purchase a cable kit that includes both cables See Appendix D for details Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules Twisted shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module input or output signal connections Proper grounding of the shield is also important For maximum electrical noise supp
159. A gt Device E E O mo E E O C Ground the Cable Shield at U COM Field Device End Only gt seal C Note 1 O _GND Note 2 NOTES 1 If the source is floating connect conductor to Analog Input Module COM Analog Input terminal to limit common mode voltages Note that common mode voltage is Module limited to 11 volts 2 If inaccurate readings persist due to noise the conductor may also be connected to the Analog Inout Module GND terminal CAUTION The Analog Input Module must be the last device in the circuit When grounding the return side of the Analog Input Module the other current sensing device must be floating and able to withstand a common mode voltage of at least 10 volts including the noise level Figure 2 22 2 Wire Transducer Connected to Two Measuring Devices Verifying Analog Input Current Series 90 30 Analog Current Input Modules have an internal 250 ohm resistor across the input terminals You can measure the voltage across the input terminals using a volt meter then use Ohm s Law to determine the input current Input Current in Amps Volts 250 For example if you measured 3 volts across the input terminals Input Current in Amps Volts 250 Input Current in Amps 3 250 Input Current in Amps 012 which equals 12 mA GFK O898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 33 Analog Output Module Wiring General Analog Ou
160. AC Isolated input module Note that since each input is isolated separate from each of the other inputs each input can be powered by a separate AC power source a45031 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING A1 eer 7 A2 eae A3 DEEN oo EO B1 A een a B3 cas Or B4 ea Os NC Figure 6 2 Field Wiring 240 Volt AC Isolated Input Module C693MDL231 6 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Input Modules 6 120 Volt AC Input 16 Point IC693MDL240 The 120 volt AC Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 input points with one common power input terminal The input circuits are reactive resistor capacitor inputs Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user This module requires an AC power source it cannot be used with a DC power source LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface
161. B8 A9 5 Dark Green B7 B9 11 Light Blue B6 A10 5 Dark Green Black B5 B10 11 Light Blue Black B4 All 6 Dark Blue B3 B11 12 Light Green B2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black B1 B12 2 Light Green Black GFK 0S98F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 47 7 48 Wiring for Module Groups C and D connector on left front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number C1 Al l Brown C2 Bl 7 Violet C3 A2 1 Brown Black C4 B2 J Violet Black C5 A3 2 Red C6 B3 8 White C7 A4 2 Red Black C8 B4 8 White Black C Common A5 3 Orange C Common B5 9 Gray CVIN A6 3 Orange Black N C B6 9 Gray Black N C A7 4 Yellow DVIN B7 10 Pink D Common A8 4 Yellow Black D Common B8 10 Pink Black D8 A9 5 Dark Green D7 B9 11 Light Blue D6 A10 5 Dark Green Black D5 B10 11 Light Blue Black D4 All 6 Dark Blue D3 B11 12 Light Green D2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black D1 B12 12 Light Green Black Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 08S98F Discrete Output Modules 12 24 Volt DC 0 5A Positive Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL753 The 12 24 volt DC 0 5A Positive Logic Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 discrete outputs The outputs are arranged in four isolated groups of eight Al A8 B1 B8 C1 C8 and D1 D8 each group has its own common
162. Baseplate adapter bracket for 10 slot baseplate 2 10 B 22 installation 2 11J 22 Baseplate installation 3 18 mounting requirements model 311 313 323 3 18 Baseplate remote figure 3 10 Baseplate 2 10 B 22_ adapter bracket Common features 3 1 Comparison table 3 24 dimensions for mounting 10 slot 3 20 dimensions for mounting 5 slot 3 18 Embedded CPU dimensions 3 18 Expansion and Remote in same system 3 13 expansion dimensions 3 19 Expansion features 3 8 Grounding 2 14 Modular CPU dimensions 3 19 Mounting 2 10 Mounting dimensions 3 18 mounting in 19 rack 2 11 3 23 power supply location 4 2 remote 10 slot remote 5 slot 3 10 remote dimensions 3 19 Remote features 3 10 Serial number location Sizes 3 2 Terminolog 3 3 Types 3 11 Baseplates dimensions for mounting 10 slot 3 19 Battery Memory backup 4 24 Blown fuse status output modules 1 2 Bracket adapter 2 10 B 22 C Cable 32 point I O C 16 C 19 Building 32 point C 28 Extension for I O module T O bus expansion C 2 T O for 32 point modules VO interface C 23 C 26 Cable for Serieq 90 30 installations extension cable for 32 point modules C 134 C 23 C 31 T O cable for 32 point modules C 15 I O interface cable for 32 point I O mod ules C 16J C 19 C 26_ wye cable wiring diagram earlier
163. C 10 Figure C 11 Figure C 12 Figure C 13 Figure C 14 Figure C 15 Figure C 16 Figure C 17 Figure C 18 Figure C 19 C 30 Figure C 20 Figure C 21 Figure D 1 Figure D 2 Figure D 3 Figure D 4 Figure D 5 Figure D 6 Figure D 7 Figure D 8 Figure D 9 Figure E 1 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates 32 Bint I O Module to Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block TOO SC BIL Cable 2 deees een obs heen oes ae ene se rere Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC ICOC BUG 15 Cable ogee te eee acne esses ae S a a i Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC Connector Orientation on I O Faceplate I O Kceplate to Terminal Block Cable Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC IC 693 CBES7 7 525 Caples id vscetnedasasbat ced gedtaresge Dimension for Depth of Connector for IC693CBL327 328 C 11 C 12 C 14 C 16 C 18 C 19 C 22 C 24 C 24 C 25 C 26 C 27 Contents Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables 1C693CBL329 330 33 1 332 333 334 Cables 2430444024 icce4 0x Dimension for Depth of Connector 215 2 oteaerdence ates eess Typical TBQC Terminal Block IC693ACC334 TBQC Faceplate IC693ACC329 TBOC Terminal Block 0 00 IC693ACC330 TBOCG Terminal Block s2 02 axeddewsrand anens IC693ACC331 TBOC Terminal Block 00 IC693ACC332 TBOC Terminal Bloc
164. C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 23 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL740 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 25 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic 0 5 Amp Output 16 Point IC693MDL741 The 12 24 volt DC Negative Logic 0 5 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 output points in two groups Each group has a common power output terminal This output module is designed to have negative logic characteristics in that it sinks current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus The output device is connected between the positive power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded
165. C input isolated 24 vdc supply connections 4 6 4 19 load calculation 4 25 load capacit load ratings 3 21 location in baseplate 4 2 mounting orientation 3 21 serial port connector location of 4 23 standard 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC 4 2 temperature 3 21 Power supply capacities de supply 4 7 4 10 4 13 4 16 a I Power supply output voltages 4 21 Power Supply slot 3 3 Power supply s pae icajions de supply 4 8 4 11 high capacity TT suppl high capacity dc suppl ZEU E standard ac dc supply 4 3 Power supply 12 VDC input illustration of 4 16 N Powering down Expansion and remote racks Preinstallation check 2 1 Preventive maintenance table 13 8 Product support customer service technical help Protection devices overvoltage 2 39 H 5 4 20 Index Q Quick connect terminal block D 2 R Rack Definition 3 3 Rack number Selection switch 3 14 RAM memory backup battery 4 24 Ramp mode error handling selecting setting References analog combo 12 8 Relay module input output 120 vac input n o relay output 8 1 24 vdc input n o relay output 8 5 Relay module output 2 amp n o 4 amp isolated n o J 7 30 8 amp isolated n c and form c Remote baseplates 3 10 Remote baseplate 10 slot 3 11 Defined 1C693CHS399 3 10 Remote baseplates Features 3 10 Remote expansion
166. CH 1 LO 1000 If all data is valid the HHP display will move to an adjacent slot when either the key or key is pressed Saved Configurations 12 30 Configurations that contain Analog Combo modules can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read from that device into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later Series 90 30 CPU cannot be read into a Series 90 20 CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of the Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Chapter Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 Troubleshooting Features of Series 90 30 Hardware Indicator Lights LEDs and Terminal Board The following figure shows how the indicator LEDs correspond to the circuit connection points on an I O Module s terminal board The terminal board terminals are numbered from the top with the top terminal in the left row being number 1 and the top terminal in the right row being number 2 The numbers alternate between rows with even numbers on the right and odd numbers on the left as shown in the circuit diagram on the back of the hinged cover LED A6 corresponds to circuit A6 A1234 5678 Red Fuse ESCP indicator LED B12345678 OUTPUT Terminal 1 RELAY N O 2 AMP Terminal 2
167. CIRCUITS O _S O Figure 7 6 IC693MDL340 Output Module Field Wiring a44962 6 6 AMPS 5 TOTAL MODULE 4 LOAD CURRENT 3 AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 7 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL340 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 9 7 10 120 240 Volt AC Isolated Output 2 Amp 5 Point IC693MDL390 The 120 240 volt 2 Amp Isolated AC Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 5 isolated output points with each point having a separate common Each output circuit is isolated from the others relative to the AC power source commons are not tied together inside the module This allows each output circuit to be used on different phases of the AC supply or they can be powered from the same supply Outputs are individually fused with a 3 amp fuse and an RC snubber is provided for each output to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line This module provides a high degree of inrush current greater than 10x the rated current making the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads AC Power to operate the loads connected to the outputs must be supplied by the user This module requires an AC power source it can not be used with a DC power source LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module These LEDs are arranged in two horizontal
168. CPU The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card see Chapter 11 Remote capability is facilitated by the Remote baseplate s built in isolation between the 5 volt logic supply used by the I O modules residing in the Remote baseplate and the supply for the interface circuit associated with the I O Bus Expansion Interface Isolation helps prevent problems associated with unbalanced ground conditions Maximum number of Remote baseplates allowed per system depends on the type of CPU they are used with For CPUs 331 340 and 341 the maximum is 4 For CPUs numbered 350 and higher the maximum is 7 Each remote baseplate has a 25 pin female D type Expansion connector mounted at its right end for connection to other baseplates Remote baseplates are available in two sizes 5 slot IC693CHS398 and 10 slot IC693CHS392 A Remote backplane does not support the following intelligent option modules PCM ADC BEM330 and CMM These modules must be mounted in a CPU baseplate All other I O and option modules can be mounted in any type of baseplate Remote baseplates are the same physical size use the same type power supplies and support the same I O and option modules as the Expansion baseplates Each Remote baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch a44968 SW 12 3 4 56 7 1 X X X PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X X CONTROLLER 3 XX x BASE 5 SLOT X CLOSED Figure 3 8 gt gt
169. D Indicators When a discrete output address Q is turned on in the ladder program the corresponding output LED should light to indicate that the signal reached the module If the LED does not turn ON the module may be defective or the LED light may be bad Also make sure that the module is configured correctly is the correct type and its assigned memory addresses are correct If the LED turns on but the output device relay solenoid etc doesn t operate a voltage check can be made on the module s terminal board or terminal block if using one If the LED turns on but the module doesn t switch the output voltage 1 A fuse could be open if it is a fused module Check the red F LED at the top of the module If it is on a fuse is open If a fuse is open you probably have a shorted field device or wiring Note Output LEDs can be on even if a fuse is open 2 The Electronic Short Circuit Protection ESCP circuit may be tripped if the module has this feature If the red F LED at the top of the module is on the ESDC circuit is tripped If tripped you probably have a shorted field device or wiring Note Output LEDs can be on even if the ESDC is tripped Turn off system power and find and correct the short The ESCP circuit resets when the PLC is power cycled 3 The external field device power supply supplying the output voltage may be defective turned off disconnected have an open fuse tripped circuit bre
170. D and D A Bits within the Data Tables Stair Step Effect of Output Scaling Performance Measures Analog Module Field Wiring Maximum Number of Analog Modules per System Analog Voltage Input 4 Channel IC693ALG220 IC693ALG220 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Information Analog Current Input 4 Channel IC693ALG221 IC693ALG221 Analog Current Input Block Diagram IC693ALG221 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Information Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Analog Voltage Input Block Diagram 0 cece eee eee 7 30 7 31 7 33 7 34 7 36 7 37 7 39 7 40 7 41 7 42 7 43 7 45 7 49 7 51 8 1 8 1 8 3 8 5 8 7 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 4 9 4 9 6 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 11 9 12 10 1 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 7 10 8 GFK O898F Analog Voltage Input 16 Channel Sore EC Lee eee ee eee ee ee se ae eee ee ee ee eee ee 10 9 Voltage Ranges and Input Modes cece eee eee nee 10 9 Power Requirements and LEDS 223 0c cccctuccdenctaed datekuacdeacades ds 10 9 Locanto in OF SCMl eae n44g oes evade Gee eee RR sen auucsaeat aun 10 9 Retesemces Used 222420524505 op cae eee aces eed ee ees coon ee due 10 9 CPU Interface to the IC693ALG 222 Analog Voltage Input Module 10 11 Placement of A D Bits within the Data Tables 0 00005 10 11 IC693ALG222 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections 10 13 Terminal Assignments 0 0 c cece eee eee een eee
171. D1 D8 voltage and common points Al through A12 and B1 through B12 pair 1 through pair 12 Columns are also provided for circuit references and customer wire numbers Please copy and use the work sheets on this and the following page as needed when wiring the 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input module Wiring for Module Groups A and B connector on right front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number Al Al 1 Brown A2 Bl 7 Violet A3 A2 l Brown Black A4 B2 7 Violet Black A5 A3 2 Red A6 B3 8 White A7 A4 2 Red Black A8 B4 8 White Black A Common A5 3 Orange N C B5 9 Gray N C A6 3 Orange Black 24V OUT B6 9 Gray Black 0 VOLTS A7 4 Yellow N C B7 10 Pink N C AS 4 Yellow Black B Common B8 10 Pink Black B8 A9 5 Dark Green B7 B9 11 Light Blue B6 A10 5 Dark Green Black B5 B10 11 Light Blue Black B4 All 6 Dark Blue B3 B11 12 Light Green B2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black B1 B12 2 Light Green Black GFK 08S98F Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 29 Wiring for Module Groups C and D connector on left front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number C1 Al l Brown C2 Bl 7 Violet C3 A2 1 Brown Black C4 B2 J Violet
172. DC Input 125 VDC 50W 24 VDC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX System Ground 24 VDC Output For I O Modules Figure 2 28 DC Input Wiring Examples 24 VDC Output All Supplies The bottom two terminals are connected to the isolated 24 volt DC output that can be used to supply power to input output circuits within power limitations of the supply If the same DC input power source is used to provide power to two or more power supplies in a Series 90 30 PLC System ensure that connection polarity is identical at each rack top terminal and second terminal Do not cross the Positive and Negative lines A resulting difference in potential can cause injury to personnel and damage to equipment Also each baseplate must be connected to a common system ground described earlier in this chapter 2 42 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0O898F General Installation Guidelines Basic Installation Procedure GFK 0898F The system design which includes producing the layout and wiring drawings should be completed before beginning the installation procedure This section offers a basic step by step approach to installing a Series 90 30 PLC system Some steps refer to earlier sections of this chapter for additional details An attempt was made to place the steps in an order that will make the process as efficient as possible However due to the wide variance in system designs this order may
173. E _ a cH7 E LA H _ EDN 7 ti cue LS 7 E t ee Pecos ee len E a o GND NOT CONNECTED OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS Figure 10 12 Field Wiring for 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module IC693ALG222 Differential Mode Note Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 15 IC693ALG222 Analog Voltage Input Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module DIFFERENTIAL a45356 CONNECTION V 5V 5V 5y INPUT CONDITIONER Ay AND A D OPTO SCALING 8 CHANNEL ISOLATION HYBRID A D 8 CHANNEL EEPROM A D REFERENCE GENERATOR BACKPLANE INTERFACE VLSI OPTO ISOLATION ON BOARD VOLTAGE DC DC SUPERVISOR CONVERTER AND REGULATOR SERIES 90 30 PLC BACKPLANE Figure 10 13 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Block Diagram IC693ALG222 10 16 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules IC693ALG222 Analog Input Module Configuration The 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module can be configured using either the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software configurator function or with the Hand Held Programmer The parameters that may be configured are described in the following table Configuration procedures using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software a
174. ELLOW BLACK B8 10 PINK BLACK A9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE A10 5 DARK GREEN BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE BLACK All 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHT GREEN A12 6 DARK BLUE BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN BLACK a45144 2 i CONNECTOR A Row 12 321 NOTE Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same color wire with a black tracer For example Pair 1 has a solid brown wire paired with a brown wire with a black tracer Replacement Obsolescence Information m Cable IC693CBL315 now obsolete also replaced cable IC693CBL310 when that cable became obsolete The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding m When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete the replacement for these cables became IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 Cables IC693CBL310 315 have straight connectors Cables C693CBL327 328 have right angle connectors The right angle connectors require less depth in front of the PLC so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some applications GFK O898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 21 C 22 Connector Depth for C693CBL315 The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector PLC Side View 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure B 13 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Da
175. ENEN EA EERE EERE ES pas 2 43 Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates cee e cece eens 3 1 Baseplate Types acne tee es 4s eeb eu ence neee Gees bas bose redha nener 3 1 Baseplate Terms Ex piained 5250555 2stee os ous sia dae akees PERRETAN eee 3 3 CPU Dascvictes 2 n425156 sunt sed onceeae cers puesto redeeusoes ceases 3 4 Expansion Baseplates Figures 3 6 and 3 7 0 0 cee cece eee 3 8 Remote Baseplates Figures 3 8 and 3 9 220s nccednawscued sae eeeedeewns 3 10 Expansion Rack Connection Example i2si ccas 04 detatandidiee sand dccaeos 3 16 Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example 3 17 Baseplate Mounting Dimensions lt c0hs0d eneeet odes enaaed eaeeee edaeea 3 18 GFK O898F Table of Contents iX Contents Load Ratings Temperature and Mounting Position 00 3 21 Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19 Rack Mounting 00 3 22 Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies ccceeeeee 4 1 Power Supply ale COlles 644 586 90as bt ebuleeeeeeeees eE IENA iA shoes ges 4 1 Power Supply Feature Comparison 0 ccc cece cee eee eens 4 1 AC DC Input Power S ppli S os siss aes ad seast aieiai ad aus Ra 4 2 IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input 4 2 IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply 120 240 VAC 125 VDC Input 4 4 Field Wiring Connections for the AC DC Input Power Supplies 4 5 DC Input Only Power Supplies
176. ERENTIAL F ANALOG VA AMP 4EV INPUT L INVERTER REGULATOR 5V E INA117 AND OFFSET R VOLTAGE V POT ADJUST SUPERVISOR _ 45 AO Al Polg VOLT CHANGE TIMING MXCLK GENERATOR BysL ICLK ee MODE 1 4 SIGNALS POT 15V ADJUST ISOLATION y Wy S E 4 BACKPLANE RSTB INTERFACE ate ve TT ICS DATA CONVERTER yREF REFERENCE ENAB CIRCUITS o SDOT lt q 4 CHANNELS Analog Input Modules a44559 an ms KO FILTERED INPUTS 250 Q 0 5W Ko Keon en Cranes FRAME Kore GROUND gt om4ar Tm OR MAXIMUM I SPECIFICATION Figure 10 7 Analog Current Input Module Block Diagram IC693ALG221 Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 7 IC693ALG221 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides information for connecting field wiring to the user terminal board on the 4 Channel Analog Current Input Module a44560 FIELD WIRING TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS Figure 10 8 Field Wiring for 4 Channel Analog Current Input Module Note In order to limit common mode voltages each current source common line may also be tied to its associated COM terminal if the source is floating These optional connections are shown in the figure above Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details 10 8 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Input Modules Analog Volt
177. Figure 10 21 shows how the factory made Wye cable are made TWISTED SHIELDED a47087 PIN PAIRS PIN ae ey Ee ey ee ee ee ee a aN ae me a a ee a ee ia E 16 DIODT 0 DIODT 16 0 0 DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK 0 50 piociK 25 __ D rn 25 DIOCLK lt OM gee E Pineal Shore 04 DOWNSTREAM 0 DRSEL 21 0 RACK 09 DRPERR 12 RAHE 05 REMOTE Be peer aa a Praia o o E Annon OR an DRMRUN 8 gt 4 5 0 0 CONNECTOR TERMINATION o 0 DRMRUN 9 Pettitt PLUG Oe eee al ea a tt dt lhdtEcdE cE LE STEELE ELLE 5 0 0 0 0 ovi 7 0 i T e l l Xle 05 6 FGND 1 I l 06 25 PIN 25 PIN ZN te MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE Metallized Shell Metallized Shell Metallized Shell Metallized Shell SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 3 E CONNECTED FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393F IC693CHS399E AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH DIODT gt 0 DIODT 05 DIOCLK t DocLK 9 9 DRSEL prsev DRPERR CABLE DRPERR 1 9 FROM DRMRUN 0 0 UPSTREAM DRMRUN 0 5 RAUS il DPFRAME 05 DPFRAME f 0 w f FGND I ae gt 0 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE Metallized Shell Metallized Shell NOTE Bold dashed line shows continuous 100 shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together Figure B 6 Current Remote baseplate IC693CHS393 399 Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram C 10 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F I O Cable Data Sheets Applica
178. Figures 3 2 and 3 3 There are three models of embedded baseplates the 311 313 and 323 These model numbers are based upon the CPU type that each contains This chapter discusses only the baseplate features of these products CPU specifications for the embedded CPU are located in Chapter 4 The embedded CPU baseplates have the following features The CPU type cannot be changed They do not support the use of expansion or remote racks so these racks do not have an expansion connector like the modular CPU baseplates do The models 311 and 313 are 5 slot baseplates and the model 323 is a 10 slot baseplate Since they do not require a plug in CPU module all numbered slots including Slot 1 can be used for I O or Option modules The memory back up battery is located in the Power Supply module so if the Power Supply is unplugged from the baseplate the battery will be disconnected from the memory circuits which are located on the backplane circuit board However the backplane circuit board contains a high value capacitor sometimes called a super capacitor that can store enough charge to maintain the memory circuits for about hour if the Power Supply is removed or its battery is disconnected For additional details on this subject please see Chapter 6 of the Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK 0356P or later version There are no configuration switches or jumpers on the Model 311 313 or 323
179. IC693CHS393 10 Slot Remote Baseplate 3 11 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 3 15 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 3 17 Figure 3 14 GFK O898F I O Bus Expansion Cables cceeecccees 3 12 Rack Number Selection Switch Shown with Rack 2 Selected Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates 3 16 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates Model 311 and 313 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Re Table of Contents xvii Contents AEA EE 65524 E E eee eee eee 3 18 Figure 3 15 Model 323 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements 3 19 Figure 3 16 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements cece cece cc cccccces 3 19 Figure 3 17 Modular CPU Expansion and Remote 10 Slot Baseplate Dimen sions and Spacing Requirements ccccecccccees 3 20 Figure 3 18 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation Figure 3 19 Dimensions for 19I Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter BEACKGl e245 49 h6eeos ent E eee ieee seen E ee hae ees 3 23 Figure 3 20 IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket 3 23 Figure 4 1 Standard AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR321 4 2 Figure 4 2 High Capacity AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR330 Figure 4 3 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap 4 6 Figure 4 4 Series 90 30 24 48 VDC Input Power Supply C693PWR322 Figure 4 5 Typ
180. INALS WIRING CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING COM A COM B 650 A a 48 B re KI c E o T 1 E ao to Tala L aT 5 6 a En 11 O eA eO ll 25 Ei S TO JO _ INPUT _ INPUT L CIRCUIT Lil CIRCUIT MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING COM C COM D C 36 D Ei Q Ei E 24 E 20 Ei 39 E 35 Ei Q Ei 2 a 23 T 19 Ei 38 Ei 34 E 22 Ei D Lt 37 G K 83 o _ INPUT _ INPUT foe cur Se icin Figure 6 16 Field Wiring 24 Volt Pos Neg Logic 32 Point Input Module IC693MDL653 6 20 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Input Modules 6 5 12 VDC TTL Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input IC693MDL654 The 5 12 volt DC TTL Positive Negative Logic Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 discrete TTL voltage threshold input points The inputs are arranged in four isolated groups of eight Al A8 B1 B8 Cl C8 and D1 D8 each group has its own common The inputs are positive or negative logic inputs and will operate at levels up to 15V To be compatible with TTL outputs the negative logic configuration should be used as shown in the following diagram a45035 USER 5V CIRCUIT TTL s MODULE OUTPUT A single regulated 5V supply current limited to approximately 1
181. INPUT ANALOG 4 CH lt lt CURSOR TO THE DESIRED CATALOG NUMBER AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY gt gt lt lt PRESS PGDN KEY FOR NEXT PAGE PGUP KEY FOR PREVIOUS PAGE gt gt I D LM9O LESSON ct ONFIG VALID REPLACE 4 After pressing the Enter key the first detail screen shown below is displayed RACK i in feat out Be mix ee in fee out fie nix Bother eo o o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog IERO Keven INPUT ANALOG 16PT CURRENT Active Chan Ref Adr YAIOOO1L Ref Adr 10081 I Size 8 Channel 1 4 20MA Alarm Low 00000 Alarm High 32000 I D LMSONLESSON Ree LESSONS ONFIG VALID REPLACE Note Only enabled active channels are displayed on the screen 5 Use the parameter descriptions provided in the following table to help you make selections for the parameters on this screen 10 32 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Analog Input Modules Table 10 9 Parameter Descriptions for Configuration Parame Description ter Enter a number from 1 through 16 This number represents the number of channels to be converted Active Channels are scanned in sequential contiguous order with channel No 1 Channel being the first channel scanned If more than eight channels are selected a second detail screen will be displayed to allow you to enter data in channels 9 through 16 The first Reference Address field conta
182. Inductance Analog Voltage Output Output Ranges Resolution 10 to 10V 0 to 10V Absolute Accuracy Both Voltage Modes Output Loading Output Load Capacitance Analog Input Specifications Number of Input Channels Update Rate Analog Current Input Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 2 Single Ended 4 milliseconds approximate both channels 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 625 uA 1 LSB 0 625 uA 0 5 uA 1 LSB 0 5 HA 0 1 of full scale 25 C 77 F typical 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F maximum 0 5 of full scale over operating temperature range maximum VUSER 3V minimum to VysER maximum 0 to 850 Q minimum at VusER 20V maximum 1350Q at VusErR 30V 2000 pF maximum 1 H maximum 10 to 10V bipolar 0 to 10V unipolar 0 3125 mV 1 LSB 0 3125 mV 0 3125 mV 1 LSB 0 3125 mV 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F typical 0 5 of full scale 25 C 77 F maximum 1 0 of full scale over operating temperature range maximum 5 mA 2K ohms minimum resistance 1 uF maximum capacitance 4 differential 8 milliseconds approximate for all 4 channels GFK O898F GFK O898F Input Ranges Continued from previous page Resolution 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Enhanced Absolute Accuracy All Current Modes Linearity Common Mode Voltage Common Mode Rejection Cross Channel Rejection Input Impedance Input Filter Respo
183. Installation Manual which describes the hardware components and provides installation instructions for the Series 90 30 PLC If you are using a Personal Computer to control the Series 90 30 I O refer also to the documentation for the Personal Computer Interface card and the documentation for your Personal Computer Documentation of product agency approvals standards and general specifications is provided in a separate data sheet GFK 0867 A copy of this data sheet is included as Appendix B in this manual however for the most current version of the data sheet consult your authorized GE Fanuc PLC distributor or local GE Fanuc sales representative It is also available on the GE Fanuc web site www gefanuc com Installation instructions in this manual are provided for installations that do not require special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments For installations that must conform to more stringent requirements such as CE Mark see GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards Revisions to This Manual GFK 08S98F Appropriate changes have been made to this manual GFK 0898F to add new or revised information Additionally corrections and enhancements have been made where necessary Following is a list of revisions to this manual as compared to the previous version GFK 0898E Chapter 1 Introduction to the Series 90 30 I O System in the previous version has been divided into several chapter
184. K 0402 the Hand Held Programmer for Series 90 30 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual for more information on configuration of Intelligent I O modules Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 16 Channel Analog Input module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 16 If a module had been previously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 16 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AJ You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but can not change the number of actively scanned channels Module Present GFK O898F If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into it For example assume that a 16 Channel Analog Current Input module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the Up and Down cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot Initial Display To add the IC693ALG223 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY key The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN C
185. L653 I C693MDL750 and IC693MDL751 2 Select a cable from the following table Cable Catalog Number 3 Purchase a Wiedemuller 912263 terminal block from your electronics distributor GE Fanuc does not sell this terminal block 2 22 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines 2 Applying TBQC Components to 16 Point Discrete I O Modules Procedure The step numbers in this procedure refer to the numbers in the figure See Appendix D for Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC details and Appendix C for cable data sheets 1 Select a 16 point discrete I O module see module list in table below 2 Remove the terminal board from the module and attach an C693ACC334 TBQC faceplate 3 Select a cable from following table Cable Catalog Number Length 4 Select the TBQC terminal block for your I O module from following table Terminal Block Use With Module Catalog Number These Modules Description IC693ACC329 IC693MDL240 Input 120 VAC 16 points IC693MDL645 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 16 points IC693MDL646 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 16 points IC693ACC330 IC693MDL740 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic 0 5A 16 points IC693MDL742 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic ESCP 1A 16 points IC693ACC331 IC693MDL741 Output 12 24 VDC Neg Logic 0 5A 16 points IC693ACC332 IC693MDL940 Output Relay N O 16 points IC693ACC333 IC693MDL340 Output 120 VAC 0 5
186. LG392 11 14 Table 11 5 Specifications for IC693ALG392 cc ce eee eee 11 18 Table 11 6 Configuration Parameters for IC693ALG392 11 20 Table 12 1 Specifications for IC693ALG442 12 2 Table 12 2 Terminal Pin Assignments for IC693ALG442 12 9 Table 12 3 Configuration Parameters for IC693ALG442 12 12 Table 12 4 E2 COMMREQ Command Block Definitions 12 20 Table 12 5 COMMREQ Data Types cece cece eens 12 20 Table 12 6 E2 COMMREQ Data and Command Word Formats 12 21 Table 13 1 Fuse List for Series 90 30 Modules 0e00 13 6 Table 13 2 Spare Replacement Parts cccccccccees 13 7 Table 13 3 Preventive Maintenance Table cccccccces 13 8 Table 13 4 Technical Support Telephone Numbers 13 9 Table C 1 Expansion Port Pin Assignments 0 20 ee eee eee C 5 Table C 2 Wire List for 32 Point I O Cables 0 0 0 0000 C 15 Table C 3 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors ax o lt s0s2s0k baad dawn tared awe C 17 Table C 4 Catalog Numbers for 24 An Connector Kits C 20 Table C 5 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors 0 000 C 21 Table C 6 Catalog Numbers for 24 An Connector Kits C 28 Table C 7 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors ccc cece cere neee C 29 Table C 8 TBOC Cable Cross Rference Table 0 C 32 Table D 1 TB
187. LSB x ou ool o os or oo os os me of oo x xx X not converted bits Analog values are scaled over the range of the converter Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit resolution to a multiple of full scale that is 4 UA bit This calibration leaves a normal 12 bit converter with 4000 counts normally 2 4096 counts The data is then scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range For example the data to the A D converter for the 16 Channel Analog Current Input is scaled as shown in the following figure Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 29 a44758 4000 A D BITS decimal 4 20 CURRENT mA 4 TO 20mA RANGE Figure 10 15 A D Bits vs Current Input for IC693ALG223 IC693ALG223 Configuration 10 30 The 16 Channel Analog Current Input module can be configured using either the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro or CIMPLICITY Control Programming Software configurator function or with the Hand Held Programmer The parameters that may be configured are described in the following table Configuration procedures using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software and the Hand Held Programmer are described in the following pages Table 10 8 Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Values Default Values Units Name Active Channels Number of channels converted 1 through 16 1 Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro n a 16 Hand Held programmer Ref Adr Starting address for AI reference type stan
188. Logic 1 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 6 isolated output points Each output has a separate common output terminal associated with it This output module is designed to have either positive logic characteristics in that it sources current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus or negative logic characteristics in that it sinks current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row This module uses the first six LEDs in the top row labeled Al through 6 points 1 through 6 for output status An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module External fusing is recommended Two amp loads can be driven by wiring and driving two outputs in parallel This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot ba
189. Logic Output 0 5 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL732 This 12 24 volt DC Positive Logic 0 5 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 output points in one group of eight with a common power output terminal This output module is designed to have positive logic characteristics in that it sources current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The output device is connected between the negative power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row with the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module There are no fuses on this module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table
190. MA R590 The 120 volt AC Input Relay Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 input points with one common power input terminal and 8 normally open relay circuits in the same module The input circuits are reactive resistor capacitor inputs and are arranged as one group of 8 inputs The output points are arranged in two groups of four points each Each group has a common power output terminal Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Current through an input results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user This module s input section requires an AC power source it cannot be used with a DC power source The normally open relay circuits are used for controlling output loads provided by the user The output switching capacity of each output is 2 amps The relay outputs can control a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power for the internal relay circuits is provided by the 24 volt DC bus on the backplane The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate field devices There are no fuses on this module LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each ro
191. MDL654 6 22 Figure 6 18 Field Wiring 5 12 Volt DC TTL Pos Neg Logic 32 Point Input Mod ule IC69MDL654 64 64 624 0640n edocs tb ces eieeeee eevee Figure 6 19 Input Points vs Temperature for IC694MDL655 6 27 Figure 6 20 Field Wiring 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input Mod ule IC693MDL655 sssssssssssssssssosoosesesseooo Figure 7 1 IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module 7 1 Figure 7 2 IC693MDL310 Output Module Field Wiring 7 5 Figure 7 3 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL310 7 5 Figure 7 4 Field Wiring 120 240 Volt AC Output 2 Amp Module KOO MDLS SO sesioen nnn EERE EES 7 7 Figure 7 5 Input Points vs Temperature for C693MDL330 7 7 Figure 7 6 IC693MDL340 Output Module Field Wiring 7 9 Figure 7 7 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL340 7 9 Figure 7 8 IC693MDL390 Output Module Field Wiring 7 11 Figure 7 9 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL390 7 11 Figure 7 10 IC693MDL730 Output Module Field Wiring 7 13 Figure 7 11 Load Current vs Temperature for C693MDL730 7 13 Figure 7 12 Terminal Board with Holding Screws 7 14 Figure 7 13 IC693MDL731 Output Module Field Wiring 7 16 Figure 7 14 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL731 7 16 Figure 7 15 Terminal Board with Holding Screws 7 17 Figure 7 16 IC693MDL732 Output Module Field Wiring 7
192. MDL655 6 28 IC693MDL730 7 13 IC693MDL731 7 16 IC693MDL732 7 19 IC693MDL733 7 21 IC693MDL734 7 23 IC693MDL740 7 25 IC693MDL741 7 27 IC693MDL742 7 29 IC693MDL750 7 40 IC693MDL751 7 42 IC693MDL752 7 45 IC693MDL753 7 51 IC693MDL930 7 31 IC693MDL931 7 34 IC693MDL940 7 37 IC693MDR390 to dc input power supply 4 19 to standard ac dc power supply 4 5 Field wiring work sheet 1C693MDL654 6 24 IC693MDL655 6 29 IC693MDL752 7 47 IC693MDL753 7 52 Floating neutral IT systems 2 40 Fuse table of 13 6 Ground conductor installation 2 13 Ground connections equipment 2 14 programming device safety and reference shield ground 2 16 Grounding procedures Baseplate Module shield 2 16 System 2 13 Grounding prodecures Programmer 2 15 Guide to page location for analog I O module specifications 9 1 discrete I O module specifications 5 1 Hardware load requirements 4 25 Hardware description analog modules 9 4 Heat dissipation calculations F 1 Heat dissipation calculating F 1 GFK O898F Help from GE Fanuc 13 9 Help Technical phone numbers 13 9 High capacity AC DC power supply illustration of 4 4 overvoltage protection devices 2 39 specifications High capacity DC power supply specifica tions 4 14 4 17 High Capacity DC power
193. Modules table in this chapter Modules You may wish to maintain spare PLC modules Many systems have more than one of a particular catalog number such as power supplies each rack has one and I O modules In these cases one of each type would serve as backups for several modules I1C693ACC311 qty 6 Removable terminal boards used on many I O Removable Module Terminal modules and some Option modules Board 444736756 G01 Kit contains 3 sets 6 keys Same key fits all applicable CPUs CPU CPU350 364 Key Kit Note The IC693ACC301 batteries have a shelf life of 5 years see Chapter 6 of GFK 0356P or later version for instructions on how to read battery date codes Periodically outdated batteries should be removed from stock and disposed of according to the battery manufacturer s recommendations GFK 0898F Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 7 Preventive Maintenance Suggestions Table 13 3 Preventive Maintenance Table Series 90 30 PLC Preventive Maintenance Item Description Recommendation Safety ground and Check frequently to ensure that safety ground connections are electrical system secure and that electrical cables and conduits are secure and in good condition CPU Memory Replace annually or as appropriate for your application backup battery Check Chapter 6 of GFK 0356P or later for instructions on how to avoid loss of memory contents when replacing battery
194. N 44 mA maximum per group from user supply 24 VDC and all eight outputs in group ON Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL752 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following three figures provide wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 5 24 volt DC negative logic output module a45040 LOW DROPOUT REGULATOR I ae A 10K k i O xCOM Module point numbers in the following figure are shown in bold text a45041 Loa H ar Br l e as Bs H S jan ja io ee O Ns CONN CCOM CONN BCOM CD 7 AB m LOAD LOA J FUJITSU CONNECTOR PINS A1 A12 B1 B12 MODULE POINT NUMBERS ARE SHOWN IN BOLD TEXT Figure 7 39 Field Wiring 5 24 Volt DC TTL Neg Logic 32 Point Output Module IC693MDL752 GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 45 The following figure provides examples of typical connections to user loads from the 5 24 VDC TTL Negative Logic Output module a45042 CONTACTOR COIL sl USER LOAD a OO nd PTX A SIK SERIES 90 30 yw Aw sy I TTL INPUT OT O OVN PTX L xCOM A Xok JOER TTL INPUT BV _ gt 6 2 PTx i xCOM Figure 7 40 Examples of Connection
195. Note Refer to the applicable chapter in this manual for module wiring diagrams Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail GFK 0898F Appendix D Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D 7 D 8 IC693ACC331 TBQC Terminal Block for 16 Point Modules Use with the following 16 point I O module IC693MDL741 a45588 Maximum wire size per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm Width 4 64 117 86mm Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm BODOG amp Y amp O 000000000 BLOCK YW AWD ODD O UIO O AVY YOY DY amp Figure C 5 C693ACC331 TBQC Terminal Block Note Refer to the applicable chapter in this manual for module wiring diagrams Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D IC693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block for 16 Point Modules Use with the following 16 point I O module IC693MDL940 a45589 22 D gt Maximum wire size QO 22 per terminal one 14 AWG 2 10 mm2 Width 5 04 128mm Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm 000000 Y amp ODOSOCOOGO TERMINAL O ODOOOGDDDOOHD DO OOOO Eler Below Figure C 6 IC693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block Note The common row terminals la
196. Note that common mode voltage is Analog Input limited to 11 volts 2 If inaccurate readings persist due to noise the conductor may also be connected to the Analog Input Module GND terminal Module Figure 2 19 2 Wire Transducer Externally Powered via DC Supply GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 3 Ground the Cable Shield at ou COM Field Device End Only L Note 1 C I GND_ _ Note 2 LG NOTES 1 If the source is floating connect conductor to Analog Input Module COM Analog Input terminal to limit common mode voltages Note that common mode voltage is Module limited to 11 volts 2 If inaccurate readings persist due to noise the conductor may also be connected to the Analog Input Module GND terminal Figure 2 20 3 Wire Transducer Externally Powered via DC Supply Ground the Cable Shield at nO Field Device End Only _ GND _ _ Note 2 8 NOTES 1 If the source is floating connect conductor to Analog Input Module COM Analog Input terminal to limit common mode voltages Note that common mode voltage is limited to 11 volts 2 If inaccurate readings persist due to noise the conductor may also be connected to the Analog Input Module GND terminal Module Figure 2 21 2 Wire Transducer Self Powered 2 32 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines Current a Sensing
197. OC Erminal Block Selection Table 00 D 2 Table D 2 TBOC Cable Selection Table for 16 Point Modules D 3 Table D 3 TBOC Cable Selection Table for 32 Point Modules D 12 GFK O898F Table of Contents XX X Contents Table E 1 Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table E 1 GFK O898F Table of Contents XXX Chapter Introduction to the Series 90 30 I O System l Please Read the Following Important Information The Series 90 30 I O modules described in this manual can be controlled two ways 1 With a Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller PLC 2 With a Personal Computer PC that has an installed Personal Computer Interface card or similar interface This allows software on the PC to control and monitor Series 90 30 I O If you are using Series 90 30 I O as part of a Series 90 30 PLC system you should refer to GFK 0356 the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation manual for more information If you are using a Personal Computer to control the Series 90 30 I O refer to the documentation for the PCIF your Personal Computer and your application software for more information Series 90 30 System A Series 90 30 PLC system can consist of Model 311 Model 313 or Model 323 a single baseplate with embedded CPU Model 331 340 341 system a CPU baseplate and up to 4 expansion and or remote baseplates m Model 350 351 352 360 363 or
198. OK then goes false The 5V bus will remain within specifications for an additional 4 milliseconds minimum to allow an orderly shutdown of the system a44964 INPUT INPUT POWER MOMENTARY POWER ON POWER OFF LOSS VOLTAGE S VOLTAGE OVERSHOOT OVERSHOOT 5 MAX 5 ax 5V OUTPUT CE A Sa SEDC 5 1V TYP S 97 MIN HOLD HOLD UP UP TIME TIME 20MS 10MS MIN MIN 4MS 4MS p MIN MIN PSOK Ride Through Time 20 ms minimum for IC693PWR321 330 14 ms minimum for IC693PWR322 328 10 ms minimum for IC693PWR331 332 Figure 4 14 Timing Diagram for all Series 90 30 Power Supplies Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply All Supplies A 15 pin D type female connector accessed by opening the hinged door on the right front of the power supply provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to connect to A programmer usually a personal computer running GE Fanuc PLC programming software The GE Fanuc Hand Held Programmer Other serial devices a43832 COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT Figure 4 15 Serial Port Connector The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate that also contains the CPU The serial port is not functional on a power supply that is installed in an expansion or remote baseplate m Any device connected to th
199. OLD TEXT NOTE IF TOTAL LOAD CURRENT IS GREATER THAN 3A FOR A GROUP USE BOTH VIN PINS FOR APPLICABLE GROUP OR GROUPS BY ADDING A SECOND WIRE AS SHOWN BY THE DASHED LINES Figure 7 41 Field Wiring 12 24 Volt DC 0 5A Positive Logic 32 Point Output Module IC693MDL753 GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 51 7 52 Field Wiring Work Sheet for IC693MDL753 The following table is provided for the convenience of our customers as an aid to wiring the 24 pin connectors using cable IC693CBL315 It includes all of the required wiring information in one table This table has the following information Oo OF OO module point number connector pin number cable pair number wire color code base color or base color with tracer color Al A8 B1 B8 C1 C8 D1 D8 voltage and common points Al through A12 and B1 through B12 pair 1 through pair 12 Columns are also provided for circuit references and customer wire numbers Please copy and use the work sheets on this and the following page as needed when wiring the 12 24 Volt DC 0 5A Positive Logic 32 Point Output module Wiring for Module Groups A and B connector on right front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number Al Al 1 Brown A2 Bl 7 Violet A3 A2 l Brown Black A4 B2 7 Violet Black A5 A3 2
200. OMDAL rugp E E a E ale E E E S 7 28 IC693MDL742 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 29 GFK O898F Table of Contents xi Contents xii Chapter 8 Discrete Combination I O Modules Chapter 9 General Analog Module Information Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules Isolated Relay Output N O 4 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL930 IC693MDL930 Output Module Field Wiring Information Isolated Relay Output N C and Form C 8 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL931 IC693MDL931 Output Module Field Wiring Information Relay Output N O 2 Amp 16 Point IC693MDL940 IC693MDL940 Output Module Field Wiring Information 12 24 Volt DC Negative Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL750 Field Wiring Information 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL751 IC693MDL751 Output Module Field Wiring Information 5 24 Volt DC TTL Negative Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL752 IC693MDL752 Output Module Field Wiring Information 12 24 Volt DC 0 5A Positive Logic Output 32 Point IC693MDL753 IC693MDL753 Output Module Field Wiring Information 120 Volt AC Input Relay Output 8 Inputs 8 Outputs IC693MAR590 Field Wiring Information 24 Volt DC Input Relay Output 8 Inputs 8 Outputs IC693MDR390 Field Wiring Information Analog Module Features Load Requirements for Analog I O Modules I O Installation and Wiring Analog Terminology Hardware Description of Analog Modules CPU Interface to Analog Modules Placement of A
201. Other modules such as CPUs 351 352 363 and 364 require a separate shield ground These modules come equipped with suitable grounding hardware Grounding instructions for these CPUs are discussed in the Series 90 30 Installation and Hardware Manual GFK 0356P or later version Some of the Series 90 30 Option modules such as the FIP Remote I O Scanner IC693BEM330 and DSM modules IC693DSM302 and IC693DSM314 also have shield grounding requirements These modules come equipped with suitable grounding hardware Please refer to each module s user s manual for grounding instructions 2 16 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines General Wiring Guidelines In addition to the following wiring suggestions we strongly urge that you follow all wiring and safety codes that apply to your area or your type of equipment For example in the United States most areas have adopted the National Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its requirements In other countries different codes will apply For maximum safety to personnel and property you must follow these codes Failure to do so can lead to personal injury or death property damage or destruction or both Color Coding Wires These color codes are commonly used in industrial equipment manufactured in the United States They are cited here as a reference Where they are in conflict with codes that app
202. PATIBLE SERIAL PORT BATTERY CONNECTOR BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 1 Standard AC DC Input Power Supply IC693PWR321 Power supplies must be installed in the leftmost slot in all baseplates 4 2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Note Previous versions of this power supply had five terminals on the terminal block The new version shown above which has six terminals is functionally the same as the previous version The change was made to conform to European EC requirements Table 4 3 Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC DC Input Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC Input Voltage Range AC 85 to 264 VAC DC 100 to 300 VDC Input Power 90 VA with VAC Input Maximum with Full Load 50 W with VDC Input Inrush Current 4A peak 250 milliseconds maximum Output Power 5 VDC and 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal Relay 24 VDC 24 to 28 VDC Isolated 24 VDC 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 4 A maximum Holdup Time 20 milliseconds minimum GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 3 IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply 120 240 VAC 125 VDC Input 4 4 The IC693PWR330 High Capacity
203. PLANE Vout O VOLTAGE FAULT Ree SR LATCH V PORN SELECT Figure 12 6 Analog Combo Module Block Diagram IC693ALG442 GFK 0898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 11 Configuring the IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module The Analog Combo module can be configured using the Logicmaster VersaPro or Control programming software configurator function or with the GE Fanuc Hand Held Programmer The parameters that can be configured are described in the following table Configuration procedures using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software and the Hand Held Programmer are described in the following pages Table 12 3 Configuration Parameters for IC693ALG442 STOP Output state when module toggled HOLD or DEFLOW HOLD N A MODE from RUN to STOP mode AI ADR Starting address for the AI standard range AIO001 or next highest N A reference type available reference AQ ADR Starting address for the WAQ standard range AQOOO1 or next highest N A reference type available reference I ADR Starting address for the I standard range 10001 or next highest N A reference type available reference I SIZE Number of I status locations 8 16 24 8 its RANGE 0 10 V 0 10 V volts Voltage OUTPUT Type of output range 10 10 V mA Current 4 20 mA 0 20mA RANGE 0 10 V 10 10 V 0 10 V volts Voltage INPUT Type of input range 4 20 mA 0 20mA mA Current 4 20 mA Enhanced ALARM LO Low limit alarm va
204. Quick Connect Components D 3 Step 3 Snap IC693ACC334 I O Face Plate on module a47118 A1234 5678 B1234 5678 A1234 5678 B1234 5678 Installing the IC693ACC334 I O Face Plate Module with I O Face Plate Installed Step 4 Connect cable to connector on terminal block Finally connect the selected length cable from the connector on the I O Face Plate to the connector on the interposing terminal block Module Wiring Information Refer to Chapters 6 and 7 for wiring connections for each module Cable Information Refer to Appendix C for cable data sheets D 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D Faceplate Connector Pin Out for 16 Point Modules a47119 Module Connector Terminal Pin A1234 5678 B1234 5678 Wt geet os oe B1 E au see te es A1 O eeeed ws B2 Be og Sete airs ere A2 DO weeeewes B3 ra A3 T _ ee B4 O Seucauae A4 e peed ee B5 O es A5 a ere B6 N C EEEE A6 N C eee Ge Re B7 N C ee A7 N C Wed eb ee Ha B8 V2 ose eee A8 e PE B9 ee A9 S eee B10 os A10 We ase ek B11 1 A11 Ie ge 04 u Be B12 20 ecient A12 Connector Pin Orientation Figure C 2 IC693ACC334 TBQC Faceplate Terminal Block Information Terminal block data sheets are found on the next several pages GFK 0898F Appendix D Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D 5 IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block for 16 Point
205. S 90 30 CPU Figure 9 2 Analog Input Block Diagram The analog inputs are differential that is the converted data is the difference between the voltages IN and IN as shown in Figure 3 2 The differential input configuration is much less sensitive to noise and ground currents Both inputs are referenced to a common voltage referred to as COM The average voltage of the IN terminals with respect to COM is referred to as Common Mode Voltage Different signal sources may have different common mode voltages shown as V CM1 and V CM2 This common mode voltage may be caused by differences in location of circuit grounds or by the nature of the input signal itself To reference floating sources and limit common mode voltages the COM terminal should be connected to either side of the input at the source itself Without special design considerations the summation of the common mode voltage the differential input voltage and noise on the lines referenced to the COM terminals is limited to 11 volts or damage may result to the module The input modules provide some filtering to protect against high frequency spikes but low frequency signals exceeding this will produce erroneous conversions COM COM a44738 Figure 9 3 Analog Input Common Mode Voltage Chapter 9 General Analog Module Information 9 5 Outputs The AQ data table is a memory location within the Series 90 30 CPU where the output information is stored Both current and
206. T Figure 11 11 Field Wiring Analog Current Output Module Current Mode IC693ALG391 Note An external supply can be used to power the module and the loop current Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details GFK O898F Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules 11 9 Figure 3 41 shows the connections necessary for the outputs of the module to be used as analog voltage outputs a44558 TERMINALS FIELD WIRING 2K MIN VOUT1 fg 2 VOUT2 IOUT1 CN ae Pe RIN1 k 2K MIN RTN2 RANGE 2 OPTIONAL CONNECTION REFER TO TEXT Figure 11 12 Field Wiring Analog Current Output Module Voltage Mode IC693ALG391 Note Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details 11 10 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0S98F GFK 08S98F Analog Output Modules Analog Current Voltage Output 8 Channel IC693ALG392 The 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module provides up to eight single ended output channels with current loop outputs or voltage outputs Each analog output channel is capable of providing two current output ranges or two voltage output ranges Each channel can be individually configured for the output range required for your application The module has no jumpers or switches for configuration All ranges can be configured using either Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro or CIMPLICITY Control Programming Software configurator fu
207. THER 5A 2A PER POINT TOTAL MODULE CURRENT AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 14 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL731 7 16 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Output Modules Installing and Removing IC693MDL731 Terminal Boards with Holding Screws Discrete output modules IC693MDL730F and later and IC693MDL731F and later have a special terminal board that is equipped with holding screws as shown in the figure below These screws prevent the terminal board to module connections from deteriorating in applications where the PLC is subjected to severe vibration a43082C A1234 5678 B1234 5678 lt Hinged Cover Holding Screw Removeable Terminal Board g 2 Z a SISISIS Holding Screw Module Catalog Number Figure 7 15 Terminal Board with Holding Screws Removing To Remove these terminal boards first loosen the two holding screws on the front of the terminal board then follow the standard removal instructions in Chapter 2 The holding screws are held captive in the terminal board and do not have to be completely removed Installing To install these terminal boards follow the standard installation instructions in Chapter 2 then tighten the two holding screws to 8 to 10 inch pounds 1 Newton meter of torque GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 17 12 24 Volt DC Positive
208. THIUM eoa CONNECTOR C e BACK UP O BATTERY Figure 4 10 Series 90 30 12 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply IC693PWR332 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Table 4 13 Specifications for IC693PW R332 Nominal Rated Voltage 12 VDC Input Voltage Range 9 6 to 15 VDC Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load Inrush Current 4 Amps peak 100 milliseconds maximum Output Power 5 VDC 30 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal Relay 24 VDC 19 2 to 28 8 VDC Isolated 24 VDC 19 2 VDC to 28 8 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 7 A maximum Ride Through Time 10 ms minimum Standards Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Derate per figure below at ambient temperatures above 50 C 122 F 6 1 6 0 5 8 5 6 5 4 5 2 5 VDC CURRENT 4 8 4 6 4 4 4 2 4 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Degrees C Figure 4 11 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50 C 122 F GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 17 4 185 Calculating Input Power Requirements for C693PWR332 Use the following procedure to determine input power require
209. URE C Figure 7 21 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL734 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 23 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 0 5 Amp 16 Point IC693MDL740 The 12 24 volt DC Positive Logic 0 5 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 output points in two groups of eight with a common power output terminal for each group This output module is designed to have positive logic characteristics in that it sources current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The output device is connected between the negative power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row with the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a l
210. Volt AC Isolated Input Module IC693MDL231 6 4 Figure 6 3 Field Wiring 120 Volt AC Input Module IC693MDL240 6 6 Figure 6 4 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL240 6 6 Figure 6 5 Field Wiring 24 Volt AC DC Pos Neg Logic Input Module IC693MDL241 ch0cpsceeieee rene tiene sen yeaa rere yeaa re 6 8 Figure 6 6 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL241 6 8 Figure 6 7 Field Wiring 125 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input Module NCODSIVIDIEODZ ack urd icd 4 8 4 6H k8 Oa Oe es ee ENAS 6 10 Figure 6 8 Input Points vs Temperature for C693MDL632 6 10 Figure 6 9 Field Wiring 24 Volt Positive Negative Logic Input Module IC693MDL634 406 shee seer ede ees eee eee ees 6 12 Figure 6 10 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL634 6 12 Figure 6 11 Field Wiring 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input Module IC693MDL645 2444 454684 665 e eee eee eee seek ees 6 14 Figure 6 12 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL645 6 14 Figure 6 13 Field Wiring 24 Volt DC Pos Neg Logic Input Module ICOS MDLO4G hein 646 ea ee eee ee ees 6 16 GFK O898F Table of Contents XiX Figure 6 14 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL646 6 16 Figure 6 15 C693ACC300 Input Simulator Module 6 18 Figure 6 16 Field Wiring 24 Volt Pos Neg Logic 32 Point Input Module ICGISMDLGSS s etwee cece ian eeewiteu side isan dceceews 6 20 Figure 6 17 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693
211. WER T SOURCE Tol E INTERNAL POWER H SOURCE FOR a MODULES REQUIRING Ii 24 VDC OUTPUT 24VDC lt 0 8A MAX RS 485 SERIAL PORT BATTERY S_ CONNECTOR BACK UP Ez BATTERY Figure 4 4 Series 90 30 24 48 VDC Input Power Supply C693PWR322 GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies AG Table 4 7 Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply Nominal Rated Voltage 24 or 48 VDC Input Voltage Range Start 21 to 56 VDC Run 18 to 56 VDC Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load Inrush Current 4A peak 100 ms maximum Output Power 5 VDC 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs Output Voltage 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 24 to 28 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 21 5 VDC to 28 VDC Protective Limits Overvoltage 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V Overcurrent 5 VDC output 4 A maximum Holdup Time 14 ms minimum Standards Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Calculating Input Power Requirements for C693PWR322 The following graph is a typical 24 48 VDC power supply efficiency curve A basic procedure for determining efficiency of the 24 48 VDC power supply follows the figure a44963 50 5 45W 40 AVERAGE 30 INPUT POWER WATTS 20 5 10 15 20 20 30 TOTAL OUTPUT POWER WATTS Figure 4 5 Typical Efficiency Curve for 24 48 VDC Power S
212. WYE cable and securely tighten the two screws Installing and tightening the screws will electrically connect the shield to the remote baseplate frame ground which should in turn should be connected to earth ground as instructed in the Installation chapter under the heading Baseplate Safety Grounding GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 7 Wiring Diagrams The following wiring diagrams show the wiring configuration for I O expansion system cables Wiring diagrams are provided for both point to point cables and Wye cables WYE CABLE SINGLE CONNECTOR END 25 PIN MALE NOTE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oooocoooocioooqoooo9 ec O METALIZED SHELL DIODT DIODT DIOCLK DIOCLK DRSEL DRSEL DPRERR DPRERR DRMRUN DRMRUN DPFRAME DPFRAME OV FGND Le mapas 25 PIN FEMALE TWISTED PAIRS SHIELDED 7 PAIRS SHIELD DRAIN WIRE DIODT l DIODT DIOCLK DiocLk DRSEL DRSEL DPRERR DPRERR l DRMRUN l DRMRUN DPFRAME DPFRAME ov l l l FGND isa 25 PIN MALE METALIZED SHELL oooocooooooqoooc9 eco O ooocoooocioooooo9 eco a45525 SERIES 90 30 BASEPLATE EXPANSION PORT OR WYE CABLE DOUBLE CONNECTOR END 25 PIN FEMALE Bold dashed line shows continuous 100 shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together Figure B 3 Point To Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Ca
213. ____ ANALOG OUTPUT AND DC INPUT MODULES TERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES AND Tg CG GND gy ON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FOR USER APPLICATIONS ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNAL USED INTERNALLY ON RELAY OUTPUTS SINGLE POINT CONNECTION USED INTERNALLY ON CPU INPUTS OUTPUTS ETC 2 POINT CONNECTION EXTERNAL CONNECTION TO EARTH GROUND ITTF Figure 4 13 Internal Power Supply Connections GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 2 4 22 Overcurrent Protection all Supplies The 5V logic output is electronically limited to 3 5 amps 7 amps for high capacity supplies An overload including short circuits is sensed internally and causes the supply to shut down The supply will continually try to restart until the overload is removed An internal fuse in the input line is provided as a backup The supply will usually shut down before the fuse blows The fuse also protects against internal supply faults Timing Diagram The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the DC input to the DC outputs and to the Power Supply OK signal PSOK generated by the power supply When power is first applied the PSOK signal goes false This line remains false for a minimum of 20 msec after the 5V bus is within specifications then it becomes true If input power is interrupted the 5V bus will remain within specifications and PSOK will remain true a minimum of 10 milliseconds PS
214. a USA via telephone at 408 922 9000 or via fax at 408 954 0616 for further information It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors These tools are generally not stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution If you have any further questions about this issue please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support Hotline at 1 800 GE FANUC 1 800 433 2682 or International dial direct 804 978 6036 Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table Cables are made of 12 twisted pairs wire size is 24 AWG 0 22mm2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F GFK O89SF Table B 7 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors I O Cable Data Sheets Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Al 1 BROWN A2 1 BROWN BLACK A3 2 RED A4 2 RED BLACK A5 3 ORANGE A6 3 ORANGE BLACK A7 4 YELLOW A8 4 YELLOW BLACK A9 5 DARK GREEN A10 5 DARK GREEN BLACK All 6 DARK BLUE A12 6 DARK BLUE BLACK Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Bl 7 VIOLET B2 7 VIOLET BLACK B3 8 WHITE B4 8 WHITE BLACK B5 9 GRAY B6 9 GRAY BLACK B7 10 PINK B8 10 PINK BLACK B9 1 LIGHT BLUE B10 11 LIGHT BLUE BLACK B11 12 LIGHT GREEN B12 12 LIGHT GREEN BLACK a45144 CONNECTOR Each wire pair has a solid color wir
215. able 13 1 Fuse List for Series 90 30 Modules Catalog Current Quantity on GE Fanuc Fuse Third Party Source Number Module Type Rating Module Part Number and Part Number CPU Module with Littlefuse R454 001 R454 001 embedded Ethernet interface IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver T p Bussman GDB 1A 1A bn Go 239002 IC693MDL310 120 VAC 0 5A 44A724627 111 Bussman GMC 3 Littlefuse 239003 IC693MDL330_ 120 240 VAC 1A 5A 2 44A724627 114 Bussman GDC 5 Bussman S506 5 IC693MDL340_ 120 VAC 0 5A 3A 2 44A724627 111 Bussman GMC 3 Littlefuse 239003 IC693MDL390_ 120 240 VAC 2A 3A 5 44A724627 111 Bussman GMC 3 Littlefuse 239003 IC693MDL730 12 24 VDC Positive 5A 2 259A9578P16 D Bussman AGC 5 Logic 2A Littlefuse 312005 IC693MDL731 12 24 VDC Negative 5A 2 259A9578P16 1 Bussman AGC 5 Logic 2A Littlefuse 312005 IC693PWR321 120 240 VAC or 125 2A 1 or2 44A724627 109 Bussman 215 002 and VDC Input 30 Watt GDC 2 or GMC 2 IC693PWR330_ Power Supply Littlefuse 239 002 IC693PWR322 24 48 VDC Input 5A 1 44A724627 114 Bussman MDL 5 30 Watt Power Supply Littlefuse 313005 IC693PWR328 48 VDC Input 5A 1 44A724627 114 Bussman MDL 5 30 Watt Power Supply Littlefuse 313005 IC693PWR331 24 VDC Input 5A 1 44A724627 114 Bussman MDL 5 30 Watt Power Supply Littlefuse 313005 IC693PWR332_ 12 VDC Input 5A 1 44A724627 114 Bussman MDL 5 30
216. able 5 1 is an aid to locating discrete I O module specifications and wiring information in this manual Table 5 2 lists the load requirements for each I O module I O Module Specifications The following three chapters contain specifications for each of the Series 90 30 discrete I O modules For each module the following technical information is provided m Description of the module List of specifications for the module m An illustration showing field wiring information including appropriate user connections to the detachable terminal board or connector s and an example of the module s input or output circuitry for user interface information Where applicable a graph that provides temperature derating information for the module Please refer to the following table for a module overview and for a reference to the chapter where the module is discussed GFK O89SF 5 1 5 2 Table 5 1 Guide to Chapter Location for Discrete I O Module Specifications Samet escrito af Made VO Points Number Number Description of Module T O Points Number Teao roa ovace dT enoa oova G o o E E Cema mo ave j e eeano mon AS Voro O O o eeano on avo Foieni OO J o CA S eeano ipu avo Posies tas eT C T o a E CO E C S A enoo owa ov oaa o o CO S COD S CO S eors owa aV Nees J o eama ooma i Vo roe j e CO S CO E C S emos owr G o eeano Op toetre NG wdro O o eso oeoa e CE E eeo oap A VOC o R a O j o Temo
217. able range ROQ 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 1 4 20 You can toggle through the range for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown The range selected is the one currently displayed ROQO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 1 0 20 ROQO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 1 4 20 Alarm Limits Display To view the alarm limits for the channel currently displayed press the gt key again the first time caused the channel ranges to be available for editing The following screen is displayed GFK O89SF Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 37 ROQO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHAN 1 LO 00000 The display is the entry field for the low alarm limit for the displayed channel in this case Channel 1 You can enter the desired low alarm limit value using the numeric keys and the key for specifying negative values Enter the low alarm limit using a value within the valid limits as listed in Table 2 After you have entered the low alarm limit value press the gt key again to advance to the high alarm limit display for this channel The following screen is displayed at this time RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHAN 1 HI 32000 The display shows the entry field for the high alarm limit for the currently displayed channel You can enter positive or negative numbers see table 2 using the and numeric keys After selecting the low and high alarm limits for channel 1 or the currently displayed channel you can view the nex
218. ach Each group has a common power output terminal The relay outputs can control a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power for the internal relay circuits is provided by the 24 volt DC bus on the backplane The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate field devices There are no fuses on this module LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 19 Specifications for C693MDL940 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC 120 240 volts AC nominal see the following table for exceptions Operating Voltage 5 to 30 volts DC 5 to 250 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 16 four groups of four outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between groups Maximum L
219. ad 8 amps resistive maximum per output 20 amps maximum per module for UL installations Minimum Load 10 mA Inrush Current 8 amps maximum for one cycle On Response Time 15 ms maximum Off Response Time 15 ms maximum Output Leakage Current 1 mA maximum at 250 volts AC 25 C 77 F Internal Power Consumption 45 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane 100 mA all outputs on from relay 24V bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on following page Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 33 IC693MDL931 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 8 amp Isolated Relay Output module a47015 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING A1 N C A2 N C i A3 N C A4 N C A5 N C SPE 9 919 A5 N O A6 N C x LED E J RELAY N O A6 N O A7 N C A7N O A8 N C j A8 N O Ne z i O00 oo OOl CE Figure 7 31 IC693MDL931 Output Module Field Wiring Pa POINT cage 32 6A PER POINT TOTAL 94 8A PER POINT MODULE LOAD CURRENT 16 AMPS 8 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 32 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL931 7 34 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Sp
220. age Input 16 Channel IC693ALG222 The 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module provides up to 16 single ended or eight differential input channels each capable of converting an analog input signal to a digital value for use as required by your application This module provides two input ranges to 10 V unipolar 10 to 10 V bipolar Voltage Ranges and Input Modes The default input mode and range is single ended unipolar with the user data scaled so that O volts corresponds to a count of 0 and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 The other range and mode are selected by changing the configuration parameters using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro or CIMPLICITY Control configurator software or the Hand Held Programmer The range can be configured for bipolar 10 to 10 V where 10 V corresponds to a count of 32000 0 V corresponds to a count of 0 and 10 V corresponds to a count of 32000 High and Low alarm limits are available on all ranges Ranges can be configured on a per channel basis Power Requirements and LEDs This module consumes a maximum of 112 mA from the 5V bus on the PLC backplane It also requires a maximum of 41 mA from the backplane Isolated 24 Volt DC supply to power the on board power converter that provides isolated 5V supplies to power the user side circuitry see Table 3 9 Specifications There are two green LED indicators on the module which provide module and user supply status The top LED
221. age with respect to circuit common Exceeding the common mode voltage rating of differential signals causes large errors in the data conversion and may affect several points This is a standard analog interface defined by the Instrument Society of America ISA in ANSI ISA S50 1 The signal level is 4mA to 20mA Three types of signal sources are defined Types 2 3 and 4 These correspond to the number of wires used Transmitter outputs may have various isolation among loop power source input sensor and 4 20mA output current The isolation of the transmitter may impact the type of PLC input required The Standard covers only isolated or common single ended inputs Differential inputs often used in PLCs and connecting several current loops together as often occurs with PLCs are not covered well in the Standard and often introduce additional complication regarding location of commons and grounds Differential signals are measured on two wires which are separate but not isolated from the power supply Differential inputs allow a greater degree of freedom in wiring commons and grounds without affecting accuracy There is a limited voltage rating see Common Mode between the signal level wires and the power supply wires This limitation also applies to voltage differences among additional I O on the same supply Differential inputs usually come in groups sharing the supply common tie point Some voltage outputs may have an external return or remote
222. aker etc Note Output LEDs can be on even if the field power supply is not working If the LED turns on and the module correctly switches the output voltage check the output device or wiring for an open circuit If the LED turns on no Fuse is open or no ESCP is tripped and the external power supply is working correctly but the module still doesn t switch the output circuit the module or the module s terminal board is probably defective Or for 32 point modules the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual July 2000 GFK O898F Maintenance and Troubleshooting connection cable or terminal block may be defective If replacing the module at this point in the troubleshooting process still doesn t correct the problem the baseplate may be defective however a defective baseplate is probably the least likely source of the problem If none of an output module s outputs are working it may be that the external field output power supply is defective is not powered up or is not connected properly As indicated in the connection diagram in the previous figure input and output devices are powered from an external power supply not from inside the module Details on individual discrete output modules can be found in Chapter 7 Power Supply LED Indicators The power supplies have four LED indicators Their functions are explained in detail in the Power Supplies chapter CPU LED Indicators There are seve
223. alled a slot on a baseplate has a unique number except for the unnumbered left slot which is for the Power Supply The slot to the right of the Power Supply slot is always called Slot 1 These slot numbers are marked on the baseplate s plastic cover Each slot has a connector for module connections and top and bottom retainers for holding the module in place Module Location Since each rack is assigned a unique number and since each slot in a rack s baseplate has a unique slot number each individual module s location in a system can be identified by its rack and slot numbers For example a module could be referred to as the module in Rack 1 Slot 4 This numbering method enables the CPU to correctly read from and write to a particular module and report the location of a faulted module CPU Baseplate A baseplate that either has a CPU built in to its backplane circuit board embedded CPU or one that has a slot for a plug in CPU module modular CPU There can only be one CPU baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system and it will always be called Rack 0 zero A CPU module can only mount in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate A special Option module such as the FIP Remote I O Scanner module IC693BEM330 can also be used in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate I O Power Supply and most Option modules cannot fit in a CPU slot Expansion Baseplate One that does not contain a CPU and which can be mounted up to 50 cable feet from the CPU basepl
224. alog Output Module 11 20 Configuring IC693ALG392 Using Logicmaster Software 11 21 Other Configuration Considerations for IC693ALG392 11 23 Configuring IC693ALG392 with Hand Held Programmer 11 25 IC693ALG392 Analog Current Voltage Output Block Diagram 11 30 Chapter 12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 1 Analog Current Voltage Combination Module 4 Input 2 Output Channels IC693ALG442 0 eee eee 12 1 IC693ALG442 Input Modes and Current Voltage Ranges 12 4 IC693ALG442 Output Modes and Current Voltage Ranges 12 6 IC693ALG442 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections 12 9 IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module Field Wiring Diagram 12 10 IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module Block Diagram 12 11 Configuring the IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module 12 12 Configuring IC693ALG442 Using Logicmaster Software 12 13 Other Configuration Considerations 04 100 seen neve eee dew ee eed ees 12 14 IC693ALG442 Ramp Mode Operation o6 05005e08cancenedeanwneeedsaxed 12 18 E2 COMMREQ for IC693ALG442 0 cece eee n eens 12 20 Configuring IC693ALG442 with Hand Held Programmer 12 24 Modu l Prosent 424506 64a 5655504 5ebt5be54 needs ooh eceds een cee ee ue 12 24 Sclecimiae oL MerciChCe 55 h2y5onsabbaasnne te nsedecsaneabentsnenseaunen 12
225. alog Voltage Input module is capable of converting inputs in the range of 10 to 10 volts Conversion speed for each of the four channels is one millisecond This provides an update rate of four milliseconds for any channel Resolution of the converted signal is 12 bits binary 1 part in 4096 User data in the AI registers is in 16 bit 2 s complement format The placement of the 12 bits from the A D converter in the AI data word is shown below The relationship between the voltage input and the data from the A D converter is shown in Figure 3 10 MSB LSB S D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO X X X X X not applicable to this discussion S sign bit a44652 2000 A D BITS O decimal VOLTAGE V Figure 10 1 A D Bits vs Voltage Input GFK 0898F 10 1 10 2 Scaling of the input is shown below in Figure 3 11 a44653 32000 AI decimal 32000 VOLTAGE V Figure 10 2 Scaling for Voltage Input A limited current input mode is also provided in the module A jumper is provided on the user terminal connector for each channel which may be used to connect the internal 250 ohm shunt resistor into the circuit The shunt resistor effectively provides a 40 to 40 mA current input range However the input current should generally not exceed 20 mA to avoid self heating of the input resistor and a corresponding loss of accuracy A 4 to 20 mA input corresponds to a 1 to 5 volt inp
226. and shield ground connection details GFK O898F Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules 11 15 11 16 IC693ALG392 Status Reporting The Analog Current Voltage Output module provides status information to the PLC This status information is updated once each PLC sweep and consists of three items m health of the module all ranges m overload or open wire detect current mode only m status of the user supplied power to the module all ranges IC693ALG392 Power Requirements and LEDs This module requires a maximum of 110 mA from the 5V bus on the PLC backplane for the logic side The module s analog power must be supplied by a user supplied single 24 VDC power source and requires a maximum current of 315 mA There are two green LED indicators on the module which provide module and user supply status The top LED OK provides module status information and the bottom LED USOK indicates whether the user supply is present and is above a minimum designated level Note that both LEDs are powered from the 5V backplane power bus The LEDs have six possible status combinations which are described below LED Status Indications for IC693MDL392 1 OK ON Module OK and configured USOK ON User power is present 2 OK FLASH Module OK but not configured USOK OFF No user power 3 OK FLASH Module OK but not configured pT feso Mov otmeiepen 4 OK ON Module OK and configured o feal om poms o OO 5 OK OFF Module is defective or no 5V backplane
227. and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must come from an external power supply supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row This module uses the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 A red LED labeled F on the right and centered between the two rows of green LEDs functions as a blown fuse indicator it turns ON when any fuse is blown The module has two 5 Amp fuses with each fuse protecting four outputs the first fuse protects Al A4 the second fuse protects A5 A8 The fuses are electrically connected to the same common An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 7 Specifications for C693MDL730 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 8
228. aseplates however powering off a baseplate generates a loss of module GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 13 3 14 LOSS_OF_ MODULE fault in the PLC Fault Table for each module in the powered down baseplate When this fault condition occurs and until the baseplate is powered back on and all modules recovered the lost I O modules are not scanned by the CPU For more information on the power up and power down sequence see Chapter 2 in the Series 90 30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467 Series 90 30 PLC Backplane The Series 90 30 PLC backplane on all three types of baseplates has a dedicated I O communications bus The signals on the remote baseplate backplane are optically coupled and an isolated DC DC power supply converter is provided to isolate the signals from other backplanes Power bus connects the power supply outputs to the modules in the baseplate I O Communications bus the CPU communicates with I O modules over this bus This bus is connected to the I O busses in Expansion and Remote racks via the I O Bus Expansion connectors and cables Special Intelligent Module bus exists only on a CPU baseplate therefore certain special intelligent option modules such as the PCM ADC and CMM modules will only work in a CPU baseplate Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remote Baseplates Each baseplate in a Series 90 30 system is identified with a unique number called a
229. at includes both remote and expansion baseplates A system can have a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as long as the distance and cable requirements are followed CPU BASEPLATE pae CPU p a j E E a R N BASEPLATE aT IC693CHS391 397 Meet tt Ld EE SR EXPANSION 1 BASEPLATE ees casos ace EXPANSION BASEPLATE IG TILL MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU 50 FEET 15 METERS REMOTE BASEPLATE 5 TTT Ig TELL pd _ REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CHS393 399 REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CHS393 399 REMOTE BASEPLATE IC693CHS393 399 MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU 700 FEET 213 METERS 9 Standard Wye Cable 2 Custom Built Point to Point Cable 3 IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable Used as Wye Jumper 4 IC693ACC307 Bus Terminator Figure B 8 Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates C 12 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F I O Cable Data Sheets IC693CBL306 307 Extension Cables 50 Pin for 32 Point Modules Function of cable This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50 pin male Honda connector mounted on the front of the module The extension cables have a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 50 pin female connector on the other end This cable provides a connection from the module to a connector mounted on a DIN rail mounted terminal block assembly This cable is wired pin to pin That is pin 1 to pin 1 pin 2 to pin 2 etc
230. ata Word 12 mA 4 mA x 23 16000 4 uA Example 2 if you want a 5V setpoint for a voltage input 0 to 10V range for the 16 Channel Voltage Input module IC693ALG222 use the first equation to find the corresponding data word as shown below Data Word 5V x 23 16000 Aeb mV Chapter 9 General Analog Module Information 9 7 Example 3 if you want a 5 volt setpoint for a 4 Channel Voltage Input module IC693ALG220 use the first equation to find the corresponding data word as shown below Data Word 5V OV x 24 16000 5 mV Placement of A D and D A Bits within the Data Tables 9 8 Since converters used in the analog modules are 13 bit converters not all of the 16 bits in the data tables contain data required for the conversion A version of the 12 bits is placed within the 16 bit data word corresponding to the analog point Gn AQ or AI tables The Series 90 30 system handles the integration differently for the various analog modules The Series 90 30 system disregards the data placed in the extra bits in the AQ table and uses those bits for communications with the module The CPU also converts the data in the AQ data word from 2 s complement to sign magnitude format before sending the data to the output module The CPU does not manipulate the data from the input modules before placing it within the word in the AI data table The bits in the AI data table which were not used in the conversion by the input module are force
231. ate An Expansion baseplate cannot operate on its own It must be used in a system that has a controlling CPU Remote Baseplate One that does not contain a CPU and which can be mounted up to 700 cable feet from the CPU baseplate A remote baseplate cannot operate on its own It must be used in a system that has a controlling CPU Power Supply Slot Each baseplate must contain its own Power Supply module which must mount in the Power Supply slot It is the slot located on the left end of the baseplate it is not numbered and it has a unique size and shape so that only a Power Supply module can mount in it Note Attempts to force a module into an improper slot type will result in damage to the module and or the baseplate Modules will mount in the correct slot type easily and with a minimum of force GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 3 3 4 CPU Baseplates There are two basic kinds of CPU baseplates embedded and modular The embedded types fulfill the need for a good low cost PLC but lack the power expandability and versatility of the modular systems Embedded CPU Baseplate This type has CPU and memory integrated circuit chips soldered to its backplane circuit board Modular CPU Baseplate This type does not have CPU and memory chips on its backplane Instead it has a connector in Slot 1 for a plug in CPU module which contains the CPU and memory chips on an internal circuit board Embedded CPU Baseplates
232. ation Guidelines 2 5 Removing a Module Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to stop or malfunction Injury to personnel and damage to the module or baseplate may result Also potentially dangerous voltages from user devices may be present on a module s screw terminals even though power to the rack is turned off Care must be taken any time that you are handling the module s removable terminal board or any wires connected to it m If the module has wiring remove the module s terminal board NOTE You do not have to unwire the terminal board or cables The procedure for removing a terminal board is described later in this section Locate the release lever at the bottom of the module and firmly press it up towards the module m While holding the module firmly at its top and fully depressing release lever swing pivot the module upward release lever must be free of its retaining slot m Disengage pivot hook at the top rear of the module by moving the module up and away from the baseplate a43056 PIVOT HOOK PRESS RELEASE LEVER Figure 2 4 Removing a Module Note Modules in expansion or remote baseplates can be added removed or replaced while the PLC is in RUN mode if power is first removed from the expansion or remote baseplate I O data to from this baseplate will not be updated while power is removed Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 08
233. aximum 1 References 5 VDC 24 VDC IC693 ALG220 4 27 98 IC693ALG221 4 23 100 IC693ALG222 16 8 to 40 112 41 IC693ALG223 16 8 to 40 120 user supplied IC693ALG390 2 32 120 IC693ALG391 2 30 215 3 IC693ALG392 8 8 or 16 110 user supplied IC693ALG442 4 2 8 16 or 24 95 user supplied Maximum current available from Standard AC DC and DC power supply 5 VDC 15W 3000 mA Isolated 24 VDC 20W 830 mA High Capacity AC DC and DC power supplies provide 30W 6000 mA for 5 VDC Isolated 24 VDC 20W 830 mA For all supplies maximum total power for all outputs cannot exceed 30 watts Supplied from Isolated 24 VDC on backplane or from user supply Table 9 4 User References Available per System CPU Model Al AQ I 311 313 and 323 64 words 32 words 3172 331 128 words 64 words 312 340 and 341 1024 words 256 words 312 350 2048 words 512 words 2048 351 364 128 32640 words configurable 128 32640 words configurable 2048 Table 9 5 Maximum Number of Analog Modules per System Analog Module Type CPU Models 311 313 323 1 CPU Models 350 364 1 IC693ALG220 and IC693ALG221 Input Module 4 Channel 5 5 slot baseplate Model 311 313 8 10 slot baseplate Model 323 40 Model 331 340 341 64 Model 350 364 IC693ALG222 and IC693ALG223 Input Module 16 Channel 4 5 slot baseplate Model 31
234. baseplates An embedded CPU baseplate is always assigned by default Rack Number Zero 0 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Baseplates LONGER THAN 1 HOUR a44563A Replaceable System firmware PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM SYSTEM PROGRAM PROM PROM A PROGRAMMABLE 3 5 o CONTROLLER o Description Label BASE ESCOT 3 g Says With CPU WITH CPU o 8 E n NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM 22 AND REGISTER 90 VALUES MAY BE Joo Memory Backup LOST IF POWER Warning Label REMOVED FoR 28 00 oe00000000000 e00000000000 oo0o000000000 ooo0oo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 ooo0oo0o00000000 POWER o SUPPLY Figure 3 2 IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplates a45134 PROGRAM PROGRAMMABLE A CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT WITH CPU e0000000000000 oooo0oo00o00000000 CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE LOST IF POWER SUPPLY IS REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR e00000000000 e00000000000 e00000000000 e900000000000 e0000000000 e900000000000 e00000000000 eo00000000000 e00000000000 000000000000 e00000000000 e00000000000 POWER o SUPPLY Figure 3 3 C693CPU323 10 slot Embedded CPU Baseplate GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 5 3 6 Modular CPU Baseplates Figures 3 4 and 3 5 Memory Backup Warning Label A Power Supply module must be plugged into the left slot which is not numbere
235. be degraded to 4 FS 3Tn the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 2 FS 4PSSR is measured by varying Vysgr from 24V to 30V Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 3 IC693ALG442 Input Modes and Current Voltage Ranges 12 4 Current Operation In the 4 to 20 mA range user data is scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of O and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 The other ranges are selected by changing the configuration parameters using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro configurator software or the Hand Held Programmer In the 0 to 20 mA range user data is scaled so that 0 mA corresponds to a count of O and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 Full 12 bit resolution is available over the 0 to 20 mA range A 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range can also be selected When this range is selected O mA corresponds to a count of 8000 4 mA corresponds to a count of O zero and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 The Enhanced range uses the same hardware as the 0 to 20 mA range but automatically provides 4 to 20 mA range scaling with the exception that negative digital values are provided to the user for input current levels between 4 mA and O mA This gives you the capability of selecting a low alarm limit that detects when the input current falls from 4 mA to 0 mA which provides for open wire fault detec
236. beled with the letter C are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to the applicable chapter in this manual for module wiring diagrams Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail GFK 0898F Appendix D Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D 9 IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block for 16 Point Modules Use with the following 16 point I O module IC693MDL340 a45590 aclooloooloaclogloo Maximum wire size per terminal one Width 4 64 117 86mm 14 AWG 2 10 mm Height all blocks 2 25 57mm Depth all blocks 1 7716 45mm OOO OM YO amp YQOOOOD amp BLOCK OOM A WA A A A M WM W HW seonotes OO E TT O CC ee Figure C 7 IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block Note The neutral row terminals labeled with the letter N are provided for wiring convenience Their use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to the applicable chapter in this manual for module wiring diagrams Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Terminal Block Quick Connect Component
237. ble 12 4 E2 COMMREQ Command Block Definitions Data Description Example Data Start Address Always 0004 for this module 0004 1 Not used 0000 COMMREQ status data type 0008 R COMMREQ status address zero based 0000 R0001 6 Command type E2 message ID for 6 byte E201 data command to ALG442 and command parameter 1 write Byte length of data sent to ALG442 0006 008 Data address zero based 0064 RO101 The decimal and hexadecimal values which specify COMMREQ data types are shown in Table 3 26 The data format and command word description for the E2 COMMREQ are shown in Table 3 27 The first word holds the command word the second word holds data for changing alarm or ramp parameters and the third word is unused The R addresses correspond to the example command block data in Table 3 25 Table 12 5 COMMREQ Data Types Enter This Number For This Data Type Discrete Input 2 C Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Table 12 6 E2 COMMREQ Data and Command Word Formats E2 COMMREQ Data Channel Convention word ROIO1 command word 0 channel 1 word 2 R0102 alarm or ramp data 1 channel 2 word 3 RO1O03 unused 2 channel 3 3 channel 4 Command Word Description 000x Change low alarm of channel x using absolute mode word 2 holds the new alarm value 001x Change high ala
238. bles WYE CABLE SINGLE CONNECTOR END 25 PIN FEMALE oooocoooocjcooooooe O oooocoocoooqococjoooooso O DIODT DIODT DIOCLK DIOCLK DRSEL DRSEL DRPERR DRPERR DRMRUN DRMRUN DFRAME DFRAME OV FGND MALE TWISTED PAIRS SHIELDED 7 PAIRS oooocoocooocjcoooooooe O ab SHIELD DRAIN WIRE DIODT DIODT DIOCLK DIOCLK DRSEL DRSEL DRPERR DRPERR DRMRUN DRMRUN DFRAME DFRAME OV FGND MALE So oo oooocoooococoo qooo e oo a45527 SERIES 90 30 BASEPLATE EXPANSION PORT OR 25 PIN FEMALE Figure B 4 Point To Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F I O Cable Data Sheets TWISTED SHIELDED a47076 PIN PAIRS TE n 0 a DIODT 17 i 5 DIOCLK 24 a i 5 DIOCLK 25 i TE oly 9 P ee 05 REMOTE o w E I o EXPANSION OR i eee te o0 BASEPLATE 0 DRMRUN 8 ih 0 0 CONNECTOR TERMINATION 0 DRMRUN 9 0 PLUG 0 0 DPFRAME 2 ai 0 0 0 0 x i 0 ov 7 0 ceed 0 Ne o 0 FGND 1 j i F ee 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN lized aed M aes ll Metallized Shell Metallized Shell etallized She HIELD DRAIN WIRE SHIELD DRAIN WIRE S CUT PIN 1 HERE IN NOT CONNECTED FACTORY MADE WYE CABLES PIN 16 DIODT S 17 DIODT 05 24 DIOCLK t9 25 DIOCLK 4 20 DRSEL
239. bration leaves a normal 12 bit converter with 4000 counts normally 212 4096 counts The data is then scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range For example the data to the A D converter for the Analog Voltage Input is scaled as shown below a45717 4000 A D BITS decimal 0 VOLTAGE 0 to 10V RANGE 10 Figure 12 2 A D Bits vs Voltage Input GFK O898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 5 IC693ALG442 Output Modes and Current Voltage Ranges 12 6 Current Operation In the 4 to 20 mA range user data is scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32767 In the O to 20 mA range user data is scaled so that 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to 32000 Note that in the 0 to 20 mA mode you can enter a value up to 32767 which provides a maximum output of approximately 20 5 mA Scaling of the current output for both the 4 to 20 mA range and the 0 to 20 mA range is shown below In current mode the module also provides an open loop fault detect which is reported to the PLC in the I table a44683 044684 32000 32000 AQ AQ decimal decimal 0 O 4 20 0 CURRENT mA CURRENT mA 4 to 20 mA Range 0 to 20 mA Range Figure 12 3 Scaling for Current Output Voltage Operation For Voltage Operation in the default unipolar mode 0 to 10 volts user data is scaled so that O volts corresponds to a count of 0 and 10 volts corresponds to a c
240. by the user This module requires an AC power source it cannot be used with a DC power source LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has a horizontal row with eight green LEDs labeled Al through 8 points through 8 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 1 Specifications for C693MDL230 Rated Voltage 120 volts AC 50 60 Hz Input Voltage Range 0 to 132 volts AC 50 60 Hz Inputs per Module 8 each input point has a separate common Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field side and logic side 500 volts RMS between inputs Input Current 14 5 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 74 to 132 volts AC Off state Voltage 0 to 20 volts AC On state Current 6 mA minimum Off state Current 2 2 mA maximum On response Time 30 ms maximum Off response Time 45 ms maximum Power Consumption 60 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK O0898F 6 1
241. cation dependent 0 5 uA 1 LSB 0 5 uA 625 uA 1 LSB 625 uA 3125 mV 1 LSB 3125 mV 3125 mV 1 LSB 3125 mV 0 1 of full scale 25 C 77 F typical 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F maximum 0 5 of full scale over operating temperature range maximum 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F typical 0 5 of full scale 25 C 77 F maximum 1 0 of full scale over operating temperature range maximum VUSER 3V minimum to Vysgpr maximum 0 to 850Q minimum at VyusgRr 20V maximum 1350Q at Vusgr 30V 2 2000 pF maximum 1H 5 mA 2K ohms minimum resistance 1 uF maximum capacitance 1500 volts between field and logic side 110 mA from 5V PLC backplane supply 315 mA from 24V user supply Refer to Appendix C for product standards and general specifications 1 PSSR is measured by varying Vusgpr from 24V to 30V 2 Load less than 800 Q is temperature dependent 3 In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 1 FS for current outputs and 3 FS for voltage outputs Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Analog Output Modules Derating Curves for the 8 Channel Analog Output Module 1200 ohm loads eo 1000 ohm loads 55 500 ohm loads AMBIENT 50 A 250 ohm loads TEMPERATURE C shorted loads 45 40 VusER 30V 35 CURRENT MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ACTIVE CHANNELS 800 ohm loads 500 ohm loads
242. ch each one with the correct module Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Chapter Series 90 350 Baseplates 3 Baseplate Types A baseplate is composed of three main parts 1 a circuit board mounted to 2 a metal back plate with 3 a plastic cover The circuit board called the backplane contains sockets for plug in modules The metal back plate has four holes for mounting the baseplate and retainer slots for mounting the modules The plastic cover provides protection for the circuit board slotted holes for the module connectors and retainers and printed labels such as the baseplate description serial number and slot number labels There are three basic types of baseplates discussed in this chapter CPU Expansion Remote Common Baseplate Features Illustrated The callouts in the following picture show the items that are common to all Series 90 30 baseplates Note that a modular CPU baseplate is shown GFK O898F i ore G PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT s D oo oo oo oo os NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM lies oo oo oo N CPU 1 Module retainers Upper mounting holes Baseplate description Lower mounting holes The plastic cover is slotted at these two holes to facilitate a ground connection See the Baseplate Safety Grounding section of the General Installation Guidelines chapter for ground connection details Backplane connector f
243. convenient points for measuring voltages while testing or troubleshooting Hinged Front Cover The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board connections Normally it s kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally touching a hot terminal Note in the following figure that the back side of the front cover insert contains a schematic diagram of the terminal board connections The module catalog number IC693MDL940 in the example shown is printed on the bottom of the front cover insert The module catalog number is also printed on the label on the side of the module However in order to see this side label the module has to be removed from the PLC On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module s I O points You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for each point on the appropriate line as shown in the example in the figure Also on the front side of the front cover insert running vertically on the left edge of the insert is a color bar that identifies the type of module Blue DC Red AC and Gray Analog Module Lens Cap Located on the top front of the module it covers the LED Light Emitting Diode status lights These are labeled in the following figure in two groups Al through A8 and B1 through B8 Since this is a figure of a 16 Point Output module there are 16 LED status lights The number of status lights on any given module is a function of the nu
244. cteristics source current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The load is connected between the negative power bus and the module output GFK O898F Chapter 5 General Discrete I O Module Information 57 Negative Logic Input Modules Input modules designed with negative logic characteristics source current through the input device to the user common or positive power bus The input device is connected between the negative power bus and the input terminal Se a43841 IEC 24V Negative Logic Output Modules Output modules designed with negative logic characteristics sink current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus The load is connected between the positive power bus and the output terminal m a43842 IEC 24V 5 8 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0O898F Chapter Discrete Input Modules 6 120 Volt AC Isolated Input 8 Point IC693MDL230 The 120 volt AC Isolated Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 isolated input points each with a common power input terminal The input circuits are reactive resistor capacitor inputs Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate the field devices must be supplied
245. ction specifications 4 8 4 11 status indicators timing diagram 4 22 DC power supply 24 48 VDC illustration of 4 7_ DC power supply 48 VDC illustration of 14 10 Definition of analog terms A 1 Definition of positive and negative logic for I O modules 5 7 Diagram timing 4 22 Differential inputs 9 4 Discrete I O modules 1 1 DOIO instruction 13 4 E E2 COMMREQ 12 20 Index 3 Index Index 4 E2 COMMREQ example 12 21 Embedded CPU base plates 3 4 Features figure 3 5 Equation values for analog modules 9 7 Expansion baseplates bus termination 3 13 IC 5 extension cables description of C 13 port pin assignments C 5 Expansion baseplate defined 3 3 1C693CHS392 figure 3 9 IC693CHS398 figure 3 8 Expansion system example 3 16 remote connections 3 17 C 12 Extension cables I O C 13 C 23 C 31 Faceplate I O TBQC D 3 Fax Link system 13 9 Field wiring to AC DC power supplies 2 38 Field wiring connections IC693ALG220 10 4 IC693ALG221 10 8 IC693ALG222 IC693ALG223 IC693ALG390 11 4 1C693ALG392 IC693ALG442 12 9 IC693MAR590 8 3 IC693MDL230 IC693MDL231 IC693MDL240 6 6 IC693MDL241 6 8 IC693MDL310 IC693MDL330 IC693MDL340 IC693MDL390 7 11 IC693MDL632 6 10 IC693MDL634 6 12 IC693MDL645 6 14 IC693MDL646 6 16 IC693MDL653 6 20 IC693MDL654 6 23 IC693
246. d AI data tables for any math or data function without having to do any conversion or 2 s complement math When using raw data in any math calculations you would usually use double precision math 9 6 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Analog Module Information 9 You can find corresponding data words and analog values for programming purposes by using the following equations and the values in Table 3 3 Data Word _ Analog Value Offset x 2n Resolution Analog Value Data Word x Resolution Offset 2N 1 analog value bit 2 number of disregarded LSBs Table 9 2 Equation Values for Analog Modules Analog Current Output 4 to 20 mA Range 3 4 mA 16 mA 12 bits 0 to 20 mA Range 3 0 mA 20 mA 12 bits Analog Current Input 4 to 20 mA Range 12 bits 0 to 20 mA Range 12 bits Analog Current Input 16 Channel 4 to 20 mA Range 12 bits 0 to 20 mA Range 12 bits 4 to 20 mA Range Enhanced 12 bits Analog Voltage Input 16 Channel 0 to 10V Range 10 to 10V Range Analog Current Voltage Output 8 Channel 0 to 10V Range 15 bits 2 5 mV bit GFK O898F 10 to 10V Range 4 to 20 mA Range 0 to 20 mA Range 16 bits 5 mV bit 15 bits 4 wA bit 15 bits 5 uA bit Example 1 if you want a 12 mA setpoint for a current input 4 20 mA range for the 16 Channel Current Input module IC693ALG223 use the first equation to find the corresponding data word as shown below D
247. d Any part meeting the same specification can be used C 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets Expansion Port Pin Assignments The following table lists the expansion port pin assignments you will need when building remote cables All connections between cables are point to point that is pin 2 of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end pin 3 to pin 3 etc Table B 1 Expansion Port Pin Assignments Signal Name 16 DIODT I O Serial Data Positive 17 DIODT I O Serial Data Negative 24 DIOCLK T O Serial Clock Positive 25 DIOCLK I O Serial Clock Negative 20 DRSEL Remote Select Positive 21 DRSEL Remote Select Negative 12 DRPERR Parity Error Positive DRMRUN Remote Run Positive 5 orsteuny ame eonneeine DFRAME Cycle Frame Positive gt omame ame Nege FGND Frame Ground for Cable Shield e a I O Expansion Bus Termination When two or more baseplates are cabled together in an expansion system the I O expansion bus must be properly terminated The I O bus must be terminated at the last baseplate in an expansion system Each signal pair is terminated with 120 ohm 1 4 watt resistors wired between the appropriate pins as follows see the above table also pins 16 17 24 25 20 21 12 13 8 9 2 3 The I O bus termination can be done one of the following ways O By installing an I O Bus Terminator Plug catalog number IC693ACC307 on the last expansion baseplate local expansio
248. d of these baseplates The left slot is a unique size and type that only supports a Power Supply module A CPU module or a special Option module must be installed in Slot 1 of these baseplates Slot 1 is a unique size and type that only supports a CPU module or a special Option module like the FIP Remote I O Scanner IC693BEM330 Slot 1 is labeled CPU 1 Slots numbered 2 and above are of a unique size and type that only supports I O or Option modules Expansion and Remote baseplates are supported so a 25 pin D type female expansion connector is located at the right end of the baseplate for connecting to an Expansion or Remote baseplate Since the CPU is modular it can be replaced or changed to a different type if additional features are desired Only one CPU baseplate is allowed per system If more than one baseplate is used in a system the additional ones must be either Expansion or Remote types A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned by default Rack Number 0 a44564 A PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT E X P ag A 38 NON CPU SLOTS N I O Bus USER PROGRAM 88 20 S AND REGISTER VALUES MAY BE oo Expansion LOST IF POWER Connector SUPPLY IS N REMOVED FOR llo LONGER THAN 22 1 HOUR POWER O SUPPLY CPU Slot Slot 1 Figure 3 4 1C693CHS397 5 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 a43
249. d to O zero by the analog input module An example of the bit placement for an analog current output data word is shown below This example is for the Analog Current output module catalog number C693ALG391 MSB LSB _s put io o os v7 os os os os v2 oif vo x x x S sign bit X not converter bits Analog values are scaled over the range of the converter Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit resolution to a multiple of full scale that is 4 microamps bit This calibration leaves a normal 12 bit converter with 4000 counts normally 2 4096 counts The data is then scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range For example the data to the D A converter for the analog current output is scaled as shown in Figure 3 4 a44758 4000 D A BITS decimal CURRENT mA 4 TO 20mA RANGE Figure 9 5 D A Bits vs Current Output for C693ALG391 More detailed information on placement and scaling for the analog modules can be found within their respective specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Analog Module Information 9 Stair Step Effect of Output Because the converted bits 12 bits in the data word 16 bits are not right justified the placement of the converted bits causes the output or input to be a stair step The net effect of the stair step for an output module is that not every increase in the AQ data table will cause an
250. d together with heat shrink tubing for identification purposes For example a short piece of heat shrink tubing should be placed around the BLACK and WHITE wire pair Pair 1 that connect to Pins Al and A2 etc Replacement Obsolescence Information m This cable became obsolete and was replaced by cable IC693CBL315 now obsolete also The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding m When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete the replacement for these cables became IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 Cables IC693CBL310 315 have straight connectors Cables C693CBL327 328 have right angle connectors The right angle connectors require less depth in front of the PLC so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some applications Data sheets for cables C693CBL315 and C693CBL327 328 can be found in this chapter Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 18 Connector Depth for Cable C693CBL310 The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector PLC Side View 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure B 11 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets IC693CBL315 T O Interface Cable 24 Pin for 32 Point Modules Note This cable became obsolete in late 199
251. dard range AI0001 or next highest available n a address Ref Adr Starting address for I reference type 100001 or next highest available address T Size Number of l status locations 8 16 24 32 40 8 Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro bits 40 Hand Held Programmer Range Type of input and range 4 20 0 20 or 4 20 4 20 n a Enhanced Alarm Low Low limit alarm value 8000 to 32759 User counts Alarm High High limit alarm value 7999 to 32760 32000 counts For more information on configuration see m Configuration Using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software beginning on page 3 42 Configuration Using the Hand Held Programmer beginning on page 3 46 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Input Modules Configuring IC693ALG223 Using Logicmaster Software This section describes how you can configure the 16 Channel High Density Analog Current Input module using the configurator function in Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software Configuration can also be done using CIMPLICITY Control Programming Software For details refer to the CIMPLICITY Control online help To configure a 16 Channel Analog Input Module on the I O Configuration Rack screen 1 Move the cursor to the slot where the module will be located and press the m30 io softkey F1 In the following example screen the module will be placed in slot 5 of the main rack RACK it in eat out
252. de and logic side 500 volts between groups Input Current 4 5 mA typical Input Characteristics On state Voltage 90 to 150 volts DC Off state Voltage 0 to 30 volts DC On state Current 3 1 mA Off state Current 1 1 mA maximum On response Time 7 ms typical Off response Time 7 ms typical Internal Power Consumption 40 mA from the 5 volt bus on the backplane 36 mA typical from user input supply all inputs ON Number of inputs on is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in figure 6 11 Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 9 IC693MDL632 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 125 volt DC positive negative logic input module The negative logic connections are shown in dashed lines a44959 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING 00000000H Figure 6 7 Field Wiring 125 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input Module IC693MDL632 a44960 I 145V SUPPLY 150V SUPPLY a ay ee a ee a a S Fk 2 INPUTS ON es ey ee ee ey ee ee a a e 2 INPUTS ON 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 8 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL632 6 10 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Input
253. dule Information High Density 32 Point Discrete Module Features There are two types of high density modules One type has a single 50 pin connector on its faceplate the other type has a pair of 24 pin connectors on its faceplate see next two figures The dual 24 pin type has LED status indicators The 50 pin type does not The LED status indicators are arranged in four groups of eight across labeled A B C and D They are located at the top of the module see next figure 32 point modules are only available in 5 12 and 24 VDC ratings None of the 32 point modules are fused These modules are useful in applications where a high count of DC I O points is required The maximum number of I O points for a Series 90 30 system can be obtained by using a CPU that supports a total of eight 10 slot racks and by populating the racks with 32 point modules The theoretical maximum number of I O points possible is calculated by adding the 9 available slots in the CPU rack the CPU must occupy one slot to the 70 slots in the seven 10 slot expansion or remote racks to get a total of 79 slots Multiply 79 times 32 for a maximum of 2 528 I O points only CPUs 350 364 support this many I O points Of course this assumes that every slot is populated with a 32 point I O module Most practical applications require that you use some slots for option modules so the number of slots available for I O modules will be reduced accordingly A
254. dule OK 0 below limit 1 user supply OK 2 through I 7 Reserved for future modules available for I SIZE values 16 24 32 and 40 Second eight lI locations I 8 I 9 I1 10 I 11 1 12 I 13 1 14 I 15 Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No I Size Third eight I locations 1 16 I 17 I 18 I 19 1 20 I1 21 22 23 Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Fourth eight I locations 24 25 I1 26 1 27 28 29 1 30 1 31 Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No Channel No 1 ALARM LO 1 ALARM HI 2 ALARM LO 2 ALARM HI 3 ALARM LO 3 ALARM HI 4 ALARM LO 4 ALARM HI 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit available for I SIZE values 24 32 and 40 5 ALARM LO 5 ALARM HI 6 ALARM LO 6 ALARM HI 7 ALARM LO 7 ALARM HI 8 ALARM LO 8 ALARM HI 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 0 below limit 1
255. e j oe ere o e er o j or eree CH15 Current Input Channel 15 CH16 Current Input Channel 16 19 COM Common connection to input current sense resistors user supplied 24V input return or 24VIN return Frame ground connections for cable shields GFK O89SF Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 39 IC693ACC223 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Diagrams The following figure provides information for connecting field wiring to the user terminal board on the 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module TERMINALS HOEY KkK FN 24VOUT 3 90000006 ONONOFONOROHORO USER CURRENT LOOP DRIVER OPTIONAL SHIELD CONNECTION PIN 2 CONNECTED TO PIN 1 INTERNALLY Figure 10 16 Field Wiring for 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module IC693ALG223 Note The current source may also be tied to the COM terminal if the source is floating to limit common mode voltages See the next figure Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details 10 40 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules a47021 TERMINALS A deg USER CURRENT SOURCE K I USER COMMON 090000000 Q OPTIONAL SHIELD CONNECTION Figure 10 17 Field Wiring Alternate User Connections IC693ALG223 Note Please refer to Chapter 2 for wiring and shield ground connection details GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 4 IC693ACC223 A
256. e 5 Modules comply with applicable CSA Standards as evaluated by UL The C UL mark is accepted throughout Canada Genius is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Series 90 VersaMax and Field Control are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Appendix I O Cable Data Sheets C This appendix provides data sheets describing each of the Series 90 30 cable types that can be used in an I O system The information in these data sheets applies to I O systems controlled by either a Series 90 30 PLC or by a PC with an installed Personal Computer Interface card This appendix contains the following data sheets M I 0693CBL300 301 302 3 12 3 13 314 I O Bus Expansion cables I C693CBL306 307 Extension cables 50 pin for high density I O modules mE I 0C693CBL308 amp 309 I O Interface cable 50 pin for high density I O modules m I C693CBL310 OBSOLETE I O Interface cable 24 pin for high density I O modules E I C693CBL315 OBSOLETE I O Interface cable 24 pin for high density I O modules m I 0693CBL321 322 323 OBSOLETE I O cables 24 pin for high density I O modules mE I 0693CBL327 328 I O Interface cables 24 pin for high density I O modules BM I 0693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 I O Interface cables 24 pin for high density I O modules GFK O89SF C 1 1C693CBL300 301 302 312 313 314 I O Bu
257. e and that same color wire with a black tracer For example Pair 1 has a solid brown wire paired with a brown wire with a black tracer C 29 C 30 Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables Because custom built cables use a straight connector they require more space in front of the PLC than is required for a factory built cable which has a right angle connector The following figure shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector PLC Side View 1 5 2 5 Typical Figure B 19 Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables Possible Uses for These Cables Factory or Custom Built Connecting from the 24 pin connectors on a 32 point module to either a user supplied terminal strip block or directly to I O field devices switches lights etc Connecting from the 24 pin connector on a 16 point module that has a TBQC I O faceplate adapter to either a user supplied terminal strip block or directly to I O field devices switches lights etc Use the right side cable C693CBL328 for this purpose See Appendix J for information about TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect options Connecting from the 24 pin connectors on a 32 point module through a conduit to a Terminal Block Quick Connect terminal block This can be accomplished by attaching one of the opt
258. e eens 10 13 IC693ALG222 Analog Input Module Field Wiring Diagrams 10 14 IC693ALG222 Analog Voltage Input Block Diagram 10 16 IC693ALG222 Analog Input Module Configuration 10 17 IC693ALG222 Configuration Using Logicmaster Software 10 18 Configuring IC693ALG222 Using Hand Held Programmer 10 22 Mod le Present t 0425454 s4eedknet eae ede as hiri seca bane aieeneneetlecde 10 22 Selechine AN Reference o 454205 uk ob uecee ce bns ese seeaedee Rahana oh 10 23 Removing Module From Configuration 0 0 ccc cece eee eee 10 24 Selecting Module Mod 24 i 6452ustode med voe saws E NEOS eee sures oou 10 24 Saved COMICUIAONS s sessar kissa irn dee cenee ehecebenceeaenes 10 26 Analog Current Input 16 Channel TEO AE reep ERE E ES E E sees ae 10 27 Ciu A RANCCS 254222 EEEE E E E E 10 27 Power Requirements and LEDS 2 2400c hrceocnesaepacdes tapre ti iiaii 10 27 Locrton m SyS 6 ons os aaa EE eee cue se EEEE E E OEE bax 10 27 Eeee Sed E EEEE EE E TEE EE E 10 28 CPU Interface to the IC693ALG223 Analog Current Input Module 10 29 Placement of A D Bits within the Data Tables 0 0005 10 29 IC693ALG223 Configuration 2 24 o2 04 s004060000000444 sods ee eeeresenv aca 10 30 Configuring IC693ALG223 Using Logicmaster Software 10 31 Configuring IC693ALG223 Using Hand Held Programmer 10 35 Module Preso 40546466526
259. e frame ground In the remote baseplates IC693CHS393F and later and IC693CHS399E and later the pin 1 shield signal is DC coupled to the remote frame ground and not attached to pin 7 OV This allows the best noise immunity by providing a good continuous cable shield and still allows the pin 7 OV signal reference to originate in the CPU baseplate without the need for removing pin 1 in any factory or custom built cable The D subminiature connector shell is still DC coupled to the remote frame ground Making a 100 Shielded Cable Use the following steps to build a 100 shielded cable 1 Strip approximately 5 8 inch of insulation from your custom cable to expose the shield 2 Remove the male Pin 1 from any connector plugging directly into an older version remote baseplate IC693CHS393E IC693CHS399D or earlier 3 Put split ring ferrule over cable insulation Figure 10 17 4 Fold the shield back over top of the cable insulation and ferrule 5 Place the collar of the metal hood over top of the folded shield and securely clamp the hood 6 Test your cable for continuity between both connector shells Connect an ohmmeter between the shells and flex the cable at both ends If the metalized connector hood is not making proper contact with the cable shield at either end the connection will show intermittent continuity on the ohmmeter 7 Plug the metal hooded cable onto a remote baseplate expansion port connector or into a GE Fanuc
260. e ground resulting in superior rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents An LED on the module s faceplate is ON when the module s power supply is operating The module provides electrical isolation of externally generated noise between field wiring and the backplane through use of optical isolation This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system If user provided supplies are not used to power the module a maximum of three Analog Current Output modules can be installed in a baseplate Table 11 3 Specifications for Analog Current Output Module IC693ALG391 Output Current Range Output Voltage Range Calibration Supply Voltage nominal External Supply Voltage Range 2 External Supply Voltage Ripple Update Rate Resolution 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1to5V 0 to5 V Absolute Accuracy 3 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 1to5V O0to5V Maximum Compliance Voltage User Load current mode 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V and 0 to 5 V Factory calibrated to 44A per count 24 VDC from isolated 24 VDC on backplane or user supplied voltage source and 5 VDC from backplane 20 to 30 VDC 10 5 msec approximate both channels Determined by I O scan time and is application dependent 4uA 1 LSB 4uA 5uA 1 LSB 5uA 1 mV 1 LSB 1 mV 1 25 mV 1 LSB 1 25 mV 8uA at 25 C 77 F 10UA at 25 C 77 F 50 mV at 25 C 77 F 50 mV at 25 C 77 F
261. e impedance In Europe this is referred to as an IT system see IEC950 In a Floating Neutral System voltages measured from input terminals to protective earth ground may exceed the 264 Volts AC maximum input voltage specified in the power supply specifications in this manual Example of Floating Neutral System L1 N m PE This system must be installed using the special installation instructions on the following page Systems in which one leg of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems Examples of Non Floating Neutral System ZEE These non floating neutral systems do not require these special installation instructions 2 40 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems 1 The input power terminals should be wired according to the instructions in the AC Power Source Connections section of this chapter 2 The factory installed jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the Power Supply module must be removed if using one of the Power Supplies that have this feature See the Overvoltage Protection Devices section of the Power Supplies chapter for details 3 Voltage surge protection devices such as MOVs MUST be installed between the following termina
262. e in Step 1 and one for the input circuits Note that the power dissipated by the input circuits comes from a separate power source so are not included in the figure used to calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2 We will assume that all input circuit power delivered to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat The procedure is note that AC input modules have the additonal power factor constant in their formula Find the value for the Input Current in the Specifications table for your Input or Combination I O module in Chapters 6 or 8 For DC input modules multiply the input voltage times the current value times the estimated percent of on time to arrive at average power dissipation for that DC input For AC input modules multiply the input voltage times the current value times the estimated percent of on time times 0 10 power factor constant to arrive at average power dissipation for that AC input Repeat for all inputs on the module To save time you could determine if several inputs were similar in current draw and on time so that you would only have to make their calculation once Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Input modules in the rack Discrete AC Input Module Example Note the use of the power factor constant in the calculation for this AC input module The power factor constant is only used for AC input module calculations The Specifications table for the IC693MDL240 16
263. e maximum noise rejection However this section discusses four shield grounding examples for analog input modules that have proven effective for most cases 2 26 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines Analog Input Shield Grounding Example One For an unbalanced source the ground shield should be connected to the source common or ground at the source end If all of the source inputs to this module come from the same location and are referenced to the same common all shield grounds should be connected to the same physical ground point If using a terminal strip between the analog input module and the field devices analog sources use the method in the following figure for continuing each cable shield using a terminal on the terminal strip Note that each cable is only grounded at one end the end closer to the field devices analog sources Shield connections are shown in bold in the next figure Terminal Strip ae i CNTY EES 7 l L Connection to Frame Ground o2 Analog Input i 2O Ww Module Machine or Equipment REJ PLC Enclosure Figure 2 14 Analog Input Shield Grounding when Terminal Strip is Used GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 277 2 28 Analog Input Shield Grounding Example Two Common Connection In some applications improved noise rejection can be obtained by connecting the source comm
264. e module For normal operation the OK LED should be on 9 2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Analog Module Information 9 Lens Cap a43082B OK Module OK LED OUTPUT aoe Module Type CURRENT i T 4 lt Hinged Cover Removeable Insert Removeable Terminal Board Connection Diagram OS Ge l 1 I x OPT CONN SEE USER S MANUAL CH2 0 20mA 44A729182 021R01 FOR USE WITH IC693ALG391 Module Catalog No 2 Aa aie Zig alte a aig OG DG oio Figure 9 1 Example of Series 90 30 Analog Current Output Module Load Requirements for Analog I O Modules The following table Table 3 2 shows the DC load required by each Series 90 30 analog I O module All ratings are in milliamps Input and Output module current ratings are with all inputs or outputs on Note that the figures listed are maximum requirements not typical Load requirements for other Series 90 30 PLC components installed in a baseplate must be included in the total load calculations Load requirements for all Series 90 30 PLC components can be found in GFK 0356 the Series 90 30 Installation Manual Three voltages are listed in the table m 5 VDC provides primary power to operate most internal circuits m 24 VDC Relay Power provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay output modules m 24 VDC Isolated provides power to operate a number of input circuits input
265. e sent to the module Depending on which range is selected will determine if the module is in Current or Voltage mode Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules Ja 11 24 The following table shows values sent from the CPU to the module Module Mode Allowed Values 10 to 10 V 32768 to 32767 Allowed values refers to the values that are valid If a user sends a value gt 32000 the module will truncate that value to 32000 before sending it to the D A Converter Note Only enabled active channels are displayed on the screen 6 Press Shift F1 Rack or the Escape key to return to the rack display Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Analog Output Modules Configuring IC693ALG392 with Hand Held Programmer GFK 08S98F You can also configure the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module using the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer In addition to the information in this section refer to GFK 0402 the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual for more information on configuration of Intelligent I O modules Although you can change the number of actively scanned channels with the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro configurator function the Hand Held Programmer does not support editing the number of actively scanned channels If the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module is initialized by a Hand Held Programmer the number of actively scanned channels is 8 If a module had been pre
266. e serial port that uses 5 VDC power from the Series 90 30 power supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption see the heading Power Supply Loading Calculations in Chapter 12 CPU Serial Port Information The serial port connector on the power supply accesses the CPU serial port which is a feature of all Series 90 30 CPUs See Chapter 5 CPUs for infomation on this serial port GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 23 4 24 Backup Battery for RAM Memory All Supplies The long life Lithium battery IC693ACC301 used to maintain the contents of the CMOS RAM memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the bottom of the power supply faceplate This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached to the inside of this cover The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board This battery can be replaced with power applied to the PLC a43833A BATTERY CONNECTOR LITHIUM BACK UP BATTERY Figure 4 16 Backup Battery for RAM Memory If a Low Battery Warning BATT LED turns ON occurs replace the battery located in the power supply before removing power from the rack Otherwise there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the application program will be cleared from memory Additional Battery Information For additional information on t
267. e will output a data word corresponding to the low end of the current range OOOOH in AI If an input that is out of range is entered that is it is greater than 20 mA the A D converter will output up to full scale corresponding to 7FF8H in AI Input scaling is shown in the next figure GFK O89SF Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 5 10 6 32000 32000 AI decimal AI decimal CURRENT mA CURRENT ma 20 4 TO 20mA RANGE 0 TO 20mA RANGE Figure 10 6 Scaling for Analog Current Input Input protection for the module is sufficient to guarantee operation with reduced performance with up to 200V common mode The module provides electrical isolation of externally generated noise between field wiring and the backplane through the use of optical isolation To minimize the capacitive loading and noise all field connections to the module should be wired using a good grade of twisted shielded instrumentation cable The shields can be connected to either COM or GND The COM connection provides access to the common of the analog circuitry in the module The GND connection provides access to the baseplate frame ground An LED at the top of the faceplate is ON when the module s power supply is operating The main power source for the module is the isolated 24 VDC power supplied by the PLC power supply This voltage is routed through an inverter regulator to provide the operating voltage for the module This module also co
268. ecifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Output Modules Table 7 18 Load Current limitations for IC693MDL931 Operating Maximum Current for Load Type Typical Contact Life Voltage Lamp or Solenoid number of operations swe Same fn eve Sams oo o oo 125 VDC 0 38 amps 0 12 amps 100 000 150 VDC 0 30 amps 0 10 amps 100 000 For inductive loads Relay contact life when switching inductive loads will approach resistive load contact life if suppression circuits are used The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads The 1A 200V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4935 The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components available from most electronics distributors a45152A a45151A AC LOADS DC LOADS IC693MDL931 022 1002 IC693MDL931 Outout 1A 200V Output Module Module 6eoov 1 2W YY Y Load Coil AC SOURCE DC SUPPLY Figure 7 33 Load Suppression Examples for C693MDL931 Output Module GFK OS9SF Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 35 7 36 Relay Output N O 2 Amp 16 Point IC693MDL940 The 2 Amp Relay Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 16 normally open relay circuits for controlling output loads provided by the user The output switching capacity of each output is 2 amps The output points are arranged in four groups of four points e
269. ectors are IC693MDL654 IC693MDL655 IC693MDL752 and IC693MDL753 Connections to module input circuits are made from the user s input devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B the connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D If a different length cable is required for connections to these modules you can build your own cable information on building your own cable is found in the data sheet for cable IC693CBL315 B1 A1229 B12 Connector Fujitsu FCN 365S024 AU Length 10 3 meters Figure B 10 IC693CBL310 Cable C 16 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK O89SF Table B 3 Wire List for 24 Pin Connectors I O Cable Data Sheets Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code Al 1 BLACK A2 1 WHITE A3 2 BROWN A4 2 WHITE A5 3 RED A6 3 WHITE A7 4 ORANGE A8 4 WHITE A9 5 YELLOW A10 5 WHITE All 6 GREEN A12 6 WHITE Pin Number Pair Wire Color Code B1 7 BLUE B2 1 WHITE B3 8 VIOLET B4 8 WHITE B5 9 GRAY B6 9 WHITE B7 10 BROWN B8 10 BLACK B9 11 RED B10 11 BLACK B11 12 ORANGE B12 12 BLACK a45144 CONNECTOR NOTE Each pair of wires should be tie
270. ed 24V supply is within specifications thereby enabling the analog side of the module to work properly Location in System This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 27 References Used 10 28 The number of 16 Channel Analog Current Input modules which may be installed in a system depends on the amount of AI and I references available Each module uses 1 to 16 AI references depending on the number of channels enabled and from 8 to 40 I depending on alarm status configuration references The available AI references are 64 in a Model 311 Model 313 and Model 323 system 128 in a Model 331 system 1024 in a Model 340 and 341 system and 2048 in a Model 351 and Model 352 system The maximum number of 16 Channel Analog Current Input modules which may be installed in a system are m 4 in a Model 311 Model 313 and Model 323 system m 8 ina Model 331 system m 12 in a Model 340 and Model 341 system m 51 ina Model 351 and Model 352 system When planning the module configuration for your application you must also consider the load capacity of the installed power supply and the total load requirements of all modules that are installed in the baseplate Refer to the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual GFK 0356 for details on power supplies and module load requirements Table 10 7 Specificat
271. ed to create custom length I O Bus Expansion cables Two Types of Custom Built Cables The two types are Point to Point these have a single male connector on one end and a single female connector on the other end These are usually used with the IC693CBL300 which supplies the Wye connection This combination saves time since a point to point cable can be built much faster than a Wye cable Wye these have a single male connector on one end and two connectors one male and one female on the other end Components Needed to Build Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables Note the special two headed Wye connector used on the standard Wye cables is not available as a separate component Cable Belden 8107 only no substitutes Computer cable overall braid over foil shield twisted pair 30 volt 80 C 176 F 24 AWG 22 mm tinned copper 7 x 32 stranding Velocity of propagation 70 F Nominal impedance 100Q 25 Pin Male Connector Crimp Plug Amp 207464 1 Pin Amp 66506 9 Solder Plug Amp 747912 2 25 Pin Female Connector Crimp Receptacle Amp 207463 2 Pin Amp 66504 9 Solder Receptacle Amp 747913 2 Connector Shell Kit Amp 745833 5 Metal plated plastic plastic with nickel over copper Crimp ring Amp 745508 1 split ring ferrule Critical Information Vendor part numbers listed for user assembled cables are provided for reference only and do not suggest or imply that they are preferre
272. ee 10 42 Figure 11 1 D A Bits vs Voltage Output cccceeeees 11 1 Figure 11 2 Scaling for Voltage Output cc cee eenees 11 2 Figure 11 3 Analog Voltage Output Module Block Diagram IC693ALG390 11 3 Figure 11 4 Field Wiring for Analog Voltage Output Module IC693ALG390 11 4 Figure 11 5 D A Bits vs Current Fig ure 11 6 D A Bits vs Current Output 4 to 20 mA Output 0 CO ZW SoG eteo dee innra awe sande eaogutsa nodes 11 5 Figure 11 7 Scaling for Current Fig ure 11 8 Scaling for Current Output 4 to 20 mA Output 0 COZ TN gia a os hs a es 11 6 GFK O898F Table of Contents xxiii Contents Figure 11 9 Load Current Derating 0 ccc cece eee ewes 11 8 Figure 11 10 Analog Current Output Module Block Diagram IC693ALG391 Figure 11 11 Field Wiring Analog Current Output Module Current Mode KODALI oa wee 24 vein ee 64 chee hee ees 11 9 Figure 11 12 Field Wiring Analog Current Output Module Voltage Mode ESR ITE CS I 6 paatovs T wes Senneven Cesaaweseeane st 11 10 Figure 11 13 Scaling for Current Output ccc eeees 11 12 Figure 11 14 Scaling for Voltage Output ccc ce eeees 11 12 Figure 11 15 Basic Block Diagram for IC693ALG392 11 13 Figure 11 16 Field Wiring for 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Mod We IC6O9JALG392 oii cbisetientavesrtenteseaheaugeaueies 11 15 Figure 11 17 Module Derating Curves for IC693ALG392
273. eegetera eees 6 15 IC693MDL646 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 16 Input Simulator 8 16 Point ACC O Saar ee eee ee E oe 6 17 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input PCG MDL cones eee eee peace 45 oe aw ey E a a naa es 6 19 IC693MDL653 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 20 5 12 VDC TTL Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input IC6O93MDLOJ4 ake oe pe eee en eee pay Hac ea eee ween een ross 6 21 IC693MDL654 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 23 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input TCO OIMIDIEO Deeg e ote thee owe sees sone aee E ean ese eee ees eees 6 26 IC693MDL655 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 28 Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 008 7 1 IC693DVM300 S5VDC Input 24VDC Output Digital Valve Driver Module 7 1 120 Volt AC Output 0 5 Amp 12 Point MOONDE SI irere ape eete eases bh ieee Bone doeeue ee eoeaios 7 4 IC693MDL310 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 5 120 240 Volt AC Output 2 Amp 8 Point PCG SIL I a eee aha bb ae eee eee pee Gee eed bees dees teense 7 6 IC693MDL330 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 7 120 Volt AC Output 0 5 Amp 16 Point EOI MIDI SA cerere panei Seka eee hersienseertieteeorseanstes 7 8 IC693MDL340 Output Module Field Wiring Information 7 9 120 240 Volt AC Isolated Output 2 Amp 5 Point IC OO MDISOU
274. el Analog Voltage Input Module on the I O Configuration Rack screen 1 Move the cursor to the slot where the module will be located and press the m30 io softkey F1 In the following example screen the module will be placed in slot 5 of the main rack Ack it in feat out Bed nix fh in ee out fae nix Bother eo o o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog 1 M I D LM9O LESSON Prat LESSONS ONFIG VALID REPLACE 2 Press the a in softkey F4 to display a list of available analog input modules and their catalog numbers am in Peat out Bev nix Be in fe out fie nix Bother fe o o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog CATALOG DESCRIPTION TYPE 1 IC693ALG2Z20 INPUT ANALOG 4PT VOLTAGE IALGV4 2 IC693ALG2Z21 INPUT ANALOG 4PT CURRENT IALGI4 3 IC693ALG222 INPUT ANALOG 16PT VOLTAGE IALGUF 4 IC693ALG223 INPUT ANALOG 16PT CURRENT IALGIF 3 ALGIN4 GENERIC INPUT ANALOG 4 CH lt lt CURSOR TO THE DESIRED CATALOG NUMBER AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY gt gt lt lt PRESS PGDN KEY FOR NEXT PAGE PGUP KEY FOR PREVIOUS PAGE gt gt I D LMSONLESSON cots ONFIG VALID REPLACE 10 18 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules 3 To select the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module position the cursor on the catalog number for the module C693ALG222 and press the Enter key eck
275. em handles the integration differently for the various analog modules The CPU does not manipulate the data from the input modules before placing it within the word in the AI data table The bits in the AI data table which were not used in the conversion by the input module are either forced to 0 zero by the analog input module Placement of the 12 data bits from the A D converter for an analog current input data word for the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module in unipolar range is shown below MSB LSB x pn io w os pv po os os os o oif po x J x x X not converted bits Analog values are scaled over the range of the converter Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit resolution to a multiple of full scale that is 2 5 mV bit for unipolar 5 mV bit for bipolar This calibration leaves a normal 12 bit converter with 4000 counts normally 2 4096 counts The data is then scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range For example the data to the A D converter for the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input is scaled as shown below GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 1 10 12 a45717 4000 A D BITS decimal 0 10 VOLTAGE 0 to 10V RANGE Figure 10 10 A D Bits vs Voltage Input for IC693ALG222 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Analog Input Modules IC693ALG222 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections Connections to this module from user
276. emoveable Terminal Board Terminal Board Post Holding Screw Terminal Board Post Module Catalog Number Figure 2 7 Terminal Board with Holding Screws Removing To Remove these terminal boards first loosen the two holding screws on the front of the terminal board then follow the standard removal instructions in the section Removing an I O Module s Terminal Board The holding screws are held captive in the terminal board and do not have to be completely removed Installing To install these terminal boards follow the standard installation instructions in the section Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board then tighten the two holding screws to 8 to 10 inch pounds 1 Newton meter of torque GFK O898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 9 Baseplate Installation and Mounting Be sure to follow baseplate grounding instructions in this chapter Failure to properly ground the PLC can result in improper operation damage to equipment and injury to personnel Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel Use four good quality corrosion resistant 8 32 x 1 2 4 x 12 mm machine screws lock washers and flat washers Install the screws in four tapped holes Chapter 3 Baseplates has the applicable dimensions and mounting clearances Alternately 10 slot baseplates can be mounted in standard 19 inch racks by using the appropriate adapter This is discussed in the next section A vertical mounting
277. er via I O expansion cabling Remote racks can be located up to 700 feet 213 meters and Expansion racks up to 50 feet 15 meters from the personal computer Several standard prewired I O expansion cables are available from GE Fanuc Alternately custom length cables can be built Please refer to Appendix C of this manual for information on standard and custom I O expansion cables These cards also provide connections to an internal watchdog supervised RUN output relay contact This contact is closed under normal operating conditions but opens if the computer or software application fails which makes it useful for interfacing with external safety circuits These cards support all Series 90 30 discrete and analog I O modules except 16 channel analog modules A variety of smart modules from Horner Electric Inc are also supported NOTE The Programmable Coprocessor Modules Communications Control module Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module and the State Logic Processor module are currently NOT supported by the Personal Computer Interface PCIF cards GFK 08S98F E E 2 47016 DOS BASED MICROSOFT C TURBO C WINDOWS BASED SOFTWARE PROGRAMS SOFTWARE DOS TSR ROUTINE oR C LIBRARY WINDOWS DLL MS WINDOWS 1O EXPANSION CABLE PCIF or PCIF2 I O EXPANSION CABLE I O EXPANSION CABLE I O EXPANSION CABLE SERIES 90 30 I O SERIES 90 30 I O SERIES 90 30 I O SERIES 90 30 I O a Ss 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT
278. er bracket using four 8 32 4 mm screws nuts lockwashers and flat washers The Adapter Bracket bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of the 19 rack using applicable hardware lockwashers recommended ae RIGHT SIDE OF ads7eon _ BASEPLATE Insert two screws 1 at top 1 at bottom from back of base unit through base unit and bracket Tighten screws to secure bracket to base unit Note Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes It is not necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket Figure 3 18 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation Dimensions for rack mounting a 10 slot baseplate with the C693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket are shown in the following figure Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Baseplates a45047 18 89 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES Figure 3 19 Dimensions for 19 Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket 0 160 4 06 dia x 4 0 280 7 1 4 000 101 6 i 0 842 21 4 A 1 368 34 7 0 346 8 8 A Inside 16 850 428 a 18 122 460 3 0 439 11 2 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES Figure 3 20 IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 23 3 24 Baseplate Comparison Table Table 3 2 Series 90 30 Baseplate Comparison Series 90 30 Baseplates Se
279. er to Chapter 1 in this manual for details on power supply baseplate and module load requirements The following table lists the specifications for this module Note that test conditions unless otherwise noted are Vysger 24 VDC at an ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F GFK O898F Chapter II Analog Output Modules 047 11 18 Table 11 5 Specifications for IC693ALG392 Number of Output Channels Output Current Range Output Voltage Range Calibration User Supply Voltage nominal External Supply Voltage Range Power Supply Rejection Ratio PSRR Current Voltage External Power Supply Voltage Ripple Internal Supply Voltage Update Rate Resolution 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 0to10V 10 to 10 V Absolute Accuracy 3 Current Mode Voltage Mode Maximum Compliance Voltage User Load current mode Output Load Capacitance current mode Output Load Inductance current mode Output Loading voltage mode Output load Capacitance Isolation Internal Power Consumption 1 to 8 selectable single ended 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V and 10 to 10 V Factory calibrated to 625uA for 0 20 mA 0 5uA for 4 20 mA and 3125 mV for voltage per count 24 VDC from user supplied voltage source 20 to 30 VDC 5 uA V typical 10 uA V maximum 25 mV V typical 50 mV V maximum 10 maximum 5 VDC from PLC backplane 8 msec approximate all eight channels Determined by I O scan time and is appli
280. erage Power Dissipation Input Voltage x Input Current in Amps x Percent expressed as a decimal of on time x 0 10 power factor constant 120 x 012 x 0 20 x 0 10 0 0288 Watts per input Then multiply this result by the number of inputs 6 0 0288 Watts x 6 inputs 0 1728 Watts total for the 6 inputs Finally adding up the individual calculations we get 1 152 0 0 0 1728 1 3248 Watts for the module s total input power Step 5 Final Calculation Once the individual power dissipations have been calculated add them all to obtain total PLC heat dissipation Note that the PLC baseplate analog input modules and analog output modules have been ignored in this procedure because their power dissipation values are negligible when compared with the total Also since each Series 90 30 rack has its own power supply each rack should be calculated on an individual basis The following table summarizes the final calculation Series 90 30 Rack Heat Dissipation Calculation Summary Step Description Value Watts 1 Calculate total of dissipation values for all modules in the rack Divide value obtained in Step 1 by 2 to obtain Power Supply value Calculate total of all Output modules output dissipation values 4 Calculate total of all Input modules input dissipation values 5 Add the above four values to obtain the total dissipation of the rack Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing The Baseplates cha
281. ext page for an example installation Mount the Weidmuller 912263 terminal block It has a 50 pin female Honda connector and a terminal strip and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN rail Mount the terminal block close enough to the PLC so the cable see next step will reach Connect either an IC693CBL306 3 feet 1 meter long or an IC693CBL307 6 feet 2 meters long cable between the module s faceplate connector and the connector on the Weidmuller terminal block See Appendix C for cable data m Wire I O devices to the terminal block See Chapters 5 Discrete Input Modules or Chapter 6 Discrete Output Modules for pin out information GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 19 IC693CBL306 or 307 50 Pin 32 Point I O Module Sense eae a44838A Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block Series 90 30 PLC 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 3 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4567 8 9 4112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mounts on Hop DIN Rail Figure 2 13 50 PIN I O Module with Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block Using Generic Terminal Block or Strip Mount terminal block strip to the enclosure panel Connect an C693CBL308 cable 3 feet 1 meter an C693CBL309 cable 6 feet 2 meters or a custom made cable to the module s faceplate connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable to the terminal block strip See Appendix C for cable data m Wire I O devices to the terminal block strip D
282. f four I O expansion cables 3 The 50 foot 15 meter I O bus expansion cable IC693CBL302 which has a male connector on each end has the I O bus terminating resistors built into the end connector on the cable If this cable is used you would not install a separate terminator block I O Bus Expansion cables should NOT be connected or disconnected with power applied to the I O expansion baseplate s Unexpected PLC operation may result Cable Application Suggestions In general it is advantageous to use standard factory built cables where possible to save time and avoid wiring errors Using Standard Cables For connecting between baseplates either between a CPU and expansion baseplate between two expansion baseplates or between two remote baseplates in the same cabinet when a standard length 0 5 1 2 8 or 15 meters will fit the need Asa Wye jumper for custom built point to point cables I C693CBL300 is often used for this This combination saves time since a point to point cable can be built much faster than a Wye cable An example of this is shown in Figure 10 23 Using Custom Built cables When you need a cable length not available in a standard size When a cable must be routed through a conduit that is not large enough for a standard cable s connector to fit through GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 3 Building Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables This section provides details need
283. ff Response Time 1 2 cycle maximum Power Consumption 110 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on following page Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL390 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 120 240 volt isolated AC output module a43096 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING NC NC H N NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC Figure 7 8 IC693MDL390 Output Module Field Wiring a43835 TOTAL MODULE LOAD CURRENT 9 2 AMPS AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 9 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL390 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 11 7 12 12 24 Volt DC Positive Logic Output 2 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL730 The 12 24 volt DC Positive Logic 2 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 output points in one group with a common power input terminal This output module is designed to have positive logic characteristics in that it sources current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus The output device is connected between the negative power bus
284. found in two basic places in this manual Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines Contains such information as mounting wiring and noise suppression methods m Details specific to individual modules such as terminal pin out information are shown in the analog module data sheets which are found in Chapters 10 11 and 12 GFK_O898F Chapter 9 General Analog Module Information 9 1 i Maximum Number of Analog Modules per System The maximum number of modules installed in a system depends on several factors including available references for each CPU model current consumption for each module to be installed slots available in baseplate s selectable configuration parameters and where applicable whether Isolated 24 VDC is supplied by the PLC backplane or by a user provided supply Before installing modules in a baseplate verify that the total current consumption of all of those modules does not exceed the power rating of the Series 90 30 power supply 30 watts maximum all voltages The following tables will help you determine the maximum number of analog I O modules that can be installed in a Series 90 30 PLC system Calculations assume maximum number of references used Modules with selectable references can have more modules per system Table 9 3 User Reference and Current mA Requirements Current from Analog AI References AQ References Current from Isolated Module maximum m
285. freeze mode In this mode you will not be allowed to move beyond the present channel parameters range low alarm limit and high alarm limit until the invalid condition is corrected or removed Freeze mode is indicated on the HHP screen by an asterisk after the slot number For example if a low alarm limit of 1000 is entered for input channel 1 in the 0 10V range the following screen will be displayed Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 29 RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 LO 1000 If you press either the key or the key to change slots the following message will be displayed SAVE CHANGES lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N If you do not want to save the changes to the CPU press the CLR key The following message will be displayed DISCARD CHGS lt S lt ENT gt Y lt CLR gt N If you do not want to discard the changes you have made press the CLR key This will return you to the last parameter that was being modified with all changes intact If you do want to discard the changes you have made press the ENT key The Hand Held Programmer will then return you to the last parameter that was being modified with the data reset to its previous value If you want to save the data to the CPU from the SAVE CHANGES screen shown above press the ENT key If the module is in freeze mode the Hand Held Programmer will return with a CFG ERR message on the screen as follows RO 03 CFG ERR lt S
286. gic 16 points IC693MDL646 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic FAST 16 points 1C693ACC330 IC693MDL740 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic 0 5A 16 points IC693MDL742 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic ESCP 1A 16 points 1C693ACC331 IC693MDL741 Output 12 24 VDC Neg Logic 0 5A 16 points 1C693ACC332 IC693MDL940 Output Relay N O 16 points 1C693ACC333 IC693MDL340 Output 120 VAC 0 5A 16 points 1 This Terminal Block may be used with most I O modules that have up to 16 I O points can not be used with 32 point modules Jumpers may have to be added for details of required wiring connections refer to module specifications in this manual Cable Current Rating Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps If using these cables with a 16 point Output module with a higher output current rating you must use the lower value of 1 2 Amps for the maximum load current rating If you have field devices that require more than 1 2 Amps do not use a TBQC assembly use the standard Terminal Board that comes with the module instead D 2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D Cable Selection and Cross Reference for 16 Point Modules Three cables are available for connecting between the module s faceplate connector and the terminal block They can be used with any module listed in Table D 1 The only difference in these cables is
287. group has its own common The outputs are negative logic or sinking type outputs 1 e the ON state for a point results in an active low output The module has two modes of operation In the TTL mode the outputs can switch user loads across 5 VDC 5 and are capable of sinking a maximum current of 25 mA per point In the 12 24V mode the outputs can switch user loads over the range of 12 through 24 VDC 20 15 and are capable of sinking a maximum current of 0 5A per point Two pins are provided on the user I O connectors for each group common Each pin has a current handling capability of 3 amperes It is recommended that connections are made to both pins when connecting the common however it is a requirement for high current applications between 3 and 4 amperes Each group can be used in the mode of operation needed to satisfy the load requirements for a particular application For example group A can drive TTL loads and group B can drive 12 VDC loads while group C and D can be reserved for driving 24 VDC loads Itis important to note however that the effects of electrical noise must be considered when mixing TTL and inductive type loads An internal pull up resistor is provided for each point The function of each resistor is to passively pull up the output to the user positive side power input typically 5V for TTL mode when the output point FET is OFF thereby providing a high logic level for TTL applications All 32 outp
288. gt U MAGNITUDE 2 BITS IODT gt IOUT1 ICH2 p RUN BACKPLANE CLK D q TN INTERFACE lt FF Q AND an ISOLATION lt RTN2 EN Dam ees VREF1 a VREF2 lt gt lOUT2 fe gt D15 SIG Bau ae 2 CHANNEL L5V POT ADJUST CURRENT gt JMPV2 2 PER CHANNEL oes DRIVER y 2 CHANNEL gt JMPV1 LON DO OFFSET 24V 250 Q or aie GND1 BID2 lt lt DUAL CLK D Ke REFERENCE eae F git GENERATOR aS gt GND2 BID4 CLR RANIA CHANNEL 1 RST A Kooma gt IGND k SELECT JUMPER RAN1B gt y 0 RANOB _ CHANNEL 2 INVERTER a REGULATOR AND RAN2A lt lt JUMPER VOLTAGE SUPERVISOR i HL8 K lt DEFAULT i i TO ZERO SELECT 5V 10V 10V DEFO JUMPER gt gt KI IN24V gt L INOV Figure 11 10 Analog Current Output Module Block Diagram IC693ALG391 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 08S98F Analog Output Modules IC693ALG391 Analog Output Module Field Wiring Diagrams The following two figures provide information for connecting field wiring to the Analog Current Output module Figure 3 40 shows the connections necessary for the outputs to be used as analog current outputs a44557 TERMINALS FIELD WIRING VOUT1 VOUT2 IOUT 1 E IOUT2 po E N RTN2 1 E GND NI xl GND JMPV1 JMPV2 DEF o o ee RANGET a ee ee pe ee ep 5 AE 24V L 4 i MOSSES E E x RANGE 2 OPTIONAL CONNECTION REFER TO TEX
289. h circuit is 4 amps Each output point is isolated from the other points and each point has a separate common power output terminal The relay outputs can control a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate the field devices connected to this module There are no fuses on this module LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row This module uses the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 the bottom row is not used An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 15 Specifications for IC693MDL930 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC 120 240 volts AC nominal see the following table for exceptions Operating Voltage 5 to 30 volts DC 5 to 250 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 8 isolated outputs Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between groups Maximum Load 4 amps
290. hannel No 12 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 31 Channel No 12 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit GFK O89SF Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 33 Table 10 9 Parameter Descriptions for Configuration continued Parameter Description I Size Fifth eight I locations available for I SIZE value 40 cont d 1 32 Channel No 13 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 33 Channel No 13 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 34 Channel No 14 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 14 35 Channel No 14 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 36 Channel No 15 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 37 Channel No 15 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 38 Channel No 16 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 39 Channel No 16 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit Range Select the type of input range and the ranges Choices are 4 20mA 0 20mA or 4 20mA In the 4 to 20mA default range input current values ranging from 4 to 20mA report O to 32 000 integer values to the CPU In the 0 to 20mA range input current values ranging from 0 to 20mA report 0 to 32 000 integer values to the CPU over an input current range of 0 to 20mA The enhanced 4 to 20mA range operates like the default 4 to 20mA range except that negative values
291. he desired range is displayed it is accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the key To view the range display for the next channel press the key If the key is pressed the following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 2 AQ 0 10 V Edit the range for this channel as you did for the first channel To view the range display for the first input channel press the key Selecting Input Channel Ranges There are three current and two voltage ranges that can be selected for each input channel The following screen is displayed for the first input channel RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AI 0 10 V You can toggle through the ranges for each input channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown below RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AI 10 10 RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AI 4 20 MA RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AI 0 20 MA RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AI 4 20 MA When the desired range for the module is displayed it is accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the key 12 28 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Selecting Low and High Alarm limits The low and high alarm limit screens for each channel are displayed immediately following the channel range screen The following screen is displayed if the key is pressed from the range screen for input chan
292. he memory backup battery see the chapter Memory Backup and Backup Battery in the Series 90 30 PLC Hardware and Installation Manual GFK 0356P or later version Note Only the battery in a power supply in a CPU rack is used for backing up CPU memory A battery in a power supply mounted in an Expansion or Remote baseplate is not utilized Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Calculating Power Supply Loading The load placed on a power supply in a Series 90 30 PLC baseplate is the sum of the internal and external loads placed on it by all of the hardware components in the baseplate backplane modules etc as well as external loads connected to the Isolated 24 VDC supply Use of the Isolated 24 Volt power supply output is optional however this output can be used to drive a limited number of input devices The maximum total power output rating of the Power Supplies is 30 watts however the individual 5VDC outputs can be rated for either 15 or 30 Watts depending on the Power Supply catalog number See Table 12 1 Power Supply Feature Comparison Table for details Load Requirements for Hardware Components The following table shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component All ratings are in milliamps except where noted Input and Output module current ratings are with all inputs or outputs on Three voltages are listed in the table m
293. he module Example 1 The Load Requirements table shows that the IC693CPU352 module draws 910 mA from the 5VDC supply No current from either of the two 12VDC supplies GFK 0898F F J To calculate power dissipation multiply 0 910 Amps times 5 Volts The answer is 4 55 Watts of heat dissipated by this module Example 2 The Load Requirements table shows that the IC693MDL241 module draws 80 mA from the 5VDC supply 125 mA from the 24VDC Isolated supply To calculate power dissipation from the 5VDC supply Multiply 0 08 Amps times 5 Volts to arrive at a value of 0 40 Watts To calculate power dissipation from the 24VDC supply Multiply 0 125 Amps times 24 Volts to arrive at a value of 3 0 Watts Adding the two together we find the total heat dissipated by this module is 3 4 Watts Step 2 Calculation for PLC Power Supplies A basic rule for Series 90 power supplies is that they are 66 efficient Another way of stating this is that the power supply dissipates 1 Watt of power in the form of heat for every 2 Watts of power it delivers to the PLC Therefore you can calculate the total power requirement for all of the modules in the rack served by a particular power supply using the method in Step 1 above then divide that figure by 2 to arrive at the power supply dissipation value You cannot simply use the rating of the power supply such as 30 Watts for this calculation because the application may not require
294. herefore since both solenoids have equal current draws and on times our single calculation can be applied to both outputs Use the formula Average Power Dissipation Voltage Drop x Current Draw in Amps x Percent expressed as a decimal of on time 1 5 x 1 0 x 0 10 0 15 Watts per solenoid Then multiply this result by 2 since we have two identical solenoids 0 15 Watts x 2 Solenoids 0 30 Watts total for the two solenoids Also in this example the other 14 output points on this 16 point module operate pilot lights on an operator s panel Each pilot light requires 05 Amps of current Seven of the pilot lights are on 100 of the time and seven are on an estimated 40 For the 7 lights that are on 100 of the time 1 5 x 05 x 1 00 0 075 Watts per light Then multiply this value by 7 0 075 Watts x 7 lights 0 525Watts total dissipation for the first 7 lights For the 7 lights that are on 40 of the time 1 5 x 05 x 0 40 03 Watts per light Then multiply this value by 7 03 Watts x 7 lights 0 21 Watts total dissipation for the other 7 lights Adding up the individual calculations we get 0 30 0 525 0 21 1 035 Watts for the module s total output calculation Appendix F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation F 3 Step 4 Input Calculations for Discrete Input or Combination Modules A Discrete Input or Combination Module requires two calculations one for the module s signal level circuits which was already don
295. ical Efficiency Curve for 24 48 VDC Power Supply 4 8 Figure 4 6 Series 90 30 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWR328 4 10 Figure 4 7 Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply 4 11 Figure 4 8 Series 90 30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply KOPAR L sorria artros raura EEFE anee owed 4 13 Figure 4 9 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 505C SES arrr rra E E EE 4 14 Figure 4 10 Series 90 30 12 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply K OSSP RSSA prase sa ere severed EEEIEE CEEE EENES 4 16 Figure 4 11 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 505C SES eaae E EE ees 4 17 Figure 4 12 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap 4 21 GFK 08S98F Table of Contents xviii Contents Figure 4 13 Internal Power Supply Connections 4 21 Figure 4 14 Timing Diagram for all Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 22 Figure 4 15 Serial Port Connector ccc cece cece eeeees 4 23 Figure 4 16 Backup Battery for RAM Memory 4 24 Figure 5 1 Example of Series 90 30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module Figure 5 2 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL654 With Dual Connec 0 ee ee ee ee a eee 5 5 Figure 5 3 Example of 32 Point I O Module IC693MDL653 With Single Con NGClON 4 6 EE E ee a tue ee de ett es 6 eee eee ees 5 6 Figure 6 1 Field Wiring 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module IC693MDL230 6 2 Figure 6 2 Field Wiring 240
296. igure below This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other branch This method is shown in the following figure Ground conductors should be as short and as large in diameter as possible Braided straps or AWG 12 3 3 mm7 or larger cables typically green insulation with a yellow tracer can be used to minimize resistance Warning Conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the path being considered a43059 SERIES 90 30 MOTOR DRIVES MACHINERY PLC CABINET AND OTHER ELECTRICAL RACK O CONTROL FRACK o EQUIPMENT PROGRAMMING DEVICE NOTE SIGNAL AND POWER EARTH on CENTRAL CONNECTIONS GROUND GROUND POINT ARE NOT SHOWN Figure 2 11 Recommended System Grounding GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 13 Series 90 30 PLC Equipment Grounding Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below These grounding procedures must be properly followed for safe proper operation of your Series 90 30 PLC system Baseplate Safety Grounding The following recommendations are offered but applicable safety codes for your area or equipment type should also be consulted The baseplate s metal back must be grounded using a separate conductor the baseplate mounting screws are not considered to be an acceptable ground connection by themselves Use a minimum AWG 12 3 3 mm wire with a ring terminal and star lock washer under the head
297. in 3 with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap Also this jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors installed in installations with a Floating Neutral input please see the following section Special Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems If you want to Hi pot test this supply overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the terminal board jumper strap Re enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap 3 Jumper Strap Connects Overvoltage Protection Devices to Frame Ground 4 T a47086 Frame Ground Screw Terminals on Terminal Board Figure 2 27 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 39 Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral IT Systems When the AC input power supplies listed below are installed in a system where the Neutral line is not connected to Protective Earth Ground these special installation instructions must be followed to prevent damage to the power supply IC693PWR321S or later version IC693PWR330A or later version Definition of Floating Neutral Systems A Floating Neutral System is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by a negligibl
298. inal Block Quick Connect Components D 1 D Cable Selection and Cross Reference for 32 Point Modules Six cables are available for connecting between the modules faceplate connectors and the terminal blocks These cables have right angle connectors on the module end to minimize the space required in front of the modules These six cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight connectors Since the modules two connectors are oriented differently see previous figure a right side and left side cable is required Use the following table to select the correct cables The table also lists cable kits that consist of a pair of same length right side and left side cables Table C 3 TBQC Cable Selection Table for 32 Point Modules Cable Catalog Cable Description Replaces Obsolete Number and Length Cable Number IC693CBL329 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL330 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL331 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL332 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL333 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL323 Cable length 0 5 Meter IC693CBL334 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL323 Cable length 0 5 Meter Cable Kits IC693CBKO002 Cable Kit Includes both the IC693CBL32
299. inal blocks Note We recommend drilling and tapping all holes before mounting any components This will avoid getting chips and filings in the components 6 Drill and tap the marked holes For baseplate mounting holes should be 8 32 or 4mm size 7 Mount the baseplates using 8 32 x 1 2 inch or 4 x 12mm size screws Always use good quality corrosion resistant mounting hardware We recommend using star lock washers and flat washers under the screw heads star lock washer should be located between screw head and flat washer to ensure a tight baseplate ground connection and to keep the screws from loosening Connect each baseplate ground wire as shown in the Baseplate Safety Ground section of this chapter 8 If you have Expansion or Remote racks determine the correct rack number for each one then set the rack numbers using the Rack Number Selection DIP switch on the baseplate Please refer to the Baseplates chapter for details on setting these DIP switches Rack numbers should be assigned by the system programmer because they correspond to system configuration settings and program memory addressing Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 43 2 44 10 l1 12 13 14 15 If you have more than one baseplate rack interconnect the baseplates with I O Bus Expansion Cables These connect between the I O Bus Expansion Connectors which are located on the right end of the baseplates These cables are co
300. ing pages Table 11 6 Configuration Parameters for C693ALG392 Parameter Description Values Default Values Units Name Active Channels Number of channels converted 1 through 8 AQ Address Starting address for AQ reference type standard range AQOOOI or next ae available address I Address Starting address for I reference type standard range 100001 or next highest avail able address Jol ISize Number Number of I status locations I status locations 8 or 16 Ca STOP MODE Output state when module toggled from HOLD or HOLD RUN to STOP mode DEFLOW Range Type of Output Range 0 10V Displayed under 10 10V Stop Mode 4 20 mA 0 20 mA For more information on configuration see O0 Configuration Using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software beginning on page 3 72 O Configuration Using the Hand Held Programmer beginning on page 3 76 11 20 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Output Modules Configuring C693ALG392 Using Logicmaster Software GFK 08S98F This section describes how to configure the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module using the configurator function in Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software Configuration can also be done using CIMPLICITY Control Programming Software For details refer to the CIMPLICITY Control online help To configure an 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module on the I O Configuration Rack screen 1 M
301. ing source voltage to determine the input current requirements m Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current Allow for start up surge current requirements m Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 15 IC693PW R332 High Capacity Power Supply 12 VDC Input 4 16 The Series 90 30 DC input High Capacity power supply IC693PWR332 is a 30 watt wide range supply designed for 12 VDC nominal input power It will accept an input voltage range from 9 6 VDC to 15 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacities for each output of the power supply are shown in the following table Table 4 12 High Capacity 12 VDC Input Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power 7 Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts a45625B O PWR STATUS Series 90 30 O RUN f INDICATORS O BATT HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT 12 VDC 50 WATT CONNECTIONS FOR E DC POWER SOURCE E t INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR aee MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC 0 8A MAX RS 485 SW esis BATTERY g LI
302. ing to Installing posts Removing 2 8 With holding screws 2 9 7 14 7 17 Terminal board I O detachable 1 3 Termination I O bus C 11 Terminator I O bus installing 2 44 Terminology analog 9 4 Terms analog definition of A 1 Third party I O modules 1 4 Timing diagram 4 22 Index Troubleshooting features of hardware 13 1 using software 13 3 U Universal terminal board 1 3 V Visual inspection of new system 2 1 Voltage input analog 16 channel 4 channel Voltage output analog 2 channel 11 1 W Warranty claims Web site GE Fanuc 13 9 Weidmuller 912263 terminal block 2 19 Wiedemuller terminal block 912263 2 22 Wire size power supply wiring 2 38 Wiring Color coding General guidelines I O modules 2 18 Power supplies Routing wires 2 17 Wiring methods Analog I O modules 2 25 Wiring practices 9 4 Work sheet for field wiring 1C693MDL654 6 24 IC693MDL655 6 29 _ IC693MDL752 7 47 IC693MDL753 7 52 WYE cable wiring diagram for current remote base plates C10 wiring diagram for earlier version base plates C9 wiring diagram remote system C 10 wiring diagram remote system for earlier version baseplates C 9 Index I
303. ing up E2 COMMREQ data and issuing the COMMREQ As with all COMMREQs it is recommended that the ladder verify the completion of the E2 COMMREQ in progress before initiating another This ensures that the module does not receive COMMREQs faster than it can process them One way to do this is to zero the contents of the COMMREQ status ROOOI in this example as the COMMREQ is enabled Since the status returned for a completed COMMREQ is never zero a non zero status word will then indicate that the COMMREQ has completed Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 21 In this example the COMMREQ command block begins at ROOO2 and is initialized on the first scan It is assumed that the 6 bytes of COMMREQ data sent to the module are moved into RO101 RO103 before the COMMREQ is enabled The module is located in rack 0 slot 2 so the SYSID input to the COMMREQ is 0002 Setting T0001 moves zero into the COMMREQ status word enables T0003 for one sweep to initiate the COMMREQ and sets TOOO2 to begin checking the status word When a non zero status word is detected TOO0O2 is reset to discontinue checking and T0004 is set to indicate that the module is ready for the next COMMREQ Reference MOOO1 is set if a COMMREQ fault occurs FST_SCN CONST 00000 CONST 00004 RO0001 RO0009 00008 CONST 00000 CONST 00000 CONST 00000 FST_SCN of R0011 CONST RO010 CONST eee 00100 1000
304. ins the reference address for AI data The address points to the Reference location in AI memory where input data to the module begins Each Address channel provides 16 bits of analog input data as an integer value from 0 to 32 760 or 8 000 to 32 760 depending on the range type selected The second Reference Address field contains the reference address for I data The Reference address points to the location in I memory where status information from the module Address begins You can select the number of I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the lI Size field Enter the number of I locations reported to the PLC Choices are 8 16 24 32 or 40 The data is brought back in the following format First eight I locations available for I SIZE values 8 16 24 32 and 40 l Module OK 0 module NOT OK 1 module OK e l I User Supply OK 0 below limit 1 user supply OK 1 2 through I 7 Reserved for future modules Second eight I locations available for I SIZE values 16 24 32 and 40 I 8 Channel No 1 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 9 Channel No 1 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 10 Channel No 2 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 11 Channel No 2 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit I 12 Channel No 3 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 13 Channel
305. int with 4 amps maximum per group and 3 amps maximum per group common pin Output Characteristics Inrush Current 5 4 amps for 10 ms On state Voltage Drop 0 3 volts DC Off state Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum On Response Time 0 5 ms maximum Off Response Time 0 5 ms maximum Internal Power Consumption 260 mA maximum from 5 volt bus on backplane 13 mA 3 mA point ON 4 7 mA LED 16 5 mA maximum per group from user supply 24 VDC and all eight outputs in group ON 9 6 mA maximum per group from user supply 12 VDC and all eight outputs in group ON Refer to data sheet GFK 0867C or later revision for product standards and general specifications TYPICAL CIRCUIT a47069 O xVIN PTx REGULATOR CIRCUIT O xCOM RUN FROM SEK AA OV 5V 7 50 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL753 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC 0 5A positive logic output module Module point numbers are shown in bold text a45043 m2 p2 roan 23 A11 Bo DCOM DVIN_ DVIN 7 les NC i O Ne B6 _ LK VO NC CONN Bee A CON CONN JERE se os CD SVIN AB BVIN BS Ba B1 at HEH roan roan Hm B12 FUJITSU CONNECTOR PINS A1 A12 B1 B12 MODULE POINT NUMBERS ARE SHOWN IN B
306. ional 24 pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the cable through the conduit See the section Building Custom Length Cables for information on the connector options See Appendix J for information about TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect options Connecting from the connector on a 16 point module that has a TBQC I O faceplate adapter through a conduit to a TBQC terminal block This can be accomplished by attaching one of the optional 24 pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the cable through the conduit Use the right side cable IC693CBL328 for this purpose See the section Building Custom Length Cables for information on the connector options See Appendix J for information about TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect options Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets 1C693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables 24 Pin I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector Note These cables replace obsolete cables IC693CBL321 322 323 The obsolete cables had straight connectors These replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC They use the same pin outs as the obsolete cables Description These cables all have a right angle 24 pin connector on each end They are identical except for connector orientation right side and left side types and cable length The difference in connector orientation is to al
307. ions for 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module Number of Channels Input Current Ranges Calibration Update Rate Resolution at 4 20 mA Resolution at 0 20 mA Resolution at 4 20 mA Enhanced Absolute Accuracy F Linearity Isolation Common Mode Voltage Cross Channel Rejection Input Impedance Input Low Pass Filter Response External Supply Voltage Range External Supply Voltage Ripple Internal Power Consumption IC693ALG223 1 to 16 selectable single ended 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced selectable per channel Factory calibrated to 4 uA per count on 4 to 20 mA range 5 uA per count on 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range 13 msec all 16 channels 4 uA 4 Abit 5 uA 5 LA bit 5 uA 5 WA bit 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F 0 5 of full scale over specified operating temperature range lt 1 LSB from 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA range lt 1 LSB from 100 uA to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced ranges 1500 volts between field side and logic side 0 volts single ended channels gt 80 db from DC to kHz 250 ohms 19 Hz 20 to 30 VDC 10 120 mA from the 5 volt bus on the backplane 65 mA from 24 VDC external user supply in addition to current loop currents Refer to data sheet GFK 0867C or later revision for product standards and general specifications Y In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 5 FS Series 9
308. ir use is optional They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals You may use them as is or jumper them to a numbered terminal Refer to the applicable chapter in this manual for module wiring diagrams Mounting These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard user supplied 35 mm DIN rail GFK 0898F Appendix D Terminal Block Quick Connect Components D 13 Appendix Personal Computer Interface Cards E IC693PIF301 400 Personal Computer Interface PCIF Cards These two Personal Computer Interface cards PCIF and PCIF2 provide an alternative method of controlling Series 90 30 I O Either card can be used in place of a Series 90 30 PLC CPU These SA compatible cards can be installed in any IBM PC AT ISA bus computer The cards are implemented using computer language software for example C or PC control software such as Total Control Products FrameworX Automation Software Table D 1 Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table Pam rar Catalog Number IC693PIF301 IC693PIF400 Amount of I O controlled 1 280 bytes 25 886 bytes Number of Series 90 30 racks Up to four Expansion or Up to seven Expansion or controlled Remote racks Remote racks IBM PC AT ISA 8 bit half IBM PC AT ISA 16 bit full size size GFK 0889 IPD GFK 1540 data sheet Both of these PCIF cards have a 25 pin I O expansion connector that connects to standard Series 90 30 Expansion and Remote baseplates see the Baseplates chapt
309. irect Method Connect an IC693CBL308 cable 3 feet 1 meter an IC693CBL309 cable 6 feet 2 meters or a custom made cable to the module s faceplate connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field devices See Appendix C for cable data See the applicable chapter for module pin out information 2 20 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines Installation of 32 Point Dual 24 Pin Connector Discrete Modules Using a TBQC Mount two TBQC terminal blocks Each has a 24 pin connector and a terminal strip and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN rail Mount terminal blocks close enough to the PLC so the cable see next step will reach m Connect a pair of TBQC cables IC693CBL329 334 between the module s faceplate connector and the connectors on the two TBQC terminal blocks Note that both a right side and left side cable is required TBQC cables come in several lengths See Appendix D for a cable list m Wire I O devices to the terminal blocks See the applicable chapter for pin out information With a Generic Terminal Block Strip Mount terminal block strip to the enclosure panel m Connect the IC693CBL327 328 cables or custom made cables to the module s faceplate connectors and wire the stripped ends of the cables to the terminal block strip Note that both a right side IC693CBL328 and left side IC693CBL327 cable is required See Appendix
310. iring information are provided for each of the available Analog I O modules The first part of this chapter describes how analog information is handled in the Series 90 30 PLC followed by a description of each of the modules Specific information for a particular analog module can be found in the description of that module Currently available Analog I O modules are listed in the following table Table 3 1 along with the chapter number where the description of each module can be found Guide to Chapter Location for Analog I O Module Specifications Number of Chapter Catalog Number Description of Module Channels Number IC693ALG220 Analog Input Voltage Chapter 9 IC693ALG221 Analog Input Current Chapter 9 IC693ALG222 Analog Input Voltage High Density 16 channel Chapter 9 IC693ALG3 IC693ALG392 Analo Analog Output Current Voltage Analog Output Curensolage Current Voltage aaa Analog Combo Module Current Voltage 4 channels In Chapter 11 2 channels Out GFK O89SF 9 1 2 Analog Module Features Analog Modules have the following basic features refer to the following figure Removeable Terminal Board You can remove the terminal board from the module in order to wire it if desired Then when you are finished wiring it you can easily reinstall it on the module However some prefer to leave it on the module when wiring If you ever need to replace a module you don t have to do any rewiring if your old terminal
311. ix C of this manual for more information Using a TBQC The Terminal Block Quick Connect method uses a pair of cables with connectors on each end These connect from the module connectors to connectors on DIN rail mounted terminal blocks The TBQC components are discussed in Appendix D GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 43 7 44 Table 7 23 Specifications for C693MDL752 Rated Voltage Output Voltage Range Outputs per Module Isolation Output Current Output Characteristics Inrush Current On state active low Voltage Drop Off state Leakage Current On Response Time Off Response Time Internal Power Consumption 5 and 12 through 24 volts DC negative logic active low 4 75 to 5 25 volts DC TTL mode 10 2 to 28 8 volts DC 12 24V mode 32 four groups of eight outputs each 1500 volts between field side and logic side 250 volts between groups 25 mA per point maximum in TTL mode 0 5 amps per point maximum in 12 24V mode with 4 amps maximum per group and 3 amps maximum per group common pin 4 6 amps for 10 ms 0 4 volts DC maximum in TTL mode 0 24 volts DC maximum in 12 24V mode 0 1 mA maximum 0 5 ms maximum 0 5 ms maximum 260 mA maximum from 5 volt bus on backplane 13 mA 3 mA point ON 4 7 mA LED 12 mA maximum per group from user supply 5VDC and all eight outputs in group ON 25 mA maximum per group from user supply 12 VDC and all eight outputs in group O
312. k 00 IC693ACC333 TBOC Terminal Block Example of 32 Point dual connector Module IC693MDL654 C693 ACC337 TBOC Terminal BIOCK lt sc lt lt eseeussnnsee ead Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90 30 I O Table of Contents C 31 C 32 D 1 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 D 13 E 2 XXV Table 3 1 Rack Number Selection Switch Settings 3 14 Table 3 2 Series 90 30 Baseplate Comparison 0000 3 24 Table 4 1 Power Supply Comparison Table 06 4 1 Table 4 2 C693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities 4 2 Table 4 3 Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC DC nee er Supply Table 4 4 C693PWR330 Power Supply Capacities 4 4 Table 4 5 Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC DC Input Power SOPPI eveceyoeeoretvasevadaseeaceeanetevedatetauees Table 4 6 IC693PWR322 Power Supply Capacities 4 7 Table 4 7 Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply 4 8 Table 4 8 IC693PWR328 Power Supply Capacities 4 10 Table 4 9 Specifications for IC693PWR328 Power Supply 4 11 Table 4 10 IC693PWR331 Power Supply Capacities 4 13 Table 4 11 Specifications for IC693PWR331 Power Supply 4 14 Table 4 12 High Capacity 12 VDC Input Power Supply Capacities 4 16 Table 4 13 Specifications for IC693PWR332 cc eee wees 4 17 Table 4 14 Load Requirements in milliamp
313. late with built in connector that replaces the removeable terminal board The assembly also contains a DIN rail mounted terminal block and a cable to connect the module to the terminal block The advantage of this method is that it saves about two hours of wiring time per module compared with hand wiring from a module s removable terminal board to a user supplied panel mounted terminal block or strip See Appendix D for TBQC information Older 32 point I O modules have one 50 pin connector on the front of the module that is either connected by a cable with a connector on each end to a Weidmuller panel mounted terminal block Weidmuller catalog no 912263 or is connected by a cable with stripped tinned leads to a user supplied terminal block or strip Newer 32 point I O modules have two 24 pin connectors on the front of the module These module may be wired in one of three ways 1 Use a pair of cables IC693CBL327 328 see data sheet in Cables chapter to connect the module to a user supplied panel mounted terminal block or strip These cables have a 24 pin connector on one end and stripped tinned leads with wire markers on the other end 2 Use a pair of dual connector cables to connect the module to a Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC terminal block IC693ACC377 See Appendix D for details 3 Make your own custom cables instructions are found in the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Appendix C Connections to I O Module
314. lated Input 8 Point IE OOM DLE U eE ENERET EEKEREN ee oe tee e eee eee aeareens 6 1 IC693MDL230 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 2 240 Volt AC Isolated Input 8 Point OO MDE I posecene ree oe ey epee eats ort coe e oe emeaete oe os 6 3 IC693MDL231 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 4 120 Volt AC Input 16 Point POO SMD ne amreese pac ees en bode nese nes ee senteseeaen eous 6 5 IC693MDL240 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 6 24 Volt AC DC Positive Negative Logic Input 16 Point IE ONIDA cacbtebed andi ah events eneneneehonseennboragesasar 6 7 IC693MDL241 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 8 125 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 8 Point TC OOMOO paceus sed S048 os ob bho eee eae eset eee es gan beer se an 6 9 IC693MDL632 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 10 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 8 Point Ere DIE eee catscebatciudabescn neste eeeenssobedoneuseleeeneon 6 11 IC693MDL634 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 12 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 16 Point PCOIOWUDIGAS posure rarr pEr sees ee es beer ea oe ewe eG Bees 6 13 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications GFK 0898F Contents IC693MDL645 Input Module Field Wiring Information 6 14 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input 16 Point IC693MDL646 2256 pau eee ors eure hens Bede eeeawetouew
315. le Analog Current Voltage Combination Module 4 Input 2 Output Channels IC693ALG442 The Analog Current Voltage Combination Input Output module provides up to 4 differential input current or voltage channels and 2 single ended output channels with either current loop outputs or voltage outputs Each channel can be individually configured for the current or voltage range as applicable required for your application All module configuration is done through software except for a jumper required for selecting the current input mode All ranges can be configured using either the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software configurator function or the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer Note that in this module s description the module will be simply referred to as the Analog Combo Module Each analog input is capable of providing five input ranges two voltage and three current which are Oto 10 volts unipolar default range for both input and output channels 10 to 10 volts bipolar m Oto 20mA m 4to20mA m 4 to 20 mA Enhanced The default input range is voltage mode 0 to 10 volts unipolar with user data scaled so that OV corresponds to a count of 0 and 10V corresponds to a count of 32767 Each analog output is capable of providing four output ranges two voltage and two current m 0 to 10 volts unipolar default range for both input and output channels 10 to 10 volts bipolar m 0 to 20 milliamps m 4
316. lly the following pages describe how analog information is handled in the Series 90 30 PLC Specific information for individual modules can be found in the description of that module Hardware Description of Analog Modules 9 4 Analog modules provide inputs and outputs with continuous values as compared with digital input and output modules which have discrete values of ON or OFF Analog modules convert digital words to analog signals or analog signals to digital words depending on whether the module is an output module or an input module Differential Inputs The AI data table is a storage location within the Series 90 30 CPU where the input information is stored The Series 90 30 PLC has current and voltage analog input modules available however the Series 90 30 CPU does not recognize a difference between the two types of analog modules The Series 90 30 PLC system must be configured by the user as described in the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual GFK 0356 and the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0467 After configuration the four analog input channels will correspond to 64 bits in the data table 256 bits for the high density 16 channel analog input modules Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK O898F FILTER DUAL TO SINGLE ENDED CONVERTER General Analog Module Information 9 a44737 PARALLEL TO SERIAL SERIE
317. lock 12 20 Configuration parameters list of analog combo module 12 12 analog current input 16 channel 10 33 analog current voltage output 8 channel 11 20 analog voltage input 16 channelj 10 20 Configuration with HHP 16 channel analog current input 10 35 16 channel analog voltage input 10 22 8 channel analog current voltage output analog combo module 12 24 Configuration with Logicmaste 16 channel analog voltage input 16 channel analog current input 8 channel analog current voltage output 11 21 analog combo module 12 13 Conformance to standards 2 1 Connections to ae discrete I O modules Connector serial port 4 23 CPU models 1 1 Index serial port connector 4 23 CPU baseplate Defined Embedded Modular Types Current draw module Current input analog 16 channel 10 27 4 channel Current output analog 2 channel Current voltage Output analog 8 channel heave Customer service telephone number 2 1 D DC high capacity power supply 5 vdc current derating diagram 4 14 17 calculating input power requirements 4 15 4 18_ capacities 4 13 4 16 illustration of 4 13 output voltages to backplane 4 21 specifications 4 14 4 17 DC power supply dc power connections 4 19 input power requirements calculating 4 8 4 11 4 15H 18 isolated 24 vdc supply connections 4 6 4 19 overcurrent prote
318. lost Input Overvoltage Protection Devices This information applies to all Series 90 30 power supplies that have six terminal boards The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip This pin is normally connected to frame ground pin 3 with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3 and 4 If you want to Hi pot test this supply overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap Re enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap 4 20 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GF K O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies a47106 3 F G d Jumper Strap Connects T rame Groun Overvoltage Protection Devices to Frame Ground Screw Terminals on Terminal Board Figure 4 12 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap Output Voltage Connections to Backplane All Supplies The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected internally to the backplane on the baseplate The voltage and power required by modules installed on the baseplate is supplied through the baseplate connectors a43845 POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE USE COMMENTS 124V USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT gt O ______
319. low them to work with the dual connector type of 32 point I O modules These cables are wired pin to pin that is pin Al to pin Al pin A2 to pin A2 etc Similar cables are available in a 3 meter length that have a right angle connector on one end and stripped leads on the other see the data sheet for the C693CBL327 328 cables for further information Cable Length see table ___ gt Figure B 20 C693CBL329 330 331 332 333 334 Cables Note Each conductor in these 24 conductor cables has a current rating of 1 2 Amps If using these cables with a 16 point Output module with a higher output current rating you must use the lower value of 1 2 for the maximum load current rating If you have field devices that require more than 1 2 Amps do not use a TBQC assembly Use the standard Terminal Board instead GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 31 Table B 8 TBQC Cable Cross Reference Table Cable Catalog Cable Description Replaces Obsolete Number and Length Cable Number IC693CBL329 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL330 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL321 Cable length 1 0 Meter IC693CBL331 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL332 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Right Side IC693CBL322 Cable length 2 0 Meters IC693CBL333 Dual 24 pin 90 deg connectors Left Side IC693CBL323 Cable
320. ls m From L1 to earth ground m From L2 Neutral to earth ground The voltage protection devices must be rated such that the system is protected from power line transients that exceed the level calculated in the following formula Line voltage 100V N PE yax The expression N PE yay refers to the maximum voltage potential between neutral and Protective Earth PE ground For example in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral floating a maximum of 50V above earth ground the transient protection should be rated at 240V 100V SOV 390V GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 4 DC Power Source Connections DC Input Wiring to all Series 90 30 Power Supplies All Series 90 30 power supplies have DC input capabilities The following connection information applies to all of them Connect the wire from the power source to the top terminal on the terminal board and connect the wire to the second terminal from the top Connect the third terminal from the top to system ground See the examples in the following figure 30W POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT a B 100 240 VAC DC Input a 50 60HZ 90VA 12 125 VDC 50W System Ground ri H E Factory Jumper B B i 24 VDC Output 1 ai ea VDG For I O Modules eae Ieee Six Terminal Board Five Terminal Board 30W POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT rc 100 240 VAC 50 60HZ 90VA
321. ltages to exist between I O devices and the PLC Do not confuse isolated inputs with the isolation between groups of analog circuits or isolation from other components of the system such as logic or power supplies This is the actual signal across the signal wires of differential or isolated I O This may also include unwanted noise such as power line frequency pickup Single ended circuits have the signal measured relative to a common connection usually the power supply Other analog I O signals typically share this common Single ended circuits require fewest terminal points giving the highest density and lowest price but at the cost of more restrictive wiring and errors due to voltage drops and currents in the common connections Single ended circuit connections are most similar to the wiring of discrete modules The term unipolar means literally one pole Unipolar signals or ranges do not change polarity during normal operation for example O to 10 volts or 4mA to 20mA Reversed connection to a unipolar input will produce minimum value and if diagnostics are available underrange or open wire faults Series 90 30 PLC I O Specifications July 2000 GFK OS9SF Appendix GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals Standards B General Specifications The products supplied by GE Fanuc are global products which are designed and manufactured with ISO9001 quality assurance for application in industrial environments throughout the world They should
322. lu 3268032759 Jo Serco ALARM High limit alarm value 32767 to 32760 32000 HIGH For detailed information on configuration of the Analog Combo module see Configuration Using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software beginning on page 3 93 Configuration Using the Hand Held Programmer beginning on page 3 104 12 12 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Configuring C693ALG442 Using Logicmaster Software This section describes how to configure the IC693ALG442 Analog Combination module using the configurator function in Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software Configuration can also be done using VersaPro or Control Programming Software For details refer to the VersaPro or Control online help To configure an Analog Combo module on the I O Configuration Rack screen follow these Steps 1 Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured 2 Press the 1m30 io key F1 Your screen will change to one similar to the one shown below IRUM ZO SE a OSC CEN 7 OR a gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK 4 SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog M I LMJONLESSON ie ONFIG VALID NGREPLACE J 3 From this screen press the a mix key F6 Your screen will change to one similar to the one shown below b am Mi
323. ly to your area or your type of equipment you should follow your applicable codes instead Besides satisfying code requirements wire color coding makes testing and troubleshooting safer faster and easier Green or green with stripe Ground Black Primary AC Red Secondary AC Blue DC White Common or neutral Yellow Secondary power source not controlled by the main disconnect Alerts maintenance personnel that there may be power present from an external source even if the equipment is disconnected from its main power source Wire Routing To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires it is recommended you keep electrically noisy wiring such as AC power wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring physically separated from low level signal wiring such as DC and Analog Input module wiring or communications cables This can be accomplished by grouping separately where practical the following categories of wiring AC power wiring This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply as well as other AC devices in the control cabinet Analog Input or Output Module wiring This should be shielded to further reduce noise coupling See Chapter 9 for details Discrete Output Module wiring These often switch inductive loads that produce noise spikes when switched off DC Input Module wiring Although suppressed internally these low level inputs should be further protected against noise coupling by obser
324. m Table 6 6 Specifications for C693MDL634 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC Inputs per Module 8 one group with a single common Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Input Current 7 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 11 5 to 30 volts DC Off state Voltage 0 to 5 volts DC On state Current 3 2 mA minimum Off state Current 1 1 mA maximum On response Time 7 ms typical Off response Time 7 ms typical Power Consumption 45 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Power Consumption 62 mA from the Isolated 24 volt backplane bus or from user supplied power Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 11 Ki IC693MDL634 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 24 volt DC positive negative logic input module MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING aeoles OTHER CIRCUITS lt q NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 24V OUT OV OUT NC Figure 6 9 Field Wiring 24 Volt Positive Negative Logic Input Module IC693MDL634 a45048 8 NUMBER 4 OF INPUTS ON 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 10 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL634 6 12 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F
325. mA maximum from the backplane Isolated 24 VDC supply Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications The summation of the differential input common mode voltage and noise must not exceed 11 volts when referenced to COM In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 5 FS Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O089SF Analog Input Modules CPU Interface to the IC693ALG 222 Analog Voltage Input Module The Series 90 30 PLC uses the data within the AI data table to record analog values for use by the programmable controller This scheme for the 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module is Shown below More information on the CPU interface to analog modules can be found at the beginning of this chapter USER a47042 CONNECTIONS CHx Hx CHx MICRO BACKPLANE SERIES INTERFACE 90 30 VLSI CPU OPTO ISOLATION PROCESSOR NOTE CHx AND CHx 1 INDICATE SINGLE ENDED MODE CHx AND CHx INDICATE DIFFERENTIAL MODE Figure 10 9 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Block Diagram IC693ALG222 Placement of A D Bits within the Data Tables Since converters used in the analog modules are 12 bit converters not all of the 16 bits in the data tables contain data required for the conversion A version of the 12 bits is placed within the 16 bit data word corresponding to the analog point in the AI table The Series 90 30 PLC syst
326. mA corresponds to a count of 8000 4 mA corresponds to a count of O zero and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 The Enhanced range uses the same hardware as the O to 20 mA range but automatically provides 4 to 20 mA range scaling with the exception that negative digital values are provided to the user for input current levels between 4 mA and O mA This gives you the capability of selecting a low alarm limit that detects when the input current falls from 4 mA to 0 mA which provides for open wire fault detection in 4 to 20 mA applications High and Low alarm limits are available on all ranges Ranges can be configured on a per channel basis The module also reports module status and user side supply status to the CPU Power Requirements and LEDs This module consumes 120 mA from the 5V bus on the PLC backplane and also requires 65 mA plus current loop current s from a user supplied 24V supply see Table 3 13 Specifications There are two green LED indicators on the module which provide module and user supply status The top LED MODULE OK provides module status information on power up as follows m ON status is OK module configured OFF no backplane power or software not running watchdog timer timed out Continuous rapid flashing configuration data not received from CPU m Slow flashes then OFF failed power up diagnostics or encountered code execution error The bottom LED User Supply OK indicates that the user provid
327. mber of circuits points on that module If you compare these status lights to the connection diagram on the back of the hinged cover you will notice that the outputs on this module are in two groups labeled Al A8 and B1 B8 that correspond to the A and B rows of status LEDs Note the additional LED on the right side of the lens cap that is labeled with the letter F This is a blown fuse indicator light This letter F is present on all of the discrete I O module lens caps but is only functional on certain Output Modules that have internal fuses It only lights if an internal fuse is blown A table with a list of modules having fuses as well as other details about the status LEDs is provided in Chapter 13 of this manual Chapter 5 General Discrete I O Module Information 5 3 ivons Cae a43082A A1234 5678 STATUS Fuse Indicator LED LEDs B12345678 Hinged Cover Front View OUTPUT Module Type RELAY N O 2 AMP Pa a Car OUTPUT olor Dar RELAY N O 2 AMP Indicates Type of Module Pilot Light 1 Pilot Light 2 Control ON eee A4 Emargency Stop Pump 1 ON Hinged Cover Pump 2 ON Connection sser can wte fe gt one Signal Names on SOL 1 BG SOL 2 B7 SOL 3 Removable Terminal Board 44A726782 015 FOR USE WITH IC693MDL940 Module Catalog No Figure 5 1 Example of Series 90 30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module 5 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0O898F General Discrete I O Mo
328. ments for the 12 VDC High Capacity Power Supply Determine total output power load from typical specifications listed for individual modules at the end of this chapter Multiply the output power by 1 5 to determine the input power value Divide the input power value by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current Allow for start up surge current requirements Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input Only Power Supplies DC Power Source Connections The and wires from the DC power source connect to the top two terminals on the terminal strip The wire should be connected to the top terminal screw and the wire to the second screw counting from the top down The ground connection connects to the third screw This connection scheme is clearly marked on the front of these power supplies 30W POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 30W POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUT Hoj z DC Input F xx VDC qoi 50 WATT INPUT xx VDC 50 WATT DC Input System Ground System Ground QI ESHI Factory Jumper 71 E H 24 VDC Output TO a For I O Modules 24 VDC Output aion 24 VDC OUTPUT 0 8A MAX For I O Modules ed
329. module status reporting 11 16 Analog I O modules 1 1 Wiring methods 2 25 Analog input block diagram typical 9 5 Analog modules 16 channel current input 10 27 16 channel voltage input 2 channel current output 2 channel voltage output 4 channel voltage input 10 1 4 channel current input 10 5 8 channel current voltage in put 11 11 analog combo deat block diagram 16 channel voltage input 16 channel current input 2 channel current output 2 channel voltage output 4 channel current input 10 7 4 channel voltage input 10 3 8 channel current voltage output 11 30 analog combo module 12 11 common mode voltage 9 5 L0 29 11 13 10 16 11 30_ 9 CPU interface 9 6 10 11 differential inputs equation values field wiring hardware description load requirements outputs performance measures 9 10 placement of A D_and D A bits within the data tables 9 8 10 11 L0 29 scaling 9 10 shielding for analog input modules 2 26 stair step effect of output 9 9 Analog output block diagram typical 9 6 Analog terminology 9 4 Analog terms definition of A 1 Appendices Serie 90 30 heat dissipation Terminal Block Quick Connect D 1 Appendix analog terms A 1 product agency approvals standards gen eral specifications B 1 Index 1 Index Index 2 B Backplane Baseplate Definition Backup battery 4 24
330. modules only This can also be used as the power input for some analog modules to power user side circuitry GFK_0898F Chapter 9 General Analog Module Information 9 3 Table 9 1 Load Requirements mA for Analog I O Modules Catalog 24 VDC 24 VDC Number Description S O 5 VDC Relay Power Isolated TICO3ALG20 Analog aput Voltage 4 Channels 27mA 98 mA 1C693ALG221_ Analog Input Current 4 Channels 25mA fo 100 mA IC693ALG222 High Density Analog Input Voltage 16 Channels 112 mA PP A mA IC693ALG223 High Density Analog Input Current 16 Channels 120 mA rn ae ae IC693ALG390 Analog Output Voltage 2 Channels 32mA 120 mA 1C693ALG391 1C693ALG391 Analog Output Current 2 Channels Output Analog Output Current 2 Channels o 2 Channels 30mA e 215 mA IC693ALG392 High Density Analog Output Current Voltage 110 mA 8 Channels IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Current Voltage 4 Ch In 2 Ch Out 9SmA Ft Module analog power must be supplied by an external user supply See individual module specifications for more information I O Installation and Wiring For information on installation removal and recommended wiring practices for Series 90 30 I O modules refer to Chapter 1 Analog Terminology There are several terms relating to measurements at analog I O terminals that you should be familiar with Refer to Appendix A for a list of these terms and their definitions Additiona
331. mounted in any type of rack All Expansion baseplates must be connected to a common ground see the Installation chapter for details Expansion baseplates are the same physical size use the same type power supplies and support the same I O and option modules as the Remote baseplates Each Expansion baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch Rack Number Selection Switch Setting Label a44565 DIP EXPANSION RACK Sw 1 2 3 4567 PROGRAMMABLE Says Expansion Rack Number Selection Switch Figure 3 6 F x x xX 2 X X X CONTROLLER 31 XX x y BASE 5 SLOT X CLOSED EXPANSION zz E xX P A NON CPU SLOTS Eon x Connector O N POWER O SUPPLY IC693CHS398 5 Slot Expansion Baseplate 3 8 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK O898F PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT EXPANSION POWER o SUPPLY Series 90 30 Baseplates DIP EXPANSION RACK SW 12 3 4 56 7 1 X X 2 X X 3 XX X X CLOSED NON CPU SLOTS Figure 3 7 IC693CHS392 10 Slot Expansion Baseplate Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates NON CPU SLOTS E X P A N S l O N 3 a43050 3 9 Remote Baseplates Figures 3 8 and 3 9 Description Label Says Remote There can be no more than 700 feet of cable connecting all baseplates in a system that uses Remote baseplates A Remote baseplate cannot stand alone It must be connected to a system that has a
332. mp Output 8 Point IC693MDL733 The 12 24 volt DC Negative Logic 0 5 Amp Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 output points in one group with a common power output terminal This output module is designed to have negative logic characteristics in that it sinks current from the loads to the user common or negative power bus The output device is connected between the positive power bus and the module output The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 is used by this module An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module There are no fuses on this module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 10 Specifications for C693MDL733 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC
333. mplify the custom cable assembly associated with the daisy chain connections between baseplates Information on building cables for use with Remote baseplates can be found in Appendix C in the IC693CBL300 etc data sheet Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System When two or more baseplates are connected via the I O Bus Expansion System the I O Expansion Bus must be properly terminated The most common method of terminating the I O Expansion Bus is by installing a termination resistor pack IC693ACC307 on the open connector on the last most distant from the CPU Expansion or Remote baseplate in the system The resistor pack is physically mounted inside of a connector Although a termination resistor pack is shipped with each baseplate only the last baseplate in the chain needs to have this termination connector installed Unused termination packs can be discarded The prewired 50 foot 15 meter cable IC693CBL302 has termination resistors wired inside the connector on one end of the cable This cable can be used if only one expansion rack is needed in a system and a 50 foot cable link is required the IC693ACC307 resistor pack is not needed in this case Also a custom built cable with built in resistors would eliminate the need for the IC693ACC307 resistor pack Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates Expansion or Remote baseplates can be powered down individually without affecting the operation of other b
334. n Pl out Ed mix Bb in Ea out a nix Bother a o im gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK 4 SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog CATALOG DESCRIPTION 1 IC69SALG442 ANALOG CURRENT VOLTAGE I 0 lt lt CURSOR TO THE DESIRED CATALOG NUMBER AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY lt lt PRESS PGDN KEY FOR NEXT PAGE PGUP KEY FOR PREVIOUS PAGE I LMSONLESSON ae Lage ONFIG VALID REPLACE p GFK 0898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 13 4 Currently there is only one selection If more than one selection appears use your Cursor Movement or Arrow keys to move to Catalog IC693ALG442 Press Enter to accept this selection and to move to the screen shown below TJ i in eal out ed mix Be in fea out a nix Rother bE o gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog ISRRT IRS SA ANALOG CURRENT VYOLTAGE 170 AI Ref Adr YAIOOO1 AQ Ref Adr AQOOL xI Ref Adr 10001 stop Mode HOLD I Size E OUTPUTS Channel 1 Q 10 Channel 2 0 10U INPUTS Chanel 1 6 10V Alarm Low 00000 Alarm High 32000 Channel 2 0 10V Alarm Low 00000 Alarm High 32000 Channel 3 10V Alarm Low 00000 Alarm High 32000 Channel 4 6 10U Alarm Low 00000 Alarm High 32000 I LMSONLESSON TE an ONFIG VALID INREPLACE 5 All the remaining configuration does not have to be done on this screen You can move your cursor
335. n baseplate or remote baseplate in the system The Terminator Plug has a resistor pack physically mounted inside of a connector The I O Bus Terminator Plug is shipped with each baseplate only the last baseplate in the expansion chain can have the I O Bus Terminator Plug installed Unused I O Bus Terminator Plugs can be discarded or saved as spares O If an expansion system has only one expansion baseplate the I O bus can be terminated by installing as the last cable the 50 foot 15 meter I O Expansion cable catalog number IC693CBL302 or C693CBL314 These cables have the termination resistors installed in the end that connects to the expansion baseplate connector O You can also build a custom cable with termination resistors wired to the appropriate pins for installation at the end of the bus GFK OS898F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets C 5 C 6 Shield Treatment All GE Fanuc factory made cables are made with a continuous or 100 shield This means that the braided cable shield is connected to the metal shell of the connector around the entire perimeter of the connector This provides a low impedance path to frame ground for any noise energy that is coupled onto the cable shield For custom length cables made per Figure 10 18 the best noise immunity is achieved when using a metalized connector cover that makes contact with the cable s braided and foil shielding and with the connector shell on the terminating end Note It is
336. n be used for connecting either expansion or remote baseplates Where required cable length is not available in a standard cable a custom cable must be built see the section Building Custom Length I O Bus Expansion Cables for detailed instructions Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F I O Cable Data Sheets Connecting the Cables Connect the single male connector to the 25 pin female connector on the right side of the CPU baseplate Connect the male connector on the dual connector end of the cable to the 25 pin female connector on the first expansion baseplate Connect the unused 25 pin female connector on the dual connector end of the cable to either the single male connector of a second I O bus expansion cable to continue the I O bus expansion chain or to an I O bus Terminator plug if this is the last cable in the expansion chain Important Notes About I O Bus Expansion Cables 1 The maximum number of cables that can be included in an I O expansion system is seven and the total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last expansion baseplate is 50 feet 15 meters The total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last remote baseplate is 700 feet 213 meters Failure to observe these maximum cable lengths could result in erratic operation of the PLC system 2 CPUs 350 364 support a maximum of seven I O expansion cables CPUs 331 341 support a maximum o
337. n error code which is defined as follows YI bitnumber 7 4 3 2 f 0 i module ok 0 module failure 1 module OK user power ok 0 user supplied power absent or not 1 user supplied power OK unused error code _binary hexadecimal error 0000 0 no errors 0001 1 invalid channel 0010 2 invalid alarm level 0011 3 invalid ramp time or step 1000 8 invalid E2 COMMREQ function If the you send E2 COMMREQ data that reflects an invalid condition the module will ignore the COMMREQ command and return an error code in the upper 4 bits of the first I byte The module will NOT stop standard operation if an error is detected these error bits are for the user s information and can be ignored if desired The error code will remain until you send an E2 COMMREQ to clear the error code or reconfigure the module GFK O898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 15 12 16 Only the most recent error will be reported an existing error code will be overwritten if another error occurs The priorities for errors are 1 Invalid COMMREQ function highest priority 2 Invalid channel 3 Invalid data ramp or alarm parameter lowest priority Thus if multiple error conditions exist the one with the highest priority is reported in the error code Second eight locations available for I SIZE values 16 24 Input Ch 1 ALARM LO 0 indicates value above limit 1 below or Input Ch 1 ALARM HI 0 indicates value
338. n the applied voltage is 0 7 volts higher than the isolated 24 VDC supply which can range from 21 5 volts to 26 5 volts An LED at the top of the module s faceplate is ON when the module s power supply is operating To minimize capacitive loading and noise all field connections should be wired using a good grade of twisted shielded instrumentation cable The shields should be connected to GND on the user terminal connector block The GND connection provides access to the baseplate frame ground resulting in superior rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents The module provides electrical isolation of externally generated noise between field wiring and the backplane through the use of optical isolation This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Refer to page 3 11 to determine the number of Analog Voltage Output modules that can be installed in a system Table 11 1 Specifications for Analog Voltage Output Module C693ALG390 Voltage Range Calibration Supply Voltage nominal External Supply Voltage Range External Supply Voltage Ripple Update Rate Resolution Absolute Accuracy Offset Output Loading maximum Output Load Capacitance Isolation Internal Power Consumption 10 to 10 volts Factory calibrated to 2 5 mV per count 24 VDC from isolated 24 VDC on backplane or user supplied volt age source and 5 VDC from backplane 18 to 30 VDC
339. nalog Current Input Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module VOLTAGE REGULATOR 24V IN a47016 Vcc AND VLSI VOLTAGE OPTO MICRO Z SUPERVISOR ISOLATION PROCESSOR 16 CHANNELS TOTAL 24V ee sl CH X ote OPTO om WA Conner ISOLATION 250 E J EEPROM fa CHY AD OPTO lo E oA 8 CHANNEL ISOLATION 250 BACKPLANE REFERENCE INTERFACE COM RANGE a SELECT CIRCUITRY GND C SERIES 90 30 PLC BACKPLANE Figure 10 18 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module Block Diagram IC693ALG223 10 42 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Chapter Analog Output Modules I Analog Voltage Output 2 Channel IC693ALG390 The 2 Channel Analog Voltage Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides two output channels each capable of converting 13 bits of binary digital data to an analog output for use as required by your application The Analog Voltage Output module is capable of providing outputs in the range of 10 to 10 volts Resolution of the converted signal is 12 bits binary plus sign which is effectively 13 bits 1 part in 8192 Both channels are updated on every scan about 5 milliseconds User data in the AQ registers is in a 16 bit 2 s_ complement format The 13 most significant bits from the AQ register are converted to sign magnit
340. nalog voltage 16 channel analog voltage 4 channel input simulator 8 16 pts J 6 17 negative logic 5 8 positive logic 5 7 Input Output module combination 120 vac in relay out 8 8 8 1 24 vdc in relay out 8 8 8 5 Inspection new system 2 1 Index Installation 32 Point modules 2 21 baseplate adapter bracket 2 10 8 22 baseplate model 311 313 3 18 _ baseplate model 323 3 19 Basic procedure 2 43 grounding procedures 2 13 I O expansion system load a for analog I O modules 9 3 load requirements for components 4 25 remote expansion system 3 17 C 12 Installing I O Module Term Board 2 7 Instructions for floating neutral IT systems 2 40 Internet GE Fanuc site 13 9 Interposing terminal blocks 2 19 D 2 D 11 Jumper strap for overvoltage protection de vices 4 6 4 21 K Key CPU replacement Kits spare parts mechanical 13 7 L Layout PLC system good layout benefits Layout PLC figure 2 3 Layout PLC system guidelines 2 2 LED indicators CPUL13 3 Input modules Option modules Output modules 13 2 power supplies 4 20 relating to terminal board 13 1 LEDs analog combo 12 7 current input module 16 ch current input module 4 ch 10 6 current output module 2 ch current voltage output module 8 ch 11 16 Index 7 Index Index amp on discrete modules 1 2 voltage input m
341. nction or the Series 90 30 Hand Held Programmer The default range is O to 10 volts Configurable current and voltage output ranges are m Oto 10 volts unipolar 10 to 10 volts bipolar m Oto 20 milliamps m 4 to 20 milliamps Each channel is capable of converting 15 to 16 bits depending on the range selected of binary digital data to an analog output for use as required by your application All eight channels are updated every 12 milliseconds User data in the AQ registers is in a 16 bit 2 s complement format In current modes an open wire fault is reported to the CPU for each channel The module can go to a known last state when system power is interrupted As long as user power is applied to the module each output will maintain its last value or reset to zero as determined by how you have configured the module Important Product Information Please note the following important product information This version of the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module requires the following product versions for compatibility CPU Firmware Versions 3 3 to 4 6 If your CPU has firmware version 3 3 to 4 6 you must select 16 I bits at configuration If this selection is not made a loss of module fault will occur CPU Firmware Version 5 0 or later If your CPU has firmware version 5 0 or later then the I configuration will accept 8 or 16 l bits Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Software Version 5 00 or later is required
342. nd the Hand Held Programmer are described in the following pages Table 10 5 Configuration Parameters for IC693ALG222 Parameter Name Description Values Default Values Units Active Channels Number of channels converted 1 through 16 1 Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro n a 16 Hand Held programmer Ref Adr Starting address for AI reference type standard range AIOO001 or next highest available n a address Ref Adr Starting address for I reference type 100001 or next highest available address Jol Size Number of I status locations 8 16 24 32 40 8 Logicmaster 90 30 bits 40 Hand Held Programmer Range Range 0 to 10V or 0 to 10V n a 10 to 10V Alarm Low Low limit alarm value 32767 to 32759 User counts Alarm High High limit alarm value 32766 to 32760 32000 counts For more information on configuration see Configuration Using Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software beginning on page 3 25 and Configuration Using the Hand Held Programmer beginning on page 3 29 GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 17 IC693ALG222 Configuration Using Logicmaster Software This section describes how you can configure the 16 Channel High Density Analog Voltage Input module using the configurator function in Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software Configuration can also be done using CIMPLICITY Control Programming Software For details refer to the CIMPLICITY Control online help To configure a 16 Chann
343. nectors to field devices is made through a cable having a mating female connector on one end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end You can purchase a pair of pre wired cables catalog numbers C693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 or if required for your application build your own cable Refer to Building Cables for 24 Pin Connectors in the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Appendix C of this manual for more information GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 21 Table 6 11 Specifications for IC693MDL654 Rated Voltage 5 to 12 volts DC Positive or Negative Logic Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC Inputs per Module 32 four groups of eight inputs each 98 4 feet 30 meters maximum cable length Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 250 volts between groups Input Current 3 0 mA typical ON current 5 VDC 8 5 mA typical ON current 12 VDC Input Characteristics On state Voltage 4 2 to 15 volts DC Off state Voltage 0 to 2 6 volts DC On state Current 2 5 mA minimum Off state Current 1 2 mA maximum On response Time 1 ms maximum Off response Time 1 ms maximum Internal Power Consumption 195 mA maximum from 5V bus on backplane 29 mA 0 5 mA point ON 4 7 mA LED ON 440 mA maximum from 5V bus on backplane if module isolated 5V supply used to power inputs and all 32 inputs ON 96 mA typical from user input supply 5 VDC and all 32 inputs ON 272 mA typical from user input sup
344. nel 1 RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 LO 0 This display contains the entry field for the low alarm limit for this channel You can enter positive or negative values using the numeric keys 0 through 9 and the key Press the ENT key to accept the value you have entered When an alarm value that is not in the allowed range 32768 to 32760 is entered a DATA ERR message will be displayed as shown in the following example RO 03 DATA ERR lt S CH 1 LO 33000 The bad data must be corrected before the HHP will allow you to move to another screen When a valid low alarm has been entered press the key to move to the high alarm limit screen for this channel The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 HI 32000 This screen contains the entry field for the high alarm limit for this channel You can enter positive or negative values using the numeric keys 0 through 9 and the key To view the range screen for the next input channel press the key The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 2 AI 0 10 V Edit the ranges and alarm limits for this channel and subsequent channels as you did for the first channel Freeze Mode GFK O898F If an alarm value in the allowed range 32768 to 32760 is entered that results in an invalid condition such as a low alarm limit greater than an upper alarm limit or a negative alarm for a channel in a unipolar range the module will enter
345. nk tubing TBQC Not Recommended for Analog Modules The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is not recommended for use with analog modules due to cable shielding requirements 2 34 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines Analog Output Shield Grounding Example One For analog output modules the shield is normally grounded at only the source end the module as shown in Figure 3 9 The GND connection provides access to the baseplate frame ground resulting in superior rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents In extreme noise environments you can connect a ground braid from the GND terminal to an external earth ground to bypass noise around the module see Analog Output Shield Grounding Example Two Shield Connected at Module end Only Analog Output Module Figure 2 23 Shield Connections for Analog Output Modules GFK O898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 35 Analog Output Shield Grounding Example Two This method uses the same scheme as the previous suggestion but with the addition of an external ground connection to help channel noise around the module Shields Connected at Module Ground Conductor end Only Analog Output Module Earth Ground Figure 2 24 Analog Output Module with External Earth Ground Connection 2 36 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Ins
346. nnected in a daisy chain arrangement from one baseplate to the other This is made possible by the fact that the cables have a dual connector on one end Therefore when the cable is plugged into an I O Bus Expansion connector the second connector on that end of the cable provides a socket for connecting to the next cable The data sheet for the I O Bus Expansion cables IC693CBL300 etc in Appendix C has sample wiring figures On the last I O Bus Expansion Connector plug in an I O Bus Expansion Terminator Catalog Number IC693ACC307 unless using a cable with built in terminator resistors which would either be GE Fanuc cable IC693CBL302 IC693CBL314 or your own custom built cable with built in resistors Install the modules in their correct slots using your system layout drawings The label on the side of each module identifies the module type and catalog number Refer to the section Installing Modules if you are not familiar with how to do this Connect cables to Option modules Route cables away from noise producing wires See the Wire Routing section of this chapter Be sure to follow the information in the General Wiring Guidelines section of this chapter to protect the system from electrical noise Use the applicable wire color coding scheme referred to in that section Install the power wires to the Power Supply and I O modules I O modules with removeable terminal boards You can wire the terminal boards
347. nnot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F GFK 08S98F Analog Output Modules Removing Module From Configuration If required this module can be removed from the current rack configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence Initial Display RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S AQ8 AQ To delete the module press the DEL ENT key sequence The display will then be RO 03 EMPTY gt S If the CLR key had been pressed after the DEL key instead of the ENT key the delete operation would have been aborted Selecting Module Default Mode The default STOP mode of the module either HOLD or DEFLOW can be displayed and modified if required by using the following procedure Initial Display RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S T16 10017 10032 To display the module s default STOP mode press gt The display will show the current mode of the module The default mode is HOLD RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S HLS DEF HOLD You can toggle between the HOLD and DEFLOW modes by pressing the key The range
348. not be the most efficient for your system so you may wish modify this procedure to fit your needs 1 Gather the schematics layouts prints and other information for the job Warning To avoid the possibility of electrical shock to personnel or damage to your PLC we recommend that you shut off all power to the system before mounting and wiring the PLC Also keep all electronic components away from the area while drilling and tapping to keep metal chips and filings out of these sensitive components 2 From the layout drawing determine where the baseplate s will be mounted Lay out the hole locations either using the dimensions given on your layout drawing or from the Baseplates chapter of this manual 3 Mark the hole location for the baseplate safety ground wire see Baseplate Safety Ground in this chapter 4 Mark the hole locations for module shield ground connections if any See the section Module Shield Ground in this chapter for instructions 5 Finish marking hole locations for the rest of the system This includes any terminal blocks you will be using DIN rail mounted terminal blocks for some of the 32 point I O modules are manufactured by Weidmuller DIN rail mounted GE Fanuc Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC assemblies are optional for some of the 16 point and 32 point discrete I O modules If using these TBQCs refer to Appendix D for data Also APM and DSM modules use optional DIN rail mounted term
349. nput Modules 6 Wiring for Module Groups C and D connector on left front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number C1 Al l Brown C2 B1 7 Violet C3 A2 1 Brown Black C4 B2 7 Violet Black C5 A3 2 Red C6 B3 8 White C7 A4 2 Red Black C8 B4 8 White Black C Common A5 3 Orange N C B5 9 Gray N C A6 3 Orange Black 5V OUT B6 9 Gray Black 0 VOLTS A7 4 Yellow N C B7 10 Pink N C AS 4 Yellow Black D Common B8 10 Pink Black D8 A9 5 Dark Green D7 B9 11 Light Blue D6 A10 5 Dark Green Black D5 B10 11 Light Blue Black D4 All 6 Dark Blue D3 B11 12 Light Green D2 A12 6 Dark Blue Black D1 B12 12 Light Green Black Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 25 6 26 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input IC693MDL655 The 24 volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 discrete input points The inputs are arranged in four isolated groups of eight A1 A8 B1 B8 C1 C8 and D1 D8 each group has its own common The inputs are positive or negative logic inputs and will operate at levels up to 30V Backplane isolation between the field side and logic side is provided by opto couplers on the module Isolation is also provided between the four groups of inputs on the module however each group of eight inp
350. nput Modules 10 25 Saved Configurations Configurations that contain a 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input module can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations 10 26 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Analog Input Modules Analog Current Input 16 Channel IC693ALG223 The 16 Channel Analog Current Input module provides up to 16 single ended input channels each capable of converting an analog input signal to a digital value for use as required by your application This module provides three input ranges m 4to20 mA m QOto20 mA 4 to 20 mA Enhanced Current Ranges The default range is 4 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 The other ranges are selected by changing the configuration parameters using the C641 configurator software or the Hand Held Programmer The range can be configured so that the input range is 0 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that O mA corresponds to a count of O and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 Full 12 bit resolution is available over the 4 to 20 and O to 20 mA ranges A 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range can also be selected When this range is selected 0
351. ns 10 and 11 GFK OS9SF Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 3 7 4 120 Volt AC Output 0 5 Amp 12 Point IC693MDL310 The 120 volt 0 5 Amp AC Output module provides 12 output points in two isolated groups with six points in each group Each group has a separate common associated with it the two commons are not tied together inside the module This allows each group to be used on different phases of the AC supply or powered from the same supply Each group is protected with a 3 amp fuse and an RC snubber is provided for each output to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line This module provides a high degree of inrush current 10x the rated current which makes the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads AC Power to operate loads connected to outputs must be user supplied This module requires an AC power source LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are at the top of the module The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row and a red LED centered between and to the right of the two rows This module uses the first six LEDs labeled Al through 6 in the top row and the first six LEDs labeled B1 through 6 in the bottom row for output status The red LED labeled F functions as a blown fuse indicator that turns ON if any of the fuses should blow An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged doo
352. ns in the I memory the Input Table where status information from the module is reported You can select the number of I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the I Size field Values allowable in the I Size field are 8 or 16 which refer to the number of I locations reported to the PLC The I Ref Adr field will only accept I for I Size values 8 or greater the data brought back is in the format that follows The first eight lI locations available for I SIZE values 8 16 Module OK a O zero indicates NOT OK 1 indicates module OK User Supply OK Indicates when user supply is in specified limits reads a 0 when user supply is below the specified limit 1 when User supply is OK I 2 I 7 Reserved for future modules Not used in this module Second eight locations available for I SIZE value of 16 1 14 Channel 7 BROKEN WIRE 0 OK 1 Wire broken I modes only I1 15 Channel 8 BROKEN WIRE 0 OK 1 Wire broken I modes only One of four output ranges can be selected Two are voltage ranges The default range is O to 10V where output voltage values ranging from 0 to 10 volts correspond to O to 32000 integer values from the Series 90 30 CPU The 10 to 10V range when selected corresponds from 32000 to 32000 from the CPU over an output voltage range of 10 to 10V The two current ranges are 4 to 20 mA and O to 20 mA In each of the current ranges values between 0 and 32000 ar
353. nse Analog Voltage Input Input Ranges Resolution 0 to 10V 10 to 10V Absolute Accuracy Both Voltage Ranges Linearity Common Mode Voltage Common Mode Rejection Cross Channel Rejection Input Impedance Input Filter Response Power Requirements External Supply Voltage Range Power Supply Rejection Ratio PSRR 4 Current Voltage Voltage Ripple Current Consumption From Internal 5V Supply From External User Supply IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Enhanced Table continued on next page 5 uA 1 LSB 5 uA 5 uA 1 LSB 5 uA 5 uA 1 LSB 5 uA 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F 0 5 of full scale over specified operating temperature range lt 1 LSB 200V maximum gt 70 db at DC gt 70 db at 60 Hz gt 80 db from DC to 1 kHz 250 Q 29 Hz 0 to 10V unipolar 10 to 10V bipolar 2 5 mV 1 LSB 2 5 mV 5 mV 1 LSB 5 mV 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F 0 5 of full scale over specified operating temperature range lt 1 LSB 200V maximum gt 70 db at DC gt 70 db at 60 Hz gt 80 db from DC to 1 kHz 800K Q typical 29 Hz 20 to 30 VDC 24 VDC typical 5 WA V typical 10uA V maximum 25 mV V typical 5 0mV V maximum 10 95 mA 129 mA lIn the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 1 FS 2Tn the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may
354. nsumes power from the 5 VDC output of the PLC power supply to drive the isolation circuitry This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system See page 3 11 to determine the number of Analog Current Input modules that can be installed in a system Table 10 2 Specifications for Analog Current Input Module IC693ALG221 Input Current Ranges 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA Calibration Factory calibrated to 4 UA per count Update Rate 2 msec all four channels Resolution at 4 20 mA 4 uA 1 LSB 4 uA Resolution at 0 20 mA 5 WA 1 LSB 5 WA Absolute Accuracy 0 1 full scale 0 1 reading Common Mode Voltage 200 volts Linearity lt 1 Least Significant Bit Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Common Mode Rejection gt 70 db at DC gt 70 db at 60 Hz Cross Channel Rejection gt 80 db from DC to 1 kHz Input Impedance 250 ohms Input Filter Response 325 Hz Internal Power Consumption 100 mA from the isolated 24 volt supply 25 mA from 5 volt bus on the backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Y In the presence of severe RF interference IEC 801 3 10V m accuracy may be degraded to 0 5 FS Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F IC693ALG221 Analog Current Input Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 4 Channel Analog Current Input Module GFK O898F DIFF
355. nt Body for EMC Directives Directive for selected modules STANDARDS OVERVIEW 4 Conditions ENVIRONMENTAL TEC68 2 6 1G 57 150Hz 0 006 in p p 10 57Hz Operating Temperature 0 C to 60 C Series 90 inlet Genius ambient VersaMax ambient 0 C to 55 C Field Control ambient Storage Temperature 40 C to 85 C 5 to 95 non condensing IEC529 Steel cabinet per IP54 protection from dust amp splashing water GFK 08S98F B STANDARDS OVERVIEW 4 Conditions EMC EMISSIONS Radiated Conducted CISPR 11 EN 55011 Industrial Scientific amp Medical Equipment Group 1 Class A CISPR 22 EN 55022 Information Technology Equipment Class A 47 CFR 15 referred to as FCC part 15 Radio Devices Class A EMC IMMUNITY applies to CE Marked modules RF Susceptibility EN 61000 4 3 10Vims m 80Mhz to 1000Mhz 80 AM Pn eee VersaMax All power supply I O and communication modules 2KV power supplies IKV I O communication Surge Withstand ANSI IEEE C37 90a Damped Oscillatory Wave 2 5KV power supplies I O 12V 240V IEC255 4 Damped Oscillatory Wave Class II power supplies I O 12V 240V EN 61000 4 5 Field Control and VersaMax 2 kV cm P S 1 kV cm I O VersaMax All power supply I O and communication modules Conducted RF EN 61000 4 6 10V ms 0 15 to 830Mhz 80 AM comm modules w cables gt 30m VersaMax All power supply I O and communication modules ISOLATION Dielectric Withstand UL5
356. ny and author s name Keep master backup copies in a safe place Make working copies available to those responsible for maintaining the equipment See Factors Affecting Battery Life in Chapter 6 of GFK O0356P or later version 13 8 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual July 2000 GFK O898F Maintenance and Troubleshooting Getting Additional Help and Information There are several ways to get additional help and information GE Fanuc Web Site There is a large amount of information on the Technical Support section of the GE Fanuc Web site Sections such as Technical Documentation Application Notes Revision Histories Frequently Asked Questions and Field Service Bulletins may have the exact information you need You can access this site at http www gefanuc com support Fax Link System This system lets you choose technical help documents to be sent to you on your Fax machine To use this system follow these steps Call Fax Link at 804 978 5824 on a touch tone type phone rotary dial phones will not work for this application Follow the instructions to have a master list called Document 1 of Fax Link documents Faxed to you A master Fax Link list is also available on the GE Fanuc Web site in the Technical Support section see the GE Fanuc Web Site section above Select desired document s from the master list then call Fax Link and specify the document number s
357. o operate the field devices must be supplied by the user The normally open relay circuits are used for controlling output loads provided by the user The output switching capacity of each output is 2 amps The relay outputs can control a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power for the internal relay circuits is provided by the 24 volt DC bus on the backplane The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate field devices There are no fuses on this module LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row The top row is labeled Al through 8 input points 1 through 8 and the bottom row is is labeled B1 through B8 relay output points through 8 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The top half of the outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate low voltage circuits and the bottom half of the outside left edge is color coded red to indicate high voltage circuits This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system GFK 0898F Chapter 8 Discrete Combination Modules
358. oad 2 amps pilot duty maximum per output 4 amps maximum per common Minimum Load 10 mA Maximum Inrush 5 amps On Response Time 15 ms maximum Off Response Time 15 ms maximum Int Power Consumption 7 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane 135 mA all outputs on from relay 24V bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL940 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 2 amp N O Relay output module a43101 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER ea CIRCUITS Q 5 a 3 LED O 4 el eee nas o Li lI ss Ty 8 RELAY NO 5 AS 11 al v 13 14 OF S B4 17 a 19 20 Figure 7 34 IC693MDL940 Output Module Field Wiring a44682 16 16 AMPS TOTAL 12 MODULE LOAD CURRENT AMPS 8 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 35 Load Current vs Temperature for IC693MDL940 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 37 Table 7 20 Load Current Limitations for IC693MDL940 Maximum Current Operating for Load Type Typical Contact Life Voltage Lamp or Solenoid Number of Operations 24 to 120 VAC 300 000 24 to 120 VAC 500 000 24 to 120 VAC 1 000 000 240 VAC 150 000 24
359. ode The STOP mode of the module either HOLD or DEFAULT LOW DEFLOW can be displayed and modified using the following procedure From the AQ reference screen press the key to scroll to the next screen ROQO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S HLS DEF HOLD The default STOP mode is HOLD which indicates that each output will hold its last state when the PLC is placed in STOP mode You can toggle between the HOLD and DEFLOW modes by pressing the key Pressing this key once causes the following screen to be displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S HLS DEF DEF LOW In DEFLOW mode each output will become zero when the PLC is placed in STOP mode When the desired mode is displayed it is accepted by pressing the ENT key To return to the previous screen press the key Selecting Output Channel Ranges The range for each of the output and input channels can be displayed and selected or changed as described below There are two current and two voltage ranges that can be selected for each output channel From the STOP mode screen pressing causes the following screen to be displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AQ 0 10 V You can toggle through the ranges for each channel by pressing the key Each range will be displayed as shown below RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AQ 10 10 RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AQ 4 20 MA GFK O898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 27 RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S CH 1 AQ 0 20 MA When t
360. odule 16 ch voltage input module 4 ch 10 2 voltage output module 2 ch List of fuses 13 6 Lithium battery 4 24 Load capacity power supply 4 25 Load current limitations IC693MAR590 8 2 IC693MDL930 7 32 IC693MDL931 7 35 IC693MDL940 7 38 IC693MDR390 8 6 Load requirements analog I O modules 9 3 9 4 hardware 4 25 sample calculations 4 28 table of 4 26 p 4 Local expansion system example point to point wiring C 8 Location rack 2 2 Low battery warning 4 24 Maintenance preventive table 13 8 Making a 100 shielded cable C 7 Mechanical spare parts kits 13 7 Model 30 I O module types 1 1 Model 30 I O modules terminal board 1 3 Module fuse list 13 6 Module features figure 2 4 Module load requirements table 4 26 Module location Defined 3 3 Module retention in slot 1 2 Modules replacing 13 5 Mounting Baseplates Negative logic input modules 5 8 Negative logic output modules 5 8 Number of baseplates per system system controlled by PC 1 1 O Option modules personal computer interface card E 1 Output module fuses 13 6 Output modules 12 24 vdc negative logic 16 pts 7 26 12 24 vdc negative logic 32 pts J 7 39 12 24 vdc negative logic 8 pts 7 15 7 20 12 24 vdc positive logic escp 16 pts 12 24 vdc positive logic 16 pts 7 24 12 24 vdc positive logic 32 pts 7
361. of one of the baseplate s two lower mounting holes These two holes have openings to the side to allow connecting a wire and ring terminal under the head of a mounting screw Connect the other end of this ground wire to a tapped hole in the panel that the baseplate is mounted to using a machine screw star lock washer and flat washer Alternately if your panel has a ground stud it is recommended you use a nut and star lock washer for each wire on the ground stud to ensure adequate grounding Where connections are made to a painted panel the paint should be removed so clean bare metal is exposed at the connection point Terminals and hardware used should be compatible with the aluminum baseplate material PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 5 SLOT NON CPU SLOTS USER PROGRAM AND REGISTER oo AWG 12 or VALUES MAY BE Larger Wire SUPPLY Ig REMOVED FOR LONGER THAN 1 HOUR Q oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oooo0o00000000 oooo0o00000000 oooo0o00000000 oooo0o00000000 oooo0o00000000 oooo0o00000000 A POWER O SUPPLY Alternate location X for Ground connection Screw Star Lock Washer Flat Washer Ring Terminal installed in tapped hole Paint Removed From Panel Here Figure 2 12 Baseplate Grounding All baseplates must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury 2
362. of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 3 Specifications for C693MDL240 Rated Voltage 120 volts AC Input Voltage Range 0 to 132 volts AC 50 60 Hz Inputs per Module 16 one group with a single common Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field side and logic side Input Current 12 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 74 to 132 volts AC Off state Voltage 0 to 20 volts AC On state Current 6 mA minimum Off state Current 2 2 mA maximum On response Time 30 ms maximum Off response Time 45 ms maximum Consumption 90 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Number of inputs on is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in figure 6 7 Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 5 i IC693MDL240 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 120 volt AC input module a43092 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING A2 GEA A4 5
363. of the insert is color coded so that you can quickly identify the module as an AC red DC blue or signal level gray type Universal Terminal Boards Series 90 30 I O modules with up to 16 points have as a standard feature detachable terminal boards for field wiring connections to and from user supplied input or output devices This feature makes it easy to prewire field wiring to user supplied input and output devices and to replace modules in the field without disturbing existing field wiring Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC assembly allows some 16 point or 32 point discrete modules to be quickly connected to interposing terminal blocks Installing a 16 point module typically takes 2 1 2 hours to wire from a PLC to interposing terminal blocks With the TBQC you simply snap in the interposing terminal block remove the I O module s terminal assembly snap in the I O faceplate and connect the cable This reduces wiring time to about two minutes reducing wiring cost and errors Complete assemblies consist of a terminal block an I O Face Plate and a cable See Appendix D for more information Connections to High Density I O Modules High Density discrete I O modules 32 Inputs or 32 Outputs are connected to field devices through a cable or cables that plug into either one or two connectors on the front of the modules These modules are discussed in detail in Chapters 5 and 6 Opti
364. og module connections This appendix contains two sections one for discrete 16 point I O modules and one for discrete 32 point I O modules For additonal help in selecting TBQC components see the topic Terminal Block Selection Guide for Discrete I O Modules in Chapter 2 Connector Male Pins a45586A QDWC IOYP OG POY AAAA Top View Box Terminals O OO Pees ie eed Ee o l Front View Figure C 1 Typical TBQC Terminal Block GFK O898F D 1 Ej TBQC Components for 16 Point Modules Installing a 16 point module typically takes 2 1 2 hours to wire from a PLC to a terminal blocks or strip With the TBQC you simply snap the terminal block onto a DIN rail remove the I O module s terminal assembly snap in the I O faceplate and connect the cable This reduces wiring time to about two minutes reducing wiring costs and errors TBQC components consist of terminal blocks I O Face Plates and cables Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals arranged in three levels as shown in Figure J 1 These terminal blocks feature an easy to use captive screw rising cage type connection system Catalog numbers for the terminal blocks and the modules they can be used with are listed below Table C 1 TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table Catalog Use With Module Number These Modules Description 1C693ACC329 IC693MDL240 Input 120 VAC 16 points IC693MDL645 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Lo
365. ogic 32 point output module 7 39 12 24 vdc positive logic 0 5 amp output module 16 points 7 24 12 24 vdc positive logic 0 5 amp output module 8 points 7 18 12 24 vdc positive logic 2 amp output module 7 12 12 24 vdc positive logic 32 point output module 7 41 12 24 vdc positive logic escp 1 amp output module 16 points 7 28 12 24 vdc 0 5A pos logic 32 point output module 7 50 120 vac input module 6 5 120 vac input relay output module 8 2 120 vac isolated input module 6 1 120 vac output 0 5 amp module 12 points 7 4 120 vac output 0 5 amp module 16 point 7 8 120 240 vac Isolated output modules 7 10 120 240 vac output 2 amp module 7 6 125 vdc pos neg logic 2 amp output mod ule 7 22 125 vdc pos neg logic input module 6 9 24 vac or vdc pos neg logic input module 24 vdc high capacity power suppl 4 14 24 vdc input relay output module 24 vdc pos neg logic input FAST module 16 points 6 15 24 vdc pos neg logic input module 6 11 6 13 24 vdc pos neg logic 32 point input mod ule 24 pin connector 6 27 24 vdc pos neg logic FAST 32 point input module 6 19 24 48 vdc power supply 4 8 240 vac isolated input module 6 3 48 vdc power supply 4 11 5 12 vdc TTL pos neg logic 32 point in put module 6 22 5 24 vdc TTL negative logic 32 point output module 7 44 analog combo module 12 2 analog current input module 4 channel
366. ogic side 500 volts between each group Output Current 2 amp maximum per point 4 amps maximum per group at 40 C 104 F Output Characteristics Inrush Current 20 amps maximum for one cycle Minimum Load Current 100 mA Output Voltage Drop 1 5 volts maximum Output Leakage Current 3 mA maximum at 120 volts AC 6 mA maximum at 240 volts AC On Response Time 1 ms maximum Off Response Time 1 2 cycle maximum Power Consumption 160 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on following page Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL330 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 120 240 volt AC output 2 Amp Z O z z o N E module a43105 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING NC ea ow NC _ oE te yng oa A are LAN OAK o L OOC 8 NC OTHER CIRCUITS Q 40 3 11 NC 2 AS NC 14 AGL 15 16 18 19 20 ee Figure 7 4 Field Wiring 120 240 Volt AC Output 2 Amp Module IC693MDL330 a43703 8 TOTAL 4 MODULE LOAD CURRENT 2 AMPS AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 5 Input Points vs Temperature for IC6
367. om Length Cables for 24 Pin Connectors Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for individual applications You must purchase the mating female socket type 24 pin connectors The 24 pin connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Fanuc Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors solder pin crimp pin and ribbon cable Each accessory kit contains enough components D connectors backshells contact pins etc to assemble ten single ended cables of the type specified for each Kit Table B 4 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits GE Fanuc Vendor Catalog Number Catalog Number Description IC693ACC316 FCN 361J024 AU Solder eyelet receptacle Solder Eyelet Type FCN 360C024 B Backshell for above IC693ACC317 FCN 363J024 Crimp wire receptacle Crimp Type Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type connectors The solder eyelet connectors as provided in IC693ACC316 do not require any special tooling Crimped Contact Connectors as provided in IC693ACC317 require Hand Crimping Tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact Extraction Tool FCN 360T T001 H Ribbon Cable Connectors as provided in IC693ACC318 require Cable Cutter FCN 707T T001 H Hand Press FCN 707T T101 H Locator Plate FCN 367T T012 H These tools
368. ompatible with a wide range of user supplied load devices such as motor starters solenoids and indicators Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user Connections from the output circuits are made to the user s output devices through a 50 pin connector mounted on the front of the module This module does not have LED indicators to indicate circuit status This output module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 21 Specifications for C693MDL750 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 32 four groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Output Current 0 3 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum per common at 60 C 140 F Output Characteristics Output Voltage Drop 0 24 volts maximum Off state Leakage 0 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Internal Power Consumption 21 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Wiring to Field Devices Direct Method This method uses cables that have a mating female connector on the module end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end You can purchase a pre wired cable either catalog number IC693CBL308 3 feet 1 meter or catalog number IC693CBL309 6 feet 2 meters or if required for y
369. on and an RC snubber is provided for each output to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line This module provides a high degree of inrush current 10x the rated current which makes the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads AC Power DC power cannot be used to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module There are two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row and a red LED centered between and to the right of the two rows This module uses the upper eight LEDs labeled Al through 8 for output status The red F LED is a blown fuse indicator that turns ON if any of the fuses should blow An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 4 Specifications for C693MDL330 Rated Voltage 120 240 volts AC Output Voltage Range 85 to 264 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 8 two groups of four outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and l
370. on points together at the source end and then connecting a common line to the module at only one module COM terminal This scheme will eliminate multiple grounding or ground loops that could cause false input data In the following figure the common connections just described are drawn in bold lines ANALOG INPUT MODULE Figure 2 15 Analog Input Connections to Common Conductors Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines Analog Input Shield Grounding Example Three It is usually preferable to ground cable shields at the source end However in cases where this may be difficult or in environments where electrical noise is not a major problem it may be acceptable to ground cable shields at the analog input module end In this case you would connect them to one of the module s GND terminal screws which is connected to frame ground through an internal PLC path This cable grounding method is shown in the next figure in bold lines P C N CN ANALOG i SOURCE _ ANALOG t SOURCE i CN a ah W F i OC TN ANALOG as SOURCE _ 1m ANALOG INPUT MODULE ANALOG SOURCE Figure 2 16 Shields Connected to Analog Input Module Terminal Board GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 220 2 30 Analog Input Shield Grounding Example Four If using the method in the previous example you may need
371. on Modules In addition to Series 90 30 I O modules the I O system supports a wide variety of option modules such as Genius Communications and Bus Controller Communications Control module for serial communications Programmable Coprocessor Modules and Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Motion control and High Speed Counter modules m Ethernet interface Various bus controllers m State Logic modules NOTE the Programmable Coprocessor Modules Communications Control module Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module and the State Logic Processor modules are currently NOT supported by the Personal Computer Interface PCIF cards For current information on availability of Series 90 30 modules consult your authorized GE Fanuc PLC distributor or your local GE Fanuc sales office GFK O898F Chapter I Introduction to the Series 90 30 I O System i Horner Electric and Third Party Modules Series 90 30 compatible modules are available from Horner Electric Inc that may be used in a Series 90 30 PLC system or in a PCIF system Some of these modules are listed below there are many more These modules may be ordered directly from Horner Electric Inc telephone number is 317 639 4261 web address is www hornerelectric com Other Third party I O modules are also available that can be included in a Series 90 30 PLC system For information on Third party I O modules consult your authorized GE Fanuc PLC distributor or your local
372. on the jacking lever to release the terminal block a43061 JACKING LEVER PREET PEES Grasp pull tab and pull it towards you until contacts have separated from module housing and bottom pivot hook has disengaged a43715 PULL TAB lt Y _ m CO a A Figure 2 6 Removing a Module s Terminal Board 2 8 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Installation Guidelines I O Module Terminal Board Posts Notice that the terminal board has three posts on the left side The top and bottom posts hold the terminal board cover in place The purpose of the middle post is to keep the terminal board wiring in place This middle post can be easily snapped off if you do not require it to hold the wiring in place Since minimal force is required to snap off the middle post you should be careful that you do not inadvertently snap it off if you are using it to keep your wiring in place Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws Discrete output modules IC693MDL730F and later and IC693MDL731F and later have a special terminal board that is equipped with holding screws shown in the figure below These screws prevent the terminal board to module connections from deteriorating in applications where the PLC is subjected to severe vibration a43082B A1234 5678 B1234 5678 Terminal Board Post lt Hinged Cover Holding Screw R
373. onvert percent to a decimal move the decimal two places to the left For example 40 would be expressed as 0 40 and 100 would be 1 00 To convert milliamps mA to Amperes A or Amps move the decimal three places to the left For example 1OmA would convert to 010A and 130mA would convert to 0 130A Step 1 Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation Note that this step does not apply to Power Supply Modules which are covered in Step 2 The values needed for this calculation are found in the Load Requirements table in the Calculating Power Supply Loading section in Chapter 4 Power Supplies We will use the basic electrical power formula in these calculations Power in Watts Voltage in Volts x Current in Amps We will assume that all input power to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat The procedure is Look up the module in the Load Requirements table Chapter 4 and obtain the current values for each of the three power supply voltages listed The voltage is printed at the head of each column All modules use the 5VDC supply and a relatively few modules also use one or both of the two 24VDC supplies Fora given module calculate the power dissipation for each column in the table that contains a current value by multiplying the current value in Amps times the voltage for that column For modules using more than one voltage add the calculated power values to arrive at the total for t
374. or DEFLOW determines how the outputs will behave when the module is toggled from RUN to STOP mode When this value is set to HOLD the default the outputs will retain their last state When you change this value to DEFLOW the output will go to zero 11 22 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 The screen displayed GFK O089SF Analog Output Modules Other Configuration Considerations for IC693ALG392 GFK 08S98F Channels are scanned in sequential contiguous order with channel 1 being the first to be scanned Note that the impact of the Current Voltage Output module on the CPU scan time is directly proportional to the number of analog channels that you have enabled The only allowable entries for the AQ Ref Adr are AQ addresses The only allowable entries for the I Ref Adr are I addresses The entry in SI Size will only accept 8 or 16 This field denotes the number of bits returned to the user The AQ Ref Ader field is the reference address for the AQ data and points to the start of the locations in the WAQ memory where the output data to the module begins Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32 760 or 32 767 to 32 752 depending on the range type selected For detailed information on the data format see the CPU Interface to Analog Modules section in this manual The I Ref Ader is the reference address for the I data and points to the start of the locatio
375. or Power Supply Serial number label Backplane connectors for I O or Option modules slots 2 4 Note that the slot labeled CPU 1 is the backplane connector for a CPU module however on Embedded CPU Expansion and Remote baseplates this would be another I O or Option module slot Slot labels May show just the slot number or may show type CPU or I O and number Compliance label Catalog number and certification UL CE etc label On an Embedded CPU baseplate this label will be located between Slots 4 and 5 Figure 3 1 Common Baseplate Features Two Baseplate Sizes Series 90 30 baseplates come in two sizes 5 slot and 10 slot Be aware that the Power Supply slot is not numbered and it is not considered to be one of the 5 or 10 slots So a 5 slot baseplate has slots for a Power Supply and five other modules and a 10 slot baseplate has slots for a Power Supply and ten other modules 3 2 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Baseplates Baseplate Terms Explained Backplane Refers to the circuit board in the baseplate It contains the baseplate circuitry and sockets for the plug in modules Rack This term applies to an assembly consisting of a baseplate power supply and other modules Rack Number In systems that require more than one rack each rack is given its own unique number which enables the CPU to distinguish one rack from another Slot Number Each module location c
376. oubleshooting since it can be substituted for actual inputs until the program or system is debugged It can also remain permanently in the system to provide 8 or 16 conditional input contacts for manual control of output devices There are two rows of green LED indicators which correspond to the position of each switch The corresponding LED turns ON when the switch is placed in the ON position and is OFF when the switch is in the OFF position The LEDs are arranged in two rows with 8 LEDs in each row The top row is labeled Al through A8 and the bottom row is labeled B1 through B8 This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 9 Specifications for IC693ACC300 Inputs per Module 8 or 16 switch selectable Off Response Time 20 milliseconds maximum On Response Time 30 milliseconds maximum Internal Power Consumption 120 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 17 The Input Simulator module does not require any field wiring just set the mode switch on the back of the module to 8 or 16 and install the module in the selected I O slot in a baseplate An illustration of the module is shown in the following figure a43117 A12345678 B12345678 Miniature Toggle Switches REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW Figure 6 15 IC693ACC300 Input Simulato
377. ould be checked then voltage checks could be made at the module terminal board the system terminal strip the machinery terminal strip the solenoid or relay connections etc until the source of the fault is found Sequential Event Recorder SER DOIO functional instruction These can be set up to capture the status of specified discrete addresses upon receiving a trigger signal They may be used to monitor and capture data about certain portions of the program even when unattended They can be useful for locating the cause of an intermittent problem For example a contact in a string of contacts that maintain power to a coil may from time to time momentarily open and interrupt normal operation However when maintenance personnel attempt to locate the problem all of these contacts may test OK By using the SER or DOIO instruction the status of all of these contacts can be captured within milliseconds of the time the fault occurs and the contact that opened will show a status of logic O at the moment of capture Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications Manual July 2000 GFK O898F Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing Modules Modules do not contain configuration switches The slot in each baseplate rack is configured using the configuration software to hold a particular module type catalog number This configuration information is stored in CPU memory Therefore when replacing a module you do not have to make any hardware
378. ount of 32000 In this mode you can enter up to 32767 for an overrange of approximately 10 24 volts output In the 10 to 10 volt range user data is scaled so that 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 In this range you can enter 32768 to 32767 for an overrange of approximately 10 24 volts to 10 24 volts Scaling of the voltage output for both the O to 10 volt range and the 10 to 10 volt range is as shown below a45718 a44658 32000 vee AQ AQ decimal decimal 32000 4 0 VOLTAGE V VOLTAGE V Bipolar Mode Unipolar Mode Figure 12 4 Scaling for Voltage Output Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module CPU Interface to the IC693ALG442 Analog Combo Module The Series 90 30 PLC uses the data within the AI and AQ data table to record analog values for use by the programmable controller For detailed information on the CPU interface to analog modules refer to the Hardware Description of Analog Module section at the beginning of this chapter Status Reporting The Analog Combo module module provides status information to the PLC This status information is updated once each PLC sweep and consists of the following items a health of the module all ranges m overload or open wire detect current output mode only m alarm low and high status input channels
379. our application build your own cables Refer to the IC693CBL308 309 data sheet in Appendix C of this manual for cable information Using a Weidmuller Terminal Block You may purchase a Weidmuller 912263 terminal block from your electronics dealer to use with a GE Fanuc prewired cable GE Fanuc Cables IC693CBL306 3 feet Imeter or IC693CBL307 6 feet 2 meters have connectors on each end These connect from the module connector to a connector on the DIN rail mounted Weidmuller terminal block Appendix C has a data sheet for these cables which includes a figure showing how they connect between the module and the Weidmuller terminal block GFK OS9SF Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 39 Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC negative logic 32 point output module TYPICAL CIRCUIT a44846 24V JK MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING o el Bl ble O 8OOOGOOE z el E A2 A3 o fo zE A7 ol OUTPUT XX USER Lol CIRCUIT LOAD MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING o o lo fo OSVPOCCDGOOAQQ eeg C3 C4 C5 i e gi e 8 O C7 C8 41 COM C eet o OUTPUT USER CIRCUIT LOAD INTERNA CIRCUIT MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERMINALS WIRING o o Jo lo lo COA0OOOCOAG 2 E R B3
380. ove the cursor to the desired rack and slot location The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured 2 Press the 1m30 io key F1 You will then see a screen similar to the following UEN in feat out Be nix Ee in eeout ke nix koter 6 Oe UG gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog M I NLMIONTESTHIG T ENE ONFIG VALID INGREPLACE p 3 Press the a out key F5 Your screen will now look like the one displayed below frack D Oi Beebe Bee beet Bees beter gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK J SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog CATALOG DESCRIPTION TYPE 1 IC693ALG390 OUTPUT ANALOG ZFT VOLTAGE QALGUZ 2 IC693ALG391 OUTPUT ANALOG ZFT CURRENT QALGIZ 3 IC69SALG392 OUTPUT ANALOG GPT ALGE 4 ALGOUTZ GENERIC OUTPUT ANALOG 2 CH 5 ALGOUT4 GENERIC OUTPUT ANALOG 4 CH lt lt CURSOR TO THE DESIRED CATALOG NUMBER AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY gt gt lt lt PRESS PGDN KEY FOR NEXT PAGE PGUP KEY FOR PREVIOUS PAGE gt gt I LMSON TES THIG ae ae ONFIG VALID ae E 4 Move the cursor to the IC693ALG392 selection as shown above Then press Enter Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules yi The next screen that appears will look like the one displayed below gt SERIES 90 30 MODULE IN RACK SLOT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Catalog DIRT Ree ks I LM9ON TES THIG aa TEL REPLACE OUTPUT ANALOG GPT
381. ow labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 8 Specifications for C693MDL646 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC Inputs per Module 16 one group with a single common Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Input Current 7 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 11 5 to 30 volts DC Off state Voltage 0 to 5 volts DC On state Current 3 2 mA minimum Off state Current 1 1 mA maximum On response Time 1 ms typical Off response Time 1 ms typical Power Consumption 80 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Power Consumption 125 mA from the Isolated 24 volt backplane bus or from user supplied power Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 15 Ki IC693MDL646 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 24 volt DC positive negative logic in
382. ow voltage module There are no fuses on this module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 12 Specifications for C693MDL740 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 16 two groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between groups Output Current 0 5 amps maximum per point 2 amps maximum per common Output Characteristics Inrush Current 4 78 amps for 10 ms Output Voltage Drop 1 volt maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 110 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL740 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC positive logic 0 5 amp output module a43098 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING 0000 folelo z e E BAGN ji ac S O0 OTHER r z g NO i i g A IITE olele olle e fe fe B O0 Figure 7 22 IC693MDL740 Output Module Field Wiring a45049 4 TOTAL 3 MODULE LOAD CURRENT AMPS 10 C 20
383. page m Locate PLC racks away from other components that generate large amounts of heat such as transformers power supplies or power resistors m Locate PLC racks away from components that generate electrical noise such as relays and contactors Locate PLC racks away from high voltages components and wiring such as circuit breakers and fusible disconnects transformers motor wiring etc This not only reduces the chance of introducing electrical noise into the PLC but makes it safer for personnel working on the PLC m Locate PLC racks at a convenient level that allows technicians reasonable access for maintaining the system Route sensitive input wires away from electrically noisy wires such as discrete output and AC wiring This can be facilitated by grouping I O modules to keep Output modules separated from sensitive Input modules m The PLC racks each require a 4 clearance space on all four sides 6 inches on the right end if using I O Bus Expansion Cables to ensure adequate ventilation cooling See the Baseplates chapter for baseplate size and clearance requirement information Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 PLC Layout Example GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines Figure 2 1 Series 90 30 Example Layout 1 Series 90 30 PLC 10 slot rack 2 Wireway Wire Duct 3 Field device connection terminal block 4 Motor connection terminal block 5 Mo
384. periment with the shield ground point location However in general it is usually best to ground the analog input cable shields as close to the source of the noise as possible which is usually at the device analog source end Cable shield should be grounded at one end only Also it is best to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy environment Shielding for Analog Input Modules Generally the shield for analog input cables should be grounded at the analog source as shown in the next figure However ground connections for each channel labeled COM and GND on the terminal board are provided for connecting shields at the analog input module if appropriate An analog input module s COM terminals connect to the analog circuit common in the module The GND terminals connect to the baseplate frame ground The shields may be connected to either COM or GND Technological advances used in electronic circuit design are often aimed at making equipment smaller faster and more sensitive This effort increases the concern for electrical noise Therefore shielding and grounding are important when installing a Series 90 30 PLC system It is impossible to provide a practical installaton guide that covers all possible application designs Sometimes experimentation with different grounding methods under actual operating conditions is required to achiev
385. plates have the same mounting dimensions Baseplates must be mounted in the orientation as shown in the following figures for proper cooling Embedded CPU 311 313 and 323 Baseplate Dimensions Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Models 311 313 and 323 baseplates are shown below a45422 102 REMOVABLE I O 20 DIA 5 08 l 5 12 TYPICAL 130 ve HINGED SIDE VIEW DOOR i 45 59__ p ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING Figure 3 14 Model 311 and 313 5 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Require ments Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Baseplates a45421 4 00 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 102 400 MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS 102 REMOVABLE TERMINAL 145 BLOCK 20 DIA 5 08 5 12 HINGED SIDE VIEW TYPICAL 130 499 DOOR Figure 3 15 Model 323 10 Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements Modular CPU Expansion and Remote Baseplate Dimensions Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Modular CPU baseplates are shown below l FRONT VIEW HINGED SIDE VIEW 20 a45424 SS 400 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES l gt 102 l 409 MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS 102 REMOVABLE O 5 59 I _ TERMINAL 142 SEE BLOCK NOTE 20 DIA 5 0
386. ply 12 VDC and all 32 inputs ON Isolated 5V Supply 5 volts DC 5 Current limit 150 mA typical Maximum number of inputs ON is dependent on ambient temperature as shown in the figure below Refer to data sheet GFK 0867C or later revision for product standards and general specifications 8 5 12V SUPPLY 245136 NUMBER OF 6 15V SUPPLY INPUTS GROUP ON 4 4 INPUTS PER GROUP ON 2 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 17 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL654 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Input Modules 6 IC693MDL654 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figures provide wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 5 12 volt DC TTL pos neg logic input module gi i 5V a45036 10K S 0 01 a45037 76 Be ao Bo FUJITSU CONNECTOR PINS A1 A12 B1 B12 MODULE POINT NUMBERS ARE SHOWN IN BOLD TEXT INTERNALLY GENERATED 5V SUPPLY MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF AN EXTERNAL USER SUPPLY Figure 6 18 Field Wiring 5 12 Volt DC TTL Pos Neg Logic 32 Point Input Module IC69MDL654 GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 23 Field Wiring Work Sheet for C693MDL654 The following table is provided for the convenience of our customers as an aid to wiring 32 point I O modules that have 24 pin connectors using cable IC693CBL315 It includes
387. ppendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL310 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 120 volt AC output module a43095 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING 022 ae 1000 L are r gt VA N OPTICAL 47 COUPLER eile E OTHER CIRCUITS O O a43852 4 AMPS TOTAL MODULE LOAD CURRENT 2 AMPS AMPS 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 7 3 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL310 GFK 0898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 5 7 6 120 240 Volt AC Output 2 Amp 8 Point IC693MDL330 This 2 amp AC output module has a catalog number with a D or later suffix e IC693MDL330D previous versions modules with a C or earlier suffix were rated at 1 amp The 120 240 volt 2 Amp AC Output module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 8 output points in two isolated groups with four points in each group Each group has a separate common associated with it The two commons are not tied together inside the module This allows each group to be used on different phases of the AC supply or they can be powered from the same supply Each group is protected with a 5 amp fuse for each comm
388. pter of this manual contains rack dimensions and minimum ventilation clearance distances required around the racks The Cables chapter contains clearance dimensions for cables that mount on the front of modules GF K O898F Appendix F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation F 5 GFK O0898F Numbers 32 Point modules installation installing AC DC high capacity power supply illustration of 4 4 overvoltage protection devices 2 39 specifications AC DC power supplies overcurrent protection status indicators 4 20 timing diagram AC DC standard power supply ac power source connections 4 5 dc power source connections 4 5 illustration of 4 2 overvoltage protection devices 2 39 4 5 14 20 specifications Ae ter bracket for 10 slot baseplate 2 10 Analog combo module I status information 12 15 block diagram 12 11 configuration with Logicmaster 90 30 12 13 with the hand held programmer 12 24 configuration pata current operation 12 4 E2 COMMREQ input ranges 12 1 LEDs 112 7 location in system output modes 12 6 output ranges 12 1 power requirements 12 7 ramp mode operation references used 12 8 specifications status reporting 12 7 terminal pin assignments 12 9 values from CPU to module for output channels 12 17 Index voltage operation 12 4 wiring diagram 12 10 Analog current voltage output
389. put devices to the user common or negative power bus or negative logic characteristics in that it sources current through the input devices to the user common or positive power bus The input device is connected between the power bus and the module input Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table I Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate field devices must be supplied by the user LED indicators which provide the ON OFF status of each point are located at the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row This module uses the top row labeled A1 through 8 points 1 through 8 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 5 Specifications for C693MDL632 Rated Voltage 125 volts DC Positive or Negative Logic Input Voltage Range 0 to 150 volts DC Inputs per Module 8 two groups of four inputs Isolation 1500 volts between field si
390. put module a45034 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER CIRCUITS 4 gt gt gt aJa JoJ gt ais FV g COUPLER gt N e B m aed 24V OUT OV OUT NC O O O 0O OO OO 00 O ODO OO 0 FC wV W W NI Ja A p O Wy Sy Oy Ce Oy Oy O70 Oy Oy O Oy Cy JJ 00 Figure 6 13 Field Wiring 24 Volt DC Pos Neg Logic Input Module IC693MDL646 a45135 16 30V SUPPLY i NUMBER OF INPUTS 8 ON 4 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C Figure 6 14 Input Points vs Temperature for IC693MDL646 6 16 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Input Modules 6 Input Simulator 8 16 Point IC693ACC300 The Input Simulator module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller has 16 two position switches on the front of the module Each switch can be programmed as a discrete input device This module allows simulation of either 8 point or 16 point input modules A switch located in the rear of the module allows configuration of the module for either 8 or 16 points When the mode switch is set for 8 points only the first 8 switches can be used A switch in the ON position results in a logic 1 in the input table I This module requires no field connections The Input Simulator is a valuable tool when developing programs and tr
391. put wiring polarity must be consistent see the section DC Power Source Connections in Chapter 2 for details on this NOTE The DC Input only type supplies which are discussed later in this chapter are polarity sensitive Input Overvoltage Protection Devices This information applies to all Series 90 30 power supplies that have six terminal boards The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip This pin is normally connected to frame ground pin 3 with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3 and 4 If you want to Hi pot test this supply overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap Re enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap GFK 0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 5 a47106 3 i Frame Ground Jumper Strap Connects Overvoltage Protection Devices to Frame Ground Screw Terminals on Terminal Board Figure 4 3 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections to the Isolated 24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for external circuits within power limitation
392. quence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S I40 117 156 Selecting AI Reference After the starting I address has been selected pressing the ENT key again will cause the following screen to be displayed RO 03 HI DEN V gt S AI16 AI_ This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AI reference Note that the length of the status field 16 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AI on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will always reflect the currently active length of the status field In the AI field you can select the next available address the default by pressing the ENT key or by entering a specific address To enter a specific address press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key for example 3 5 then ENT RO 03 HI DEN V gt S ATI16 AI035 AI051 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY GFK O898F Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules 10 23 Removing Module From Configuration If required this module can be removed from the current configuration Assume that the module is currently configured in rack 0 slot 3 It can be deleted with the following sequence Initial Display
393. r The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Although this module is configured as a 16 point output only outputs I through 6 and 9 through 14 are available to be referenced in your program For example if the starting reference is QOO17 then valid references are Q17 through Q22 and Q25 through Q30 Table 7 3 Specifications for C693MDL310 Rated Voltage 120 volts AC Output Voltage Range 85 to 132 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 12 two groups of six outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between each group Output Current 0 5 amp maximum per point amp maximum per group at 60 C 140 F 2 amps maximum per group at 50 C 122 F Output Characteristics Inrush Current 5 amps maximum for one cycle Minimum Load Current 50 mA Output Voltage Drop 1 5 volts maximum Output Leakage Current 3 mA maximum at 120 volts AC On Response Time 1 ms maximum Off Response Time 1 2 cycle maximum Power Consumption 210 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in graph on following page Refer to A
394. r Module 6 18 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Input Modules 6 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input IC693MDL653 This 24 volt DC Positive Negative Logic Input module for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller provides 32 input points in four isolated groups with eight points in each group Each group has two common pins associated with it which are tied together internally The On and Off response times for this module are 2 milliseconds maximum This input module is designed to have both positive and negative logic characteristics When connected for positive logic it sinks current from the input device to the user common or negative power bus The input device is connected between the positive power bus and the circuit input When connected for negative logic it sources current through the input device to the user common or positive power bus The input device is connected between the negative power bus and the circuit input Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table 1 Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices such as pushbuttons limit switches and electronic proximity switches Power to operate field devices must be supplied by the user Connections to the input circuits are made from the user s input devices to a 50 pin connector mounted on the front of the module Prewired cables having a mating connecto
395. r on one end and the wires on the opposite end terminated with terminal lugs are available from GE Fanuc This module does not have LED indicators to indicate circuit status This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 10 Specification for IC693MDL653 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC Input Voltage Range 24 volts DC 10 20 Inputs per Module 32 four groups with two commons per group Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Input Current 7 5 mA average at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 15 volts DC minimum Off state Voltage 6 volts DC maximum On state Current 4 5 mA minimum Off state Current 2 mA maximum On response Time 2 ms maximum Off response Time 2 ms maximum Internal Power Consumption 5 mA 16 inputs on from 5 volt bus on the backplane The maximum number of inputs turned on at the same time should be limited to 16 or less Refer to data sheet GFK 0867C or later revision for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 19 Ki IC693MDL653 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 24 volt DC positive negative logic FAST input module TYPICAL CIRCUIT a44848 COMO l skeg neuro wv wv ae MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD MODULE CONNECTOR FIELD CIRCUITRY TERM
396. ral different LED arrangements on the various CPUs These are explained in the CPUs chapter of the Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK 0356 Option Module LED Indicators There are numerous LED arrangements on the various option modules The Option Modules chapter of the Series 90 30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK 0356 has some information on this subject It also directs you for each module to further information in the Documentation heading for each module Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software Detailed information about the following items are found in GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual and GFK 0466 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual Ladder Screens Contacts connections and coils displayed on the ladder logic screens that are ON passing power or energized are displayed in enhance brightness allowing the tracing of signals through the ladder logic program Addresses that refer to physical input I and AI and output signals Q and AQ can be checked against module status lights voltages etc to verify that the hardware is working properly Configuration Screens Normally the following information is obtained from the system documentation However if the system documentation is not available the configuration screens can be used to determine If the software configuration matches the actual hard
397. ramp is determined when the value of the corresponding AQ reference changes Once the ramp mode and step have been set changing the corresponding AQ value causes the output to ramp to the new value When time mode is specified the second COMMREQ data word contains the total time in milliseconds it will take for the output to ramp from the present output value to the final output value The present and final values are specified by the old and new values of the corresponding AQ reference Valid ramp time values range from 1 to 32000 which correspond to ramp times of millisecond to 32 seconds Once the ramp mode and time have been set changing the corresponding AQ value causes the output to ramp to the new value If an E2 COMMREQ is issued to the module to change the ramp settings while the indicated output is in the process of ramping the new ramp settings will take effect as follows Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module If the ramp mode is turned off during a ramp the output will step completely to the final value indicated by the corresponding AQ reference m If step mode is turned on during a ramp the new step is used as soon as the COMMREQ is processed assuming that the step is valid If time mode is turned on during a ramp the module will immediately begin a new ramp using the present output as the starting output and the present time as the
398. re 10 5 A D Bits vs Current Input ccc ee eeees 10 5 Figure 10 6 Scaling for Analog Current Input 10 6 Figure 10 7 Analog Current Input Module Block Diagram IC693ALG221 10 7 Figure 10 8 Field Wiring for 4 Channel Analog Current Input Module 10 8 Figure 10 9 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Block Diagram GFK O898F Table of Contents xxii Contents LO Ry 4 6 079 9 rarene eee eee ee eee eee 10 11 Figure 10 10 A D Bits vs Voltage Input for C693ALG222 10 12 Figure 10 11 Field Wiring for 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module IC693ALG222 Single Ended Mode cccccccccccccccccccccecs 10 14 Figure 10 12 Field Wiring for 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module IC693ALG222 Differential Mode cc ccc cree c cree cece e crc ececes 10 15 Figure 10 13 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Block Diagram WC OFA G222 garteelietivdeetatnaeeieeer eee 406 care aie 10 16 Figure 10 14 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module Block Diagram ERTE CAA 1g 4csave nb entareed etna ean eeatase ee enews 10 29 Figure 10 15 A D Bits vs Current Input for C693ALG223 10 30 Figure 10 16 Field Wiring for 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module TERI 22D ic ou eae E Raed ee eee 10 40 Figure 10 17 Field Wiring Alternate User Connections IC693ALG223 10 41 Figure 10 18 16 Channel Analog Current Input Module Block Diagram ODALS 6 i406 544 6405 bo eee eee ee ka ee
399. ression the cable shield should only be grounded at one end of the cable For Input modules it is generally preferable to ground the end that is in the noisiest environment usually the field device end For Output modules ground at the module end See Chapters 10 Analog Input 11 Analog Output and 12 Analog Combination for additional wiring information for specific modules Connections to an Analog module from user devices are made to screw terminals on a removable 20 terminal connector block mounted on the front of the module Actual terminals used are shown in the specifications for the individual modules General Analog Input Wiring Methods The following methods are for most applications the preferred methods However in some applications alternate methods may be used successfully The examples shown later in this section discuss and illustrate a variety of possible wiring arrangements Using a Terminal Strip Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from the terminal strip to each input circuit on the module s terminal board terminals Connect each cable s shield to one point on the metal panel next to the terminal strip When attaching to a painted surface first remove the paint around the tapped hole and use an appropriate ring terminal machine screw lockwasher and flat washer Do do not connect the shields at the module end cut shield off at module end of cable and insulate wi
400. rface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 5 Specifications for C693MDL340 Rated Voltage 120 volts AC Output Voltage Range 85 to 132 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 16 two groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between each group Output Current 0 5 amp maximum per point 3 amps maximum per group Output Characteristics Inrush Current 20 amps maximum for one cycle Minimum Load Current 50 mA Output Voltage Drop 1 5 volts maximum Output Leakage Current 2 mA maximum at 120 volts AC On Response Time 1 ms maximum Off Response Time 1 2 cycle maximum Power Consumption 315 mA all outputs ON from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL340 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 120 volt AC output module a44961 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER
401. ries 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Chapter Series 90 350 Power Supplies Power Supply Categories Series 90 30 power supplies are modular types that plug into the left slot of all 90 30 baseplates They have been placed into two categories for the purpose of this chapter AC DC Input Power Supplies m C693PWR321 Standard 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC input 30 watts total output m C693PWR330 High Capacity 120 240 VAC or 125 VDC input 30 watts total output DC Input Only Power Supplies m C693PWR322 24 48 VDC input 30 watts total output IC693PWR328 48 VDC input 30 watts total output E m C693PWR331 High Capacity 24 VDC input 30 watts total output m C693PWR332 High Capacity 12 VDC input 30 watts total output The following table lists the features of the Series 90 30 PLC Power Supplies Power Supply Feature Comparison Table 4 1 Power Supply Comparison Table Catalog Number Load Capacity Nominal Input Output Capacities Voltage Power 7 IC693PWR321 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 125 VDC 5 VDC 15 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR330 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or 125 VDC 5 VDC 30 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR322 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC 5 VDC 15 watts 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts 24 VDC Relay 15 watts IC693PWR328 30 Watts 48 VDC 5 VDC
402. rinted on the module packaging Serial numbers are required to make a claim during the warranty period of the equipment All software product registration cards should be completed and returned to GE Fanuc See the Module Features section in this chapter for location of module serial numbers See the Common Baseplate Features section in the Baseplates chapter for location of baseplate serial numbers You should verify that all components of the system have been received and that they agree with your order If the parts received do not agree with your order call Programmable Control Customer Service toll free in Charlottesville VA at 1 800 432 7521 A Customer Service representative will provide further instructions If you require assistance with your installation the GE Fanuc Technical Service Hotline personnel in Charlottesville VA are available to help you North American customers should call toll free at SO0 GE FANUC 1 800 433 2682 International customers should dial direct 504 978 6036 The GE Fanuc web site support address is www gefanuc com support plc Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting has additional telephone numbers and troubleshooting information Warranty Claims Record the serial number of the defective item and contact your distributor for instructions GFK 0898F 2 1 System Layout Guidelines Because of the differences from one system to another it is not practical to try to discuss
403. rm of channel x using absolute mode word 2 holds the new alarm value 002x Change low alarm of channel x using relative mode word 2 holds the change of the alarm value 003x Change high alarm of channel x using relative mode word 2 holds the change of the alarm value 004x Channel x ramp mode off places channel in standard mode 005x Channel x ramp step mode on word 2 holds the step taken each millisecond 006x Channel x ramp time mode on word 2 holds the total ramp time OOCO Clear I error code word 2 is ignored 1 through 4 are valid channels for changing alarm levels 1 and 2 are valid channels for setting ramp modes You can change the high and low alarm limits for any of the four input channels Two modes are available to modify the alarm data absolute mode and relative mode m When using absolute mode the alarm data sent by the COMMREQ specifies the actual new alarm value 8 When using relative mode the alarm data specifies the positive or negative change in the alarm value that is added to the present value The module verifies that the new alarm limit requested is not out of range and does not violate the condition HIGH gt LOW If an invalid request is made to change an alarm value the corresponding error code will be returned in the upper four bits of the first byte of I references assigned to the module E2 COMMREQ Example The following ladder logic provides an example of sett
404. rows with eight green LEDs in each row and a red LED centered between and to the right of the two rows This module uses the first five LEDs labeled Al through 5 in the top row for output status The red F LED is a blown fuse indicator that turns ON if any fuse should blow An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot in a Series 90 30 PLC system and it should be configured as an 8 point output with programs referencing the five least significant bits Table 7 6 Specifications for C693MDL390 Rated Voltage 120 240 volts AC Output Voltage Range 85 to 264 volts AC 50 60 Hz Outputs per Module 5 each output isolated from the others Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between each output Output Current 2 amps maximum per point 5 amps maximum per module at 45 C 113 F 2 amps maximum per module at 60 C 140 F Output Characteristics Inrush Current 25 amps maximum for one cycle Minimum Load Current 100 mA Output Voltage Drop 1 5 volts maximum Output Leakage Current 3 mA maximum at 120 volts AC 6 mA maximum at 240 volts AC On Response Time 1 ms maximum O
405. ry to personnel and damage to the module or baseplate may result Also attempts to force a module into an improper slot type will result in damage to the module and or the baseplate Modules will mount in the correct slot type easily with a minimum of force Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a baseplate slot Check that module catalog number matches slot configuration Each slot is or will be assigned a particular module type during configuration A Power Supply module must be installed in the left end unnumbered slot only and a CPU module and some special Option modules can only be installed in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate I O Modules and most Option modules install in slots numbered 2 and higher Grasp the module firmly with terminal board toward you and with rear pivot hook facing away from you m Align the module with the desired baseplate slot and connector Tilt the module upwards so that top rear pivot hook of the module engages the baseplate s top module retainer m Swing the module downward until the module s connector engages the baseplate s backplane connector and the release lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place in the baseplate s bottom module retainer m Visually inspect the module to be sure that it it properly seated a43055A PIVOT HOOK a a BACKPLANE CONNECTOR RELEASE LEVER Figure 2 3 Installing a Module Chapter 2 General Install
406. s 66 4 26 Table 5 1 Guide to Chapter Location for Discrete I O Module Specifications 5 2 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 GFK O898F Specifications for IC693MDL230 000e0ee Specifications for IC693MDL231 eee eee eee Specifications for IC693MDL240 000ee Specifications for IC693MDL241 cee eee eee Specifications for IC693MDL632 cece eeees Specifications for IC693MDL634 cece eees Table of Contents 6 1 6 3 6 5 6 7 Contents XXVI Table 6 7 Specifications for IC693MDL645 Table 6 8 Specifications for IC693MDL646 Table 6 9 Specifications for IC693ACC300 Table 6 10 Table 6 11 Table 6 12 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 7 15 Table 7 16 Table 7 17 Table 7 18 GFK O898F IC693DVM300 Specifications I1C693DVM300 Connections Specification for IC693MDL653 eee ee eees Specifications for IC693MDLO654 eee eens Specifications for IC693MDLO655 eee cece Specifications for IC693MDL310 Specifications for IC693MDL330 Specifications for IC693MDL340 Specifications for IC693MDL390 Specifications for IC693MDL730
407. s D TBQC Components for 32 Point Dual Connector Modules The 32 point modules do not require a new faceplate since they are equipped with a dual connector faceplate as a standard feature Since each module has two 24 pin connectors they each require two cables and two terminal blocks Also since the modules two connectors are oriented differently see example in figure below the two cables are different One is called a right side cable and the other a left side cable Note These terminal blocks will not work with the 32 point I O modules that have 50 pin connectors A1234 5678 B1234 5678 C1234 5678 D1234 5678 INPUT 5 12 VDC POS NEG LOGIC 3 0 mA Pt at 5VDC 8 5 mA Pt at 12VDC Pin B12 Pin B1 Left Side Right Side Connector Connector Pin B1 Pin B12 Figure C 8 Example of 32 Point dual connector Module IC693MDL654 Terminal Block The terminal block has three rows of terminals arranged in three levels as shown in Figure D 1 The terminals feature an easy to use captive screw rising cage type connection system Catalog numbers for the terminal block and the modules it can be used with are listed below IC693ACC337 IC693MDL654 Input 5 12 VDC TTL Pos Neg Logic 32 points IC693MDL655 Input 24 VDC Pos Neg Logic 32 points IC693MDL752 Output 5 24 VDC Neg Logic 32 points IC693MDL753 Output 12 24 VDC Pos Logic 0 5A 32 points GFK O898F Appendix D Term
408. s moa voc rosenes O e e TeaRMDLASS impa s2 VDC Posies O a f C E S N S NI SNI S N N N S NI f N NI N Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Discrete I O Module Information Discrete I O Modules GFK 0898F Discrete I O Module Point Density There are two density categories for these modules Standard Density Modules Standard density modules have up to 16 circuits also called points per module These modules are equipped with a removeable terminal board See the following figure High Density Modules High density modules have 32 circuits per module These modules have either a 50 pin connector or two 24 pin connectors mounted on their faceplates Connection choices are discussed later in this chapter Standard Density Discrete I O Module Features Standard Density 16 points or less Modules have the following features refer to the following figure Removeable Terminal Board You can remove the terminal board from the module in order to wire it if desired Then when you are finished wiring it you can easily reinstall it on the module However some prefer to leave it on the module when wiring If you ever need to replace a module you don t have to do any rewiring if your old terminal board is still in good condition Simply remove the wired terminal board from the old module and install it on the new module The terminal board screw terminals are also
409. s Expansion Cables C 2 Includes Instructions for Building Custom Length Cables Description I O bus expansion cables IC693CBL300 301 312 313 314 called Wye cables have a single male 25 pin D connector on one end and a two headed one male one female 25 pin D connector on the other end as shown in A of the figure The 50 foot 15m IC693CBL302 cable has a single male connector on the CPU baseplate end and a single terminated male connector on the expansion baseplate end The 3 foot cable IC693CBL300 can also be used as a WYE adapter cable to simplify building custom length cables see the section Cable Application Suggestions later in this Chapter FEMALE CONNECTOR a43853 5 3 6 26 FOOT aan oer MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 50 FOOT CABLE C D MALE MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure B 1 Detail of I O Bus Expansion Cables Cable Lengths O IC693CBL300 3 feet 1 meter continuous shield IC693CBL301 6 feet 2 meters continuous shield IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314 50 feet 15 meters continuous shield IC693CBL312 0 5 feet 0 15 meters continuous shield IC693CBL313 25 feet 8 meters continuous shield OOO oO Function of Cables The I O Bus expansion cables are used to extend the I O bus to expansion or remote baseplates in a Series 90 30 I O system when additional I O slots are needed or baseplates are required some distance from the CPU baseplate The prewired I O bus expansion cables ca
410. s can be changed in the same manner Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key or by pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Output Modules Saved Configurations Configurations that contain an 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read from that device into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later Series 90 30 CPU cannot be read into a Series 90 20 CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations GFK O898F Chapter II Analog Output Modules 11 29 IC693ALG392 Analog Current Voltage Output Block Diagram The following figure is a block diagram of the 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module a47037 15V POWER Mii MICRO OPTO 15V PROCESSOR ISOLATION E BV CONVERTER O ICOM Q _FGND d VOLTAGE SUPERVISOR REFERENCE D A BACKPLANE INTERFACE VLSI a Se CURRENT O lout DRIVER X8 VOLTAGE l SERIES 90 30 PLC OUTPUT Q VOUT BACKPLANE RANGE O SELECT Vcom Figure 11 18 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output Module Block Diagram IC693ALG392 11 30 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Chapter IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O 2 Modu
411. s in this manual Chapter 1 provides introductory information Chapter 2 discusses installation Chapter 3 documents Series 90 30 baseplates and Chapter 4 documents Series 90 30 power supplies m Chapter 2 Discrete I O Module Specifications in the previous version has been divided into four chapters in this manual Chapter 5 General Discrete I O Module Information Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules and Chapter 8 Discrete Combination I O Modules Chapter 3 Analog I O Module Specifications in the previous version has been divided into four chapters in this manual Chapter 9 General Analog I O Module Information Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules and Chapter 12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination Module Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting has been added m Appendix C includes information on additional cables Preface v Preface Appendix D Information was added for the C693ACC337 a TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect terminal block for 32 point I O modules Also TBQC interface cable information has been added including a cross reference to obsolete cables m Appendix F This appendix was added to the manual It discusses how to calculate heat dissipation for Series 90 30 PLC components vi Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0S98F Preface Content of
412. s of the supply If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted the Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation 4 6 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GF K O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies DC Input Only Power Supplies IC693PW R322 Standard Power Supply 24 48 VDC Input The IC693PWR322 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 24 VDC or 48 VDC nominal inputs It will accept an input voltage range from 18 VDC to 56 VDC Although it is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 18 VDC it will not start with initial input voltages of less than 21 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 6 1C693PWR322 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Loe eee Input Output Capacities OA ala HO Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts a44854 O PWR IC693PWR322 GE Fanuc SYSTEM O STATUS Series 90 30 RUN INDICATORS O BATT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STANDARD POWER SUPPLY PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER O CONNECTIONS LASAN aas TEE FOR 50 WATT DC PO
413. s the first two digits following the first AQ on the second line of the display You can select the next available address or enter a specific address Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as AQ35 press the key sequence 3 5 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S AQ02 AQ035 0036 Once the AQ starting address has been assigned the key can be used to view the configured I and AI reference addresses For example if I17 and AI35 are used as starting addresses then the following screen will be displayed after pressing the key sequence UU RO 03 AIO 2 00 lt S I24 10017 0040 Scrolling forward from this screen using the key causes the following screen to be displayed ROQ 03 AIO 2 00 lt S AI04 AI0035 0038 Removing Module From Configuration The module can be removed from the current rack configuration at any time during the configuration process by pressing the DEL ENT key sequence The following screen will be displayed RO 03 EMPTY lt S If the CLR key is pressed after the DEL key instead of the ENT key the delete operation will be aborted 12 26 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Selecting Module Stop M
414. s to User Loads 7 46 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Field Wiring Work Sheet for C693MDL752 Discrete Output Modules The following table is provided for the convenience of our customers as an aid to wiring the 24 pin connectors using cable IC693CBL315 It includes all of the required wiring information in one table This table has the following information O module point number A1 A8 B1 B8 Cl C8 D1 D8 voltage and common points O connector pin number Al through A12 and B1 through B12 Oo cable pair number pair 1 through pair 12 O wire color code base color or base color with tracer color Columns are also provided for circuit references and customer wire numbers Please copy and use the work sheets on this and the following page as needed when wiring the 5 24 Volt DC TTL Negative Logic 32 Point Output module Wiring for Module Groups A and B connector on right front of module Module Connector Cable Reference Point Pin Pair Wire Color Code Wire Number Number Number Number Al Al 1 Brown A2 Bl 7 Violet A3 A2 l Brown Black A4 B2 7 Violet Black A5 A3 2 Red A6 B3 8 White A7 A4 2 Red Black A8 B4 8 White Black A Common A5 3 Orange A Common B5 9 Gray AVIN A6 3 Orange Black N C B6 9 Gray Black N C A7 4 Yellow BVIN B7 10 Pink B Common A8 4 Yellow Black B Common B8 10 Pink Black
415. seplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 11 Specifications for IC693MDL734 Rated Voltage 125 volts DC Output Voltage Range 10 8 to 150 volts DC Outputs per Module 6 isolated Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between outputs Output Current 1 amp maximum per point Output Characteristics Inrush Current 15 89 amps for 10 ms Output Voltage Drop 1 volt maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 7 ms maximum Off Response Time 5 ms maximum Power Consumption 90 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Discrete Output Modules IC693MDL734 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 125 volt DC positive negative logic 1 amp output module a45142 NEGATIVE POSITIVE LOGIC LOGIC Hl E oy i ai i ell Q U z T A2 oR T ie Zz Z O O Ji T Q J at zz O O ce gt Q X ai 58 5 l l GC OG e D on Q JJ D 0l O O 3 ele PETINE E SN Z O Figure 7 20 IC697MDL734 Output Module Field Wiring a45240 6 6 AMPS TOTAL MODULE LOAD CURRENT AMPS EN N 0 10 C 20 C 30C 40 C 50 C 60 C AMBIENT TEMPERAT
416. signal for each group is monitored electronically If a short circuit occurs the output points in the group turn off and the red LED turns on The LEDs indicating output point status will not turn off This protection does not protect individual outputs from exceeding their ratings but will protect the board in case of a short circuited load To reset electronic short circuit protection remove the 12 24 VDC user supply to the module The module has two electronic short circuit protection circuits each protects eight outputs the first circuit protects Al A8 the second circuit protects B1 B8 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module There are no fuses on this module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 14 Specifications for C693MDL742 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 16 two groups of eight outputs each Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side 500 volts between groups Output Current 1 amp maximum per point 4 amps maximum per group at 50 C 3 amps maximum per group 60 C
417. sistor 0 to 20 mA 0to5 V range jumper present O to 10 V with external resistor The primary power source for the module is the isolated 24 VDC power supplied by the PLC power supply Two terminals are also provided on the module s I O terminal board for user supplied 24 volts This allows you to provide a standby power supply so that the outputs can continue to hold their value 1f the internal supply is lost and Hold Last State is selected You may also want to supply the module voltage to reduce the load on the PLC isolated 24 VDC power supply The user supply will be used when the applied voltage is higher than the isolated 24 VDC supply which can range from 21 5 volts to 26 5 volts An internal voltage source of about 24V is generated in the module to drive the current loop outputs The current loop drivers on the module are source type drivers This means that a positive current flows out of the current loop outputs so that the user s loads can be returned to common A resistor is placed in series with the common return to limit ground loop currents To minimize the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0S98F Analog Output Modules capacitive loading and noise all field connections to the module should be wired using a good grade of twisted shielded instrumentation cable The shields should be connected to GND on the user terminal connector block The GND connection provides access to the baseplate fram
418. so consider the load capacity of the installed power supply and the total load requirements of all modules that are installed in the baseplate Refer to the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual GFK 0356 for details on power supplies and module load requirements Table 10 3 Specifications for 16 Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Number of Channels Input Current Ranges Calibration Update Rate Resolution at 0V to 10V Resolution at 10V to 10V Absolute Accuracy Linearity Isolation Common Mode Voltage Differential Cross Channel Rejection Input Impedance Input Filter Response Internal Power Consumption IC693ALG222 1 to 16 selectable single ended 1 to 8 selectable differential OV to 10V unipolar or 10V to 10V bipolar selectable each channel Factory calibrated to 2 5 mV per count on OV to 10V unipolar range 5 mV per count on 10 to 10V bipolar range 6 msec all 16 single ended channels 3 msec all 8 differential channels 2 5 mV 1 LSB 2 5 mV 5 mV 1 LSB 5 mV 0 25 of full scale 25 C 77 F 0 5 of full scale over specified operating temperature range lt 1 LSB 1500 volts between field side and logic side 11V bipolar range f gt 80 db from DC to 1 kHz gt 500K ohms single ended mode gt 1M ohms differential mode 41 Hz single ended mode 82 Hz differential mode 112 mA maximum from the backplane 5 VDC bus 41
419. ss sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Three CIMPLICITY Helpmate PROMACRO VersaMax CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Logicmaster Series Five VersaPro CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series 90 VuMaster Field Control Motion Mate Series One Workmaster GEnet PowerTRAC Series Six All Rights Reserved GFK O898F RFI Standards The Series 90 30 PLC and its associated modules have been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule Part 15 Subpart J The Federal Communications Commission FCC requires the following note to be published NOTE This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in accordance with this instruction manual may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when op erated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of Communications
420. start time In all cases changing the value of the corresponding AQ reference will cause the output to begin a new ramp from the present output value Error Handling If the module receives E2 COMMREQ data that indicates an invalid channel or a step height or ramp time that is out of range the module will ignore the COMMREQ and return an error code in the first byte of I data assigned to the module The error code will be cleared when a Clear Errors E2 COMMREQ is sent to the module or when the module is reconfigured Range checking of AQ values received by the module is performed before the values are used in ramp computations AQ data which is out of range is clipped to the nearest valid value by the module GFK O898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 19 E2 COMMREQ for IC693ALG442 12 20 The E2 COMMREQ allows you to modify the input alarm limits set the output ramp mode and parameters and clear the I error code The E2 COMMREQ uses the standard COMMREQ format See Chapter 4 of the Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0467 and Chapter 8 of the Hand Held Programmer for Series 9030 90 20 Micro Programmable Controllers User s Manual GFK 0402 for more information on the COMMREQ E2 COMMREQ Command Block The E2 COMMREQ command block consists of 10 words as shown in Table 3 25 Example E2 COMMREQ data in hexadecimal format is included in the table for clarity Ta
421. supply 12 VDC illustration of 4 16 High Capacity DC power supply 24 VDC illustration of 4 13 Horner Electric Inc E 2 modules ordering telephone number Hotline technical support 13 9 Hotline PLC 2 1 I O bus expansion cable description of C 2 I O bus terminator plug requirements C 3 maximum cable distance C 3 maximum number in system C 3 I O Bus Expansion cables Application examples building C 2 wiring diagrams C 8 I O bus termination information T O cables for 32 point modules I O expansion bus termination 3 13 C 5_ system connections V O Expansion Bus cables 3 12 T O faceplate TBQCD 3 I O interface cables for 32 point modules C 16 C 19 C 26 I O module example of 1 2 Figure standard density 5 4 I O module specifications 5 1 12 24 vdc 0 5A positive logic out 32 pts 12 24 vdc negative logic out 0 5 amp 16 ps 7 26 Index 12 24 vdc negative logic out 0 5 amp 8 ps 7 20 12 24 vdc negative logic out 2 amp 8 pts 715 12 24 vdc negative logic out 32 pts 7 39 12 24 vdc pos logic escp out 1 amp 16 pts 7 28 12 24 vdc positive logic out 0 5 amp 16 pts 7 24 12 24 vdc positive logic out 0 5 amp 8 pts 7 18 12 24 vdc positive logic out 2 amp 8 pts 7 12 12 24 vdc positive logic out 32 pts 7 41 120 vac in 16 ots 6 5 120 vac in relay out 8 in 8 out 8 1 120 vac isolated in 8
422. t a Logic 1 level PWR Lights to indicate the presence of 26 VDC nominal input power on terminals 1 and 2 GFK 0898F fad 7 2 DVM Specifications Table 7 1 C693DVM300 Specifications OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS Outputs Channels per Module 4 Isolation 2500 Vrms optical isolation Nominal Output Voltage 24 Vdc Power Supply for Output Channels 26 Vdc nominal 21 Vdc minimum 35 Vdc maximum Output Current 1 6 Amps maximum per channel 6 4 Amps maximum total per module Output Voltage Drop fully loaded 0 32 Vdc Off state leakage current 26 uA at 26 Vdc operating voltage Turn on response time lt 1 uS with resistive load Turn off response time lt 1 uS with resistive load Output protection per channel Reversed biased zener diode for free wheeling inductive current Also 36 Volt transorb for ESD and surge protection INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Input Voltage 5 VDC TTL nominal 12Vdc Maximum Logic 1 Level Logic 1 V gt 3 5 Vdc Logic 0 V lt 0 7 Vdc Input Current 3 8 mA nominal Input protection 13 3 Volt transorb AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS Voltage and Current 15 VDC 0 3A and 15 VDC 0 2A Isolation Not isolated MODULE POWER REQUIREMENTS Power Consumption Does not consume 5 6 Watts with all outputs on from external any power from PLC backplane supply connected to terminals 1 and 2 does not include power consumed by outputs Input Voltage 26 VDC nominal 35 VDC maximum continuo
423. t channel by pressing the key RO 03 HI DEN C gt S CHANNEL 2 4 20 Edit the range and low and high alarm limits as described for Channel 1 All active channels can be changed in this manner Return to the initial display screen by pressing the ENT key or by pressing the lt key until the initial screen is displayed Saved Configurations 10 38 Configurations that contain a 16 Channel Analog Current Input module can be saved to an EEPROM or MEM card and read into the CPU at a later time MEM cards and EEPROMs containing these configurations can be read into any Release 4 or later CPU Refer to Chapter 2 of the Hand Held Programmer User s Manual for detailed information on the Save and Restore operations Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Analog Input Modules IC693ACC223 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections Connections to this module from user devices are made to screw terminals on a removable 20 terminal connector block mounted on the front of the module The actual terminals used are described in the following table and are shown in the following wiring diagrams Terminal Assignments Pin assignments for the 20 terminal I O connector on the 16 Channel Analog Current Input module are as shown in the following table Table 10 10 Terminal Pin Assignments Pin Signal Number Name Signal Definition 24VIN User supplied 24V Input provides loop power via 24VOUT terminal pin 2
424. t data to the module begins Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output data as an integer value from 0 to 32 767 or 32768 to 32 767 depending on the range type selected For detailed information of the data format see the CPU Interface to Analog Modules section at the beginning of this chapter Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module I1 Status Information The I Ref Adr is the reference address for the I data and points to the start of the locations in the I memory that is the Input Table where status information from the module is reported You can select the number of I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the I Size field Allowable values in the I Size field are 8 16 and 24 which refer to the number of I locations reported to the PLC For I SIZE values 8 or greater the data brought back is in the format described in the following tables First eight I locations available for I SIZE values 8 16 24 I1 Locations Description I Module OK 0 indicates NOT OK 1 indicates module OK l 1 User Supply OK Indicates when user supply is in specified limits reads a 0 when User supply below specified limit 1 when User supply OK PI 2 amp Pl 3 Reserved for future modules Not used in this module 1 4 through 7 CF See definition for these bits below t l 4through 7 upper 4 bits of first I byte hold a
425. t of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 7 Specifications for IC693MDL645 Rated Voltage 24 volts DC Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC Inputs per Module 16 one group with a single common Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Input Current 7 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 11 5 to 30 volts DC Off state Voltage 0 to 5 volts DC On state Current 3 2 mA minimum Off state Current 1 1 mA maximum On response Time 7 ms typical Off response Time 7 ms typical Power Consumption 80 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Power Consumption 125 mA from the Isolated 24 volt backplane bus or from user supplied power Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 13 Ki IC693MDL645 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 24 volt DC positive negative logic input module a45034 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING OTHER CIRCUITS gt gt gt aJa JoJ gt Na N7 Aor COUPLER gt N ge B s 5 sad 24V OUT OV OUT NC OO 0 0o 000 0 0 CO O CO OO wV W W NI jor p O Oy Sy Dye Op Oy Oy O O O0O O O 0 0 0
426. t the top of the module This LED block has two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row the top row labeled Al through 8 points 1 through 8 and the bottom row labeled B1 through 8 points 9 through 16 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 4 Specifications for C693MDL241 Rated Voltage 24 volts AC or 24 volts DC Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC or 0 to 30 volts AC 50 60 Hz Inputs per Module 16 one group with a single common Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Input Current 7 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 11 5 to 30 volts AC or DC Off state Voltage 0 to 4 volts AC or DC On state Current 3 2 mA minimum Off state Current 1 mA maximum On response Time 12 ms typical Off response Time 28 ms typical Power Consumption 80 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Power Consumption 125 mA from the Isolated 24 volt backplane bus or from user supplied power Number of inputs on is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in figure 6
427. ta Sheets IC 693CBL321 322 323 I O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector 24 Pin Note These cables became obsolete in late 1998 They were replaced by six cables 1C693CBL329 1C693CBL330 1C693CBL331 1C693CBL332 IC693CBL333 and IC693CBL334 See the data sheet for these cables for details The replacement cables have right angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC Function of cable These cables are used with 16 point I O modules that are equipped with a TBQC I O faceplate adaptor Each cable has a straight 24 pin female connector on both ends Each cable provides a connection from the module to a connector mounted on a terminal block assembly These cables are wired pin to pin that is pin Al to pin Al pin A2 to pin A2 etc An I O faceplate assembly catalog number IC693ACC334 is required which snaps onto the module in place of the module s standard 20 pin terminal block assembly Five different terminal blocks are available to allow a variety of I O modules to use this accessory see Appendix J for details on the TBQC assemblies Cable Specifications Cable Length I1C693CBL321 3 feet 1 meter 1C693CBL322 6 feet 2 meters 1C693CBL323 1 5 feet 0 5 meters Cable Type 12 twisted pairs with overall aluminum polyester shield and 24 AWG drain wire 24 Pin Female Connectors 2 Equivalent to Fujitsu FCN 363J024 or equivalent Length of cable is measured from backs
428. ta sheet type material for these modules Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules Provides data sheet type material for these modules Chapter 12 C693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module Provides data sheet type material for this module Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Discusses features of the Series 90 30 PLC useful for troubleshooting I O modules including module LED indicators and programming software features Provides tables of replaceable fuses spare parts and preventive maintenance suggestions Includes information on how obtain help and support from GE Fanuc Appendix A Glossary of Analog Terms This appendix explains some general terms relating to analog measurements Appendix B GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals Standards General Specifications This appendix describes the agency approvals standards and general specifications for the listed GE Fanuc products Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets This appendix provides data sheets for cables used in the I O system Appendix D Terminal Block Quick Connect This appendix describes the Terminal Block Quick Connect system which consists of an interposing terminal block I O faceplate and cable This assembly allows faster wiring of applicable discrete I O modules Appendix E Personal Computer Interface Cards These cards mount in a personal computer and serve as the CPU replacement for a PLC system This appendix gives an overview of the two PCIF cards sold by GE Fan
429. tallation Guidelines Analog Output Shield Grounding Example Three If using a terminal strip between the analog output module and the field devices user loads use the method in the following figure for grounding the cable shields Note that each cable is only grounded at one end the end closer to the Analog Output Module An optional external ground connection to the output module s GND terminal is shown for installations that require extra noise suppression PLC Enclosure J J D 3 D L a J zr J plelelsicis SISISISISIS LOAD COM OU USER 1 LOAD _ TN 7 _4 e a k SIS Optional O Ground GND Connection Shields Connected at Module end Only Analog Output _ noe Ea Earth Figure 2 25 Analog Output Shield Grounding when Terminal Strip is Used GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 37 AC Power Source Connections 2 38 AC Input Wiring to AC DC Power Supplies If the same AC power source is used to provide AC power to other baseplates in a Series 90 30 PLC System ensure that all AC input connections are identical at each rack Do not cross Line 1 L1 and Line 2 L2 A resulting difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage to equipment Each baseplate must be connected to a common ground Ensure that the protective cover is installed over all terminal boards During normal operation with an AC power source either 120
430. talog Number Length IC693CBL300 3 feet 1 meter continuous shield IC693CBL301 6 feet 2 meters continuous shield IC693CBL302 50 feet 15 meters continuous shield with built in terminator this is not a Wye cable IC693CBL312 0 5 feet 15 meters continuous shield IC693CBL3 13 25 feet 8 meters continuous shield Figure 3 10 I O Bus Expansion Cables Note The 3 foot cable IC693CBL300 can be used as a Wye adapter between custom built cables and Remote baseplates Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks Basically Remote racks provide the same functionality as Expansion racks but with the longer distance 700 feet 213 meters verses 50 feet 15 meters for Expansion racks capability To minimize unbalanced ground conditions Remote baseplates have extra isolation circuitry Unbalanced ground conditions can occur when systems are located long distances from each Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Baseplates other and do not share the same ground system However distance is not always the problem even racks that are mounted near each other can experience problems if the system is not grounded properly See Chapter 2 for grounding information The use of Remote racks requires a special consideration pertaining to scan time In order to operate at long distances the I O Bus runs at a lower clock speed compared to that used for Expansion racks when communicating
431. ter and damage the switch a43054 GEFanuc y SERIES 90 30 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER BASE 10 SLOT EXPANSION E cLoSED Switch pushed down on right side Figure 3 11 Rack Number Selection Switch Shown with Rack 2 Selected GFK 0898F Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates 3 15 Expansion Rack Connection Example The following example shows a system that includes Expansion baseplates PROGRAMMER NOTE Each signal pair on the I O bus must be terminated at the end of the I O bus with120 ohm resistors This ter mination can be done with the I O Bus Terminator Plug IC693ACC307 by using the 50 foot 15 meter cable IC693CBL302 with built in terminat ing resistors or by building a custom eee el th Fe I O BUS cable with the resistors installed in TERMINATOR the connector at the end of the bus SA PLUG See NOTE IC693ACC307 SERIAL ae BASEPLATE DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION EXPANSION BASEPLATE amin DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION EXPANSION BASEPLATE EXPANSION LEHI an nes EXPANSION BASEPLATE ETE Figure 3 12 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 a47057 NOTE TOTAL MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU BASEPLATE TO LAST EXPANSION BASEPLATE IS 50 FEET 15 METERS VO EXPANSION CABLES GFK O898F Series 90 30 Baseplates Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example The following example shows cable connections in a
432. th shrink tubing m Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded cable grounding the shield at the device end only cut shield off at terminal strip end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing If attaching shields to a painted surface first remove the paint around the connection Also keep the length of exposed outside of shield leads at the terminal strip and device ends as short as possible Direct Method Run a shielded cable from the field device transducer potentiometer etc directly to the module m Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module s terminal board Ground the shield at the field device end exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the noisy environment If attaching shields to a painted surface first remove the paint around the tapped hole and use an appropriate ring terminal machine screw lockwasher and flat washer Do not connect the shield at the module end cut shield off at module end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing TBQC Not Recommended for Analog Modules The Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC Assembly is_not recommended for use with analog modules due to cable shielding requirements GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 9 225 Analog Input Module Wiring Methods for Noise Suppression Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trial and error routine In troubleshooting noise problems sometimes it is beneficial to ex
433. these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors solder pin crimp pin and ribbon cable Each accessory kit contains enough components D connectors backshells contact pins etc to assemble ten single ended cables of the type specified for each Kit Table B 6 Catalog Numbers for 24 Pin Connector Kits GE Fanuc Vendor Catalog Number Catalog Number Description IC693ACC316 FCN 361J024 AU Solder eyelet receptacle Solder Eyelet Type FCN 360C024 B Backshell for above IC693ACC317 FCN 363J024 Crimp wire receptacle Crimp Type Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type connectors The solder eyelet connectors as provided in IC693ACC316 do not require any special tooling Crimped Contact Connectors as provided in IC693ACC317 require Hand Crimping Tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact Extraction Tool FCN 360T T001 H Ribbon Cable Connectors as provided in IC693ACC318 require Cable Cutter FCN 707T T001 H Hand Press FCN 707T T101 H Locator Plate FCN 367T T012 H These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor Three of the largest US distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at 800 522 0084 Milgray at 800 MILGRAY and Vantage at 800 843 0707 If none of these distributors service your area then contact Fujitsu Microelectronics in San Jose Californi
434. this Manual Chapter 1 Introduction to the Series 90 30 I O System This chapter provides general information about the Series 90 30 I O System and describes two ways that the Series 90 30 I O can be controlled Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines Discusses installation subjects such as mounting wiring and grounding Series 90 30 components Chapter 3 Series 90 30 Baseplates Describes the various types of baseplates gives dimension data and describes how to interconnect baseplates Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies Provides data sheet type material for each Series 90 30 power supply Chapter 5 General Discrete I O Module Information Provides a list of all Series 90 30 discrete I O modules and describes the various types Discusses general discrets subjects such as the definition of positive and negative logic as applicable to these modules Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules Provides data sheet type material for these modules Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules Provides data sheet type material for these modules Chapter 8 Discrete Combination I O Modules Provides data sheet type material for these modules Chapter 9 General Analog I O Module Information Provides a list of all Series 90 30 analog modules Discusses analog theory as applied to these modules Includes a table specifying the maximum number of the various analog modules permitted per Series 90 30 system Chapter 10 Analog Input Modules Provides da
435. through 16 for Single Ended or 1 through 8 for Differential Active Channel This number represents the number of channels to be converted Channels are scanned in sequential contiguous order with channel No 1 being the first channel scanned If more than eight channels are selected a second detail screen will be displayed to allow you to enter data in channels 9 through 16 Parameter Description The first Reference Address field contains the reference address for AI data The address points to Reference Address type selected The second Reference Address field contains the reference address for I data The address Reference Address I Size field points to the location in I memory where status information from the module begins You can select the number of I status locations reported to the PLC by editing the value in the The Mode field describes what type user connection to the terminal board is desired In Single Ended mode there are 16 inputs referenced to a single common In Differential mode each of the 8 inputs has its own signal and common thereby using two points on the terminal board for each channel Enter the number of I locations reported to the PLC Choices are 0 8 16 24 32 or 40 The data is brought back in the following format First eight I locations l e I 1 available for I SIZE values 8 16 24 32 and 40 Module OK User Supply OK 0 module NOT OK 1 mo
436. tion Examples Expansion System Cable Connections The following example shows cable connections in a system that has expansion baseplates but no remote baseplates PROGRAMMER NOTE Each signal pair on the I O bus must be terminated at the end of the I O bus with120 ohm resistors This ter mination can be done with the I O Bus Terminator Plug IC693ACC307 by using the 50 foot 15 meter cable IC693CBL302 314 with built in termi nating resistors or by building a cus tom cable with the resistors installed in the connector at the end of the bus CPU BASEPLATE AE A a Oe ee m UL DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION EXPANSION BASEPLATE hee E a aa 2 eh DISCRETE ANALOG OPTION EXPANSION BASEPLATE ae a eae ee ee ee EA ae E emer EXPANSION LEHI Oa E EXPANSION BASEPLATE THEANN 2 TH DE _ _ EE N Figure B 7 Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates GFK 08S98F Appendix C I O Cable Data Sheets a47057 NOTE TOTAL MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM CPU BASEPLATE TO LAST EXPANSION BASEPLATE IS 50 FEET 15 METERS I O EXPANSION CABLES IC693CBL300 3 FT 1 METER IC693CBL301 6 FT 1 8 METERS IC693CBL302 314 50 FT 15 METERS IC693CBL312 0 5 FT 15 METERS IC693CBL313 25 FT 8 METERS See NOTE I O BUS TERMINATOR PLUG See NOTE IC693ACC307 Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection Example The following example shows cable connections in a system th
437. tion in 4 to 20 mA applications High and Low alarm limits are available on all ranges Ranges can be configured on a per channel basis User data in the AI registers is in 16 bit 2 s complement format 0 to 20 mA range only Resolution of the converted signal is 12 bits binary 1 part in 4096 on the O to 20 mA range The placement of the 12 bits from the A D converter in the AI data word is shown below MSB LSB x ont pio ps os v7 os os os os v2 oif vo x x x X not applicable to this discussion The relationship between the current input and the data from the A D converter is show below a44647 a44654 4000 4000 A D BITS AD decimal decimal 0 0 CURRENT mA CURRENT mA 4 to 20mA RANGE 0 to 20 mA RANGE Figure 12 1 A D Bits vs Current Input If the current source is reversed into the input or is less than the low end of the current range then the module will output a data word corresponding to the low end of the current range OOOOH in AI If an input that is out of range is entered that is it is greater than 20 mA the A D converter will output up to full scale corresponding to 7FFFH in AI Voltage Operation In the 0 to 10 V default range user data is scaled so that O volts corresponds to a count of O and 10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000 The 10 to 10 volt range is selected by changing the Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F IC693ALG442
438. to 20 mA The state of the module if the CPU goes to the STOP mode or RESET can be either Default to 0A mA or Hold Last State Selection of the desired state is made by configuring the DEFO 4 jumper on the detachable terminal board connector on the module If the jumper is not installed the outputs will Hold Last State on STOP or RESET provided that a backup user supply is connected when the system power goes down If the DEFO 4 jumper is present the module defaults to 4 mA on the 4 to 20 mA range or 0 mA on the 0 to 20 mA range on STOP or RESET One jumper per module is used to program both outputs for Hold Last State or DEFO 4 Each module output may be used as a current source or as a less accurate voltage source A voltage is output at VOUTX that corresponds to the current output The selection of current or voltage output is made with a jumper on the I O terminal board If no jumper is installed the module performs as a current source If the JMPVx jumper is present the module performs as a voltage source Each channel has the option of selecting voltage or current The setting of the current output range determines the voltage range The voltage range can be increased by using a 250 ohm resistor in place of the voltage jumper from JMPVx to IOUTx The following table shows the relationship between range settings and voltage outputs Table 11 2 Range Settings vs Voltage Outputs 4 to 20 mA l to5 V no range jumper 2 to 10 V with external re
439. to improve noise immunity To accomplish this a conductor may be used to connect the applicable ground terminal on the module s terminal board to earth ground This additional connection will bypass noise around the module The next figure shows the same shield grounding scheme as in the previous figure but with the addion of the external ground connection just described shown with bold lines ANALOG INPUT ANALOG MODULE SOURCE _ ANALOG SOURCE _ ANALOG SOURCE _ ANALOG SOURCE _ Figure 2 17 Analog Input Module External Earth Ground Connection Ground Conductor Earth Ground Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F General Installation Guidelines Wiring Diagrams for Current Transducers Ground the Cable Shield at Field Device End Only GND Note 2 NOTES 1 Connect conductor to Analog Input Module COM terminal if the source is floating to limit common mode voltages Note that common mode voltage is Analog Input limited to 11 volts Module u 2 If inaccurate readings persist due to noise the conductor may also be connected to the Analog Input Module GND terminal Figure 2 18 4 Wire Transducer Externally Powered via AC or DC Supply Ground the Cable Shield at oo Field Device End Only Note 1 __GND NOTES Note 2 1 Connect conductor to Analog Input Module COM terminal if the source is floating to limit common mode voltages
440. to limit 1 34 Channel No 14 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 14 35 Channel No 14 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 36 Channel No 15 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 37 Channel No 15 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit 1 38 Channel No 16 ALARM LO 0 above limit 1 below or equal to limit 1 39 Channel No 16 ALARM HI 0 below limit 1 above or equal to limit Range Select the range Choices are 0 to 10V or 10 to 10V In the 0 to 10V default range input voltage values ranging from 0 to 10V report O to 32 000 integer values to the CPU In the 10 to 10V range input voltage values ranging from 10 to 10V report 32000 to 32 000 integer values to the CPU Alarm Low Enter a value that causes an alarm low indication to be passed to the PLC Each channel has a low limit alarm value ALARM LO which causes I points to be set Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive Value checking should be done to determine if the alarm low values are allowed for the appropriate range The values allowed are Oto 10V Range 0 to 32760 10to10V Range 32767 to 32752 Alarm High Enter a value that causes an alarm high indication to be passed to the PLC Each channel has a high limit alarm value ALARM HI which causes I points to be set Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive Value checking should be
441. tor starters 6 Circuit board 7 Power supply 8 Control transformer 9 Fusible disconnect or circuit breaker 10 Control relays Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 3 Working with Series 90 30 Modules Module Features 2 4 3 IC693MDLXXX OUTPUT 120 VAC 5A 16 PT Am S XXXXXXX 123456789 ye 1234567 QO Figure 2 2 Features of Series 90 30 Module REA e A SB me ODO RON S Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 Pivot hook Circuit board holding tabs two on each side of module Catalog number and description section of label Certification UL CE etc section of label Module connector plugs into baseplate backplane connector Release lever spring loaded Ventilation openings in module case top and bottom Front cover holding tabs two on each side of module Front cover shown or terminal board Front cover faceplate or hinged cover for terminal board Lens cap Lens cap holding tabs one on each side of module Module label Serial Number used to determine module warranty status Note that on some modules the Serial Number may be on a small tag on the back of the module GFK O898F GFK 0898F BOTTOM RETAINER General Installation Guidelines Installing a Module Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to stop or malfunction Inju
442. tput Wiring Methods Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the cable shield grounded at the module end See Chapter 9 for more information Using Generic Terminal Block or Strip Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from the terminal strip to each output circuit on the module s terminal board terminals m Ground each cable s shield at the module end to a single GND terminal on the module s terminal board Connect each cable shield to its own terminal on the terminal strip m Wire the field device to the terminal strip with shielded cables connecting each shield to the terminal that has the corresponding shield for the cable that connects to the module terminal board Using this arrangement the shields are carried through the terminal strip This is illustrated in the section Analog Output Shield Grounding Example Three Also keep the length of exposed outside of shield leads at the terminal strip and device ends as short as possible Direct Method m Run a shielded cable from each field device transducer potentiometer etc directly to the module m Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module s terminal board Ground the shield at the module end only exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the noisy environment Do not connect the shield at the device end cut shield off at device end of cable and insulate with shri
443. ts l IC693CBL300 Cable I O Bus Expansion user references available per system 9 12 VO modile a Cable I O Bus Expansion 32 point figure 5 5 C 2 32 point wiring figure 2 20 IC693CBL302 Cable I O Bus Expansion blown fuse status for output modules 1 2 circuit status leds 1 2 1C693CBL306 Cable 32 point VOJC 13 color code for type 1 3 discrete 5 1 1C693CBL307 Cable 32 point I O C 13 Horner Electric Inc 1 4 1C693CBL308 Cable 32 point 1 0 C 15 insert with wiring information 1 2 IC693CBL309 Cable 32 point VO C 15 inserting a module 2 5 l installing a terminal board 2 7 IC693CBL310 Cable 32 point I O C 16 load requirements analog modules 9 4 IC693CBL312 Cable I O Bus Expansion removing a module 2 6 removing a terminal board 2 8 1C693CBL313 Cable I O Bus Expansion terminal board 1 3 types of 1 1 wiring to modules 2 18 B e Cable I O Bus Expansion I O system rack type 1 1 I O terminal block 1C693ACC329 D 6 IC693CBL315 Cable 32 point I O C 19 1C693CBL321 Cable 32 point I O C 23 1C693ACC330 D 7 1C693CBL322 Cable 32 point I O C 23 IC693ACC331 D 8 1C693CBL323 Cable 32 point I O C 23 1C693ACC332 D 9 IC693ACC333 D 10 IC693CBL327 Cable 32 point I O C 26 1C693ACC377 D 13 1C693CBL328 Cable 32 point I O C 26 1C693ACC307 terminator I O bus 2 44 IC693CBL329 D 12
444. tside left edge of the insert is color coded blue to indicate a low voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 7 8 Specifications for C693MDL731 Rated Voltage 12 24 volts DC Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 volts DC 420 15 Outputs per Module 8 one group of eight outputs Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side Output Current 2 amps maximum per point 4 amps maximum per fuse at 50 C 122 F 2 amps maximum per fuse at 60 C 140 F Output Characteristics Output Voltage Drop 0 75 volts maximum Off state Leakage 1 mA maximum On Response Time 2 ms maximum Off Response Time 2 ms maximum Power Consumption 55 mA all outputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in figure 2 27 Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK O898F Chapter 7 Discrete Output Modules 7 15 IC693MDL731 Output Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied load devices and power source to the 12 24 volt DC negative logic 2 amp output module a43099 MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING P OTHER CIRCUITS A lt a p 1uf gt Qe ORORO O0 N O o1 A amp N l I Fuse for Outputs Fuse for A1 A4 Outputs OTHER SA A5 A8 CIRCUITS 0u O O
445. uc Appendix F Series 90 30 Heat Dissipation Explains how to calculate the heat dissipated by Series 90 30 PLC components These calculations are required for enclosure sizing considerations GFK O0898F Preface vii Preface Related Publications viii For information on the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller other Series 90 30 modules and related products refer to the following publications GFK 0255 Series 90 PCM and Support Software User s Manual GFK 0256 MegaBasic Programming Reference Manual GFK 0293 Series 90 30 High Speed Counter User s Manual GFK 0401 Workmaster IT PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation GFK 0402 Series 90 30 and 90 20 PLC Hand Held Programmer User s Manual GFK 0412 Genius Communications Module User s Manual GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual GFK 0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual GFK 0499 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GFK 0631 Series 90 30 I O LINK Interface User s Manual GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual GFK 0664 Series 90 30 PLC Axis Positioning Module Programmer s Manual GFK 0685 Series 90 Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User
446. ude by the PLC and sent to the module for use by the D A converter circuitry The placement of the 13 bits converted to sign magnitude is shown below The relationship between the voltage output and the data from the D A converter is shown in Figure 3 30 MSB LSB s ou oo oo or oo os os of oo x xx S Sign bit X not applicable to this discussion a44657 4000 D A BITS O decimal 4000 VOLTAGE V Figure 11 1 D A Bits vs Voltage Output The state of the module if the CPU goes to the STOP mode or RESET can be either Default to 0O volts or Hold Last State Selection of the desired state 1s made by configuring the DEFO jumper on the detachable terminal connector on the module If the jumper is not installed the outputs will Hold Last State on STOP or RESET Scaling of the output is shown below GFK O0898F 11 1 a44658 32000 SAQ decimal VOLTAGE V Figure 11 2 Scaling for Voltage Output The primary power source for the module is the isolated 24 VDC power supplied by the PLC power supply Two terminals are provided on the module s terminal connector for user supplied 24 volts This allows you to provide a standby power supply so that the outputs can continue to hold their value if the internal supply is lost and Hold Last State is selected Additionally you can also supply the module voltage to reduce the load on the PLC isolated 24 VDC power supply The user supply must be used whe
447. ule provides two input ranges The default range is 4 to 20 mA with user data scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 with each 1000 counts representing 0 5 mA When a jumper is added to the I O terminal board the input range is changed to O to 20 mA with user data scaled so that 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000 with each 800 counts representing 0 5 mA Two range jumpers are provided with the module one for channels one and two and the other for channels three and four Conversion speed for each of the four channels is one half millisecond This provides an update rate of two milliseconds for any channel Resolution of the converted signal is 12 bits binary 1 part in 4096 over either range User data in the AI registers is in 16 bit 2 s complement format The placement of the 12 bits from the A D converter in the AI data word is shown below The relationship between the current input and the data from the A D converter is shown in Figures 3 14 and 3 15 MSB LSB x pnt pio v os v7 os os os os v2 oif vo x x x X not applicable to this discussion a44647 a44654 4000 4000 A D A D BITS BITS decimal decimal 0 0 CURRENT mA CURRENT mA 4 TO 20mA RANGE 0 TO 20mA RANGE Figure 10 5 A D Bits vs Current Input If the current source is reversed into the input or is less than the low end of the current range then the modul
448. upply Note Start up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds maximum 4 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GF K O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Input Power Current Calculation m Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in Chapters 2 and 3 m Use the graph to determine average input power m Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements m Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current Allow for start up surge current requirements m Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations GFK 0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 9 4 10 IC693PW R328 Standard Power Supply 48 VDC Input The IC693PWR328 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 48 VDC nominal input It will accept an input voltage range from 38 VDC to 56 VDC This power supply provides the following outputs m 5 VDC output m 24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90 30 Output Relay modules m Isolated 24 VDC which is used internally by some modules can also be used to provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table Table 4 8 1C693PWR328 Power Supply Capacities Catalog Load Number Capacity Input Output Capacities Voltage Power F Total
449. us Fuses m Quantity Module control power 1 Amp Buss GDB 1A Quantity 4 One for each output 2 Amps Littlefuse 239002 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Discrete Output Modules DVM Connections Table 7 2 I C693DVM300 Connections Signal Name Connection Description No 28 V IN Module Control Power input terminal common on pin 2 Supplies power to module s signal level circuits and auxiliary 15 and 15 Volt power supplies pins 2 3 and 4 Requires external 26 VDC nominal power supply 2 4 28V RET RET Common terminal for Module Control Power pin 1 Raila 15 Vdc 0 3A Auxiliary power output for external circuits Not isolated Developed from input power on pins 1 and 2 XOUT 1 15 Vdc 0 2A Auxiliary power output for external circuits Not isolated _ from ae power on pins 1 and 2 5 BREFAL TINT ea Fn msn Connon _IGITAL2IN Chanel 2 TTE input conection Gommon on pn S PICTATE Ormel TTE input conection Gommon on pn 9 PIGITALRET Common connection for Digital Input Channels 1 4 pins 525 _ 10 28 V 1 IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 1 and 2 common on pin 12 Required external 26 VDC nominal power supply 11 28 V2 IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 3 and 4 common on pin 12 Required external 26 VDC nominal power supply 12 28V1 amp 2 RET Common connection for both Output Channel Power Supply inputs pi
450. ut Module External Earth Ground Connection 2 30 Figure 2 18 4 Wire Transducer Externally Powered via AC or DC Supply 2 31 Figure 2 19 2 Wire Transducer Externally Powered via DC Supply 2 31 Figure 2 20 3 Wire Transducer Externally Powered via DC Supply 2 32 GFK O898F Table of Contents Contents Figure 2 21 2 Wire Transducer Self Powered 06 2 32 Figure 2 22 2 Wire Transducer Connected to Two Measuring Devices 2 33 Figure 2 23 Shield Connections for Analog Output Modules 2 35 Figure 2 24 Analog Output Module with External Earth Ground Connection 2 36 Figure 2 25 Analog Output Shield Grounding when Terminal Strip is Used 2 37 Figure 2 26 Power Supply Terminal Boards 06 2 39 Figure 2 27 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap 2 39 Figure 2 28 DC Input Wiring Examples eee 2 42 Figure 3 1 Common Baseplate Features ccc eeeees 3 2 Figure 3 2 C693CPU311 and C693CPU313 5 Slot Embedded CPU Baseplates 3 5 Figure 3 3 C693CPU323 10 slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 3 5 Figure 3 4 C693CHS397 5 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate 3 6 Figure 3 5 IC693CHS391 10 Slot Modular CPU Baseplate 3 7 Figure 3 6 C693CHS398 5 Slot Expansion Baseplate 3 8 Figure 3 7 C693CHS392 10 Slot Expansion Baseplate 3 9 Figure 3 8 IC693CHS399 5 Slot Remote Baseplate 3 10 Figure 3 9
451. ut Voltage Protective Limits Overvoltage Overcurrent Ride Through Time Standards 24 VDC 18 to 30 VDC 12 to 30 VDC 50 watts maximum at full load 4 Amps peak 100 milliseconds maximum 5 VDC 30 watts maximum 24 VDC Relay 15 watts maximum 24 VDC Isolated 20 watts maximum NOTE 30 watts maximum total all three outputs 5 VDC 5 0 VDC to 5 2 VDC 5 1 VDC nominal 24 VDC Relay 19 2 to 28 8 VDC 24 VDC Isolated 19 2 VDC to 28 8 VDC 5 VDC output 6 4 to 7 V 5 VDC output 7 A maximum 10 ms minimum Refer to data sheet GFK 0867B or later version for product standards and general specifications Derate per figure below at ambient temperatures above 50 C 122 F Current Derating for Higher Temperatures 6 1 6 0 5 8 5 6 5 4 5 2 5 VDC CURRENT 20 30 40 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Degrees C Figure 4 9 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50 C 122 F 4 14 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK 0898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies Calculating Input Power Requirements for C693PWR331 Use the following procedure to determine input power requirements for the 24 VDC High Capacity Power Supply m Determine total output power load from typical specifications listed for individual modules at the end of this chapter Multiply the output power by 1 5 to determine the input power value m Divide the input power value by the operat
452. ut to ramp to the given values using ramp variables which have been assigned to the channel using ladder logic The ramp is composed of output steps taken every 1 millisecond OUTPUT EXAMPLE OUTPUT IN RAMP MODE EXAMPLE OUTPUT IN STANDARD MODE FINAL OUTPUT VALUE CORRESPONDING TO NEW AQ VALUE AQ VALUE CHANGES Figure 12 7 Output Behavior in Ramp Mode and in Standard Mode The default mode of both outputs is standard mode Ramp mode and ramp variables are set using an E2 COMMREQ in ladder logic as described below The mode of each output channel is set independent of the mode of the other channel When an output is in ramp mode two lower level modes can be used to specify the ramp slope time mode in which the user provides the total ramp time in milliseconds and step mode in which the user provides the step in AQ counts that will be taken every 1 millisecond Setting the Ramp Mode An E2 COMMREQ is used to change the ramp mode of an output channel This is the same COMMREQ that is used to change the input alarm limits of the module and clear the lI error code When the module receives the COMMREQ the first word or command word is checked to determine whether the ramp settings or alarm limits are being changed or whether the I error code is being cleared When step mode is specified the second COMMREQ data word contains the ramp step in AQ counts Valid step values range from 1 to 32000 The direction of the
453. ut to the voltage input module therefore the resolution of the 4 to 20 mA input signal is approximately 10 bits binary 1 part in 1024 The resolution can be increased to approximately 11 bits 1 part in 2048 by using a precision 250 ohm resistor in place of the jumper The resistor causes the voltage input module to see a 4 to 20 mA input as 2 to 10 volts The main power source for the module is derived from the isolated 24 VDC power supplied by the PLC power supply This voltage is routed through an inverter regulator to produce the operating voltages for the module This module also consumes 27 mA from the 5 VDC output of the PLC power supply An LED at the top of the module s faceplate is ON when the module s power supply is operating The module provides electrical isolation of externally generated noise between the field wiring and the backplane through optical isolation To minimize the capacitive loading and noise all field connections to the module should be wired using a good grade of twisted shielded instrumentation cable The shields can be connected to either COM or GND The COM connection provides access to the common of the analog circuitry in the module The GND connection provides access to the baseplate frame ground This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system See page 3 11 to determine the number of Analog Voltage Input modules that can be installed in a system
454. utput in a program WAQ Xma x 2000 8000 With the placement and scaling known you can modify the data from the AI table or the data to the AQ table by the scale factor to satisfy your application needs Performance Measures 9 10 The performance of analog modules can be measured by resolution accuracy linearity and cross channel rejection Resolution of the module is the weight assigned to the least significant bit in the conversion process For example 4 UA bit is the resolution of the analog current output module A module with 8 WA bit has half the resolution of the analog current output module The resolution of a module is determined by the converter used in the analog module The accuracy of the module is dependent upon the tolerances of components used in the module s circuitry Accuracy is the maximum difference between the expected and measured values Linearity is the difference between the measured change and the ideal one LSB change between any two adjacent channels Cross channel rejection is the influence on one channel when the input to another channel is changed Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F General Analog Module Information 9 Analog Module Field Wiring Connections to an analog module from user field devices are made to screw terminals on a removable 20 terminal connector block mounted on the front of the module Information on field wiring for analog modules can be
455. uts are forced OFF when the CPU is stopped Power to provide current to the loads must be provided by the user The module also draws a minimum amount of power from the user supply to provide gate drive to the output devices Backplane isolation between the field side and logic side is provided by opto couplers on the module No special fault or alarm diagnostics are reported LED indicators labeled A1 A8 B1 B8 Cl C8 D1 D8 at the top of the module provide the ON OFF status of each output point This module is configured as a 32 point output type and uses 32 bits of discrete Q output data This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Connections to the output circuits are made from the user s load devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B The connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D Wiring to Field Devices Direct Method This method uses cables that have a mating female connector on the module end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end You can purchase a pair of pre wired cables catalog numbers IC693CBL327 and C693CBL328 or if required for your application build your own cables Refer to Building Cables for 24 Pin Connectors in the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Append
456. uts is referenced to the same user common connection There are no special fault or alarm diagnostics reported LED indicators labeled Al A8 B1 B8 Cl C8 D1 D8 at the top of the module provide the ON OFF status of each input point This module is configured as a 32 point input type and uses 32 bits of discrete I input data Current into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table Power to operate field devices can be supplied by the user or from the isolated 24 VDC supply available at the module s I O connectors This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Connections to the input circuits are made from the user s input devices to two male pin type 24 pin connectors Fujitsu FCN 365P024 AU mounted on the front of the module The connector mounted on the right of the module front view interfaces with groups A and B The connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D Wiring from the module s connectors to field devices is made through a cable having a mating female connector on one end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end You can purchase a pair of pre wired cables catalog numbers C693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 or 1f required for your application build your own cable Refer to Building Cables for 24 Pin Connectors in the IC693CBL327 328 data sheet in Appendix C of this manual for more information Series 90 3
457. vers shee ae ee F 6 Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing scc0d oes ox edd aes eed eed F 6 GFK O898F Table of Contents xv Contents Figure 1 1 Example of a Series 90 30 I O Module 1 2 Figure 2 1 Series 90 30 Example Layout ceceeeee 2 3 Figure 2 2 Features of Series 90 30 Module ee0e0 2 4 Figure 2 3 Installing a Module ccc ccc cece eee eee 2 5 Figure 2 4 Removing a Module ccc ccc cece cece cence 2 6 Figure 2 5 Installing an I O Module s Terminal Board 2 7 Figure 2 6 Removing a Module s Terminal Board 2 8 Figure 2 7 Terminal Board with Holding Screws 2 9 Figure Bee IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation Figure 2 9 Dimensions for 19I Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter BEACKGl 24405 4665 os nob bean eb ne E tees eee tae ees 2 11 Figure 2 10 IC693ACC313 Recessed Adapter Bracket for 19 Rack Mounting 2 12 Figure 2 11 Recommended System Grounding 06 2 13 Figure 2 12 Baseplate Grounding cccceecccccccees 2 14 Figure 2 13 2 20 Figure 2 14 2 27 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 50 PIN I O Module with Weidmuller 912263 Terminal Block Analog Input Shield Grounding when Terminal Strip is Used Analog Input Connections to Common Conductors 2 28 Shields Connected to Analog Input Module Terminal Board 2 29 Figure 2 17 Analog Inp
458. version ee ary Cable for Series 90 30 Installations shield treatment Cables building I O Bus Expansion C 2 I O Expansion Bus 3 12 replacing obsolete TBQC D 3 TBQC D3 TBQC 32 point cross reference current rating Calculations for power supply loads exam ples 4 28 Catalog number location Baseplate 3 2 Catalog numbers I O modules 1C693ACC300 6 17 IC693ALG220 10 1 IC693ALG221 10 5 IC693 ALG222 10 9 1C693ALG223 IC693ALG390 11 1 IC693ALG391 11 5 1C693ALG392 IC693ALG442 12 1 IC693DVM300 IC693MARS590 IC693MDL230 IC693MDL231 IC693MDL240 IC693MDL 241 IC693MDL310 IC693MDL330 IC693MDL340 IC693MDL390 7 10 IC693MDL632 6 9 IC693MDL634 6 11 IC693MDL645 6 13 IC693MDL646 6 15 IC693MDL653 6 19 _ IC693MDL654 6 21 _ IC693MDL655 6 26 IC693MDL730 7 12 GFK O898F GFK O0898F IC693MDL731 7 15 IC693MDL732 7 18 IC693MDL733 7 20 IC693MDL734 7 22 IC693MDL740 7 24 IC693MDL741 7 26 IC693MDL742 7 28 IC693MDL750 7 39 IC693MDL751 7 41 IC693MDL752 7 43 IC693MDL753 7 49 IC693MDL930 7 30 IC693MDL931 7 33 IC693MDL940 7 36 IC693MDR390 8 5 Clearance requirements PLC rack 2 2 Color coding Wires 2 17 Combination I O modules 120 vac in relay out 8 1 24 vdc in relay out 8 5 analog 4 inputs 2 outputs 12 1 COMMREQ E2 12 20 command b
459. vide wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 24 volt DC TTL positive negative logic input module The first figure shows a typical input circuit The second figure shows how field devices are connected to the module a45038 3 3K INPUT i 0 5W 0 22 wf T 8205 po lt COMMON Module point numbers in the following figure are shown in bold text 600 LED 7 D OV OV OV a45037 oo da eee gt AB A4 gt AB A6 ee A8 a ic noae TE Samy o OV NC rlik CONN ae BCOM i gt BB B7 gt BS B5 o gt BA B3 FUJITSU CONNECTOR PINS A1 A12 B1 B12 MODULE POINT NUMBERS ARE SHOWN IN BOLD TEXT BACKPLANE ISOLATED 24V SUPPLY MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF EXTERNAL USER SUPPLY Figure 6 20 Field Wiring 24 Volt DC Positive Negative Logic 32 Point Input Module IC693MDL655 6 28 Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Field Wiring Work Sheet for IC693MDL655 Discrete Input Modules 6 The following table is provided for the convenience of our customers as an aid to wiring the 24 pin connectors using cable IC693CBL315 It includes all of the required wiring information in one table This table has the following information module point number connector pin number cable pair number Oo OF OO wire color code base color or base color with tracer color Al A8 B1 B8 C1 C8
460. ving these wiring practices GFK 0898F Chapter 2 General Installation Guidelines 2 17 Communications Cables Wiring such as Genius Bus Ethernet or serial communications cables should be kept away from noise producing wiring Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near noise sensitive signal wiring bundles avoid running them beside parallel with each other Route them so that if they have to cross they do so at a right angle This will minimize coupling between them Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated If practical grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring segregated For example one rack could contain only AC modules and a different rack only DC modules with further grouping in each rack by input and output types For smaller systems as an example the left end of a rack could contain Analog modules the middle could contain DC modules and the right end could contain AC modules Discrete I O Module Connection Methods For modules with 16 points or less the standard method is to use the removable terminal board which comes with these modules The removable terminal board makes it easy to prewire field wiring to the user supplied input and output devices and to replace modules in the field without disturbing existing field wiring Some discrete 16 point I O modules can be used with an optional Terminal Block Quick Connect TBQC assembly This assembly contains a module facep
461. viously configured with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software and the number of actively scanned channels has been changed from 8 that number will be displayed on the bottom line of the Hand Held Programmer display following the AQ entry You can edit data with the Hand Held Programmer only for the active channels but you can not change the number of actively scanned channels Module Present If a module is physically present in a system it can be added to the system s configuration by reading the module into the configuration file For example assume that an 8 Channel Analog Current Voltage Output module is installed in slot 3 of a Model 311 PLC system It can be added to the configuration with the following sequence Use the T and J arrow cursor keys or the key to display the selected slot Initial Display To add the IC693ALG392 module to the configuration press the READ VERIFY ENT key sequence The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S T16 I_ Selecting I Reference At this point the starting I reference address for the status data returned from the module must be entered Notice that the length of the status field 16 is displayed as the first two digits following the first I on the second line of the display Note This field cannot be changed with the Hand Held programmer However it can be changed using the Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro software configurator function The Hand Held Programmer will al
462. voltage analog output modules are available for the Series 90 30 PLC however the Series 90 30 CPU does not recognize the difference between the two types of analog outputs The user must configure the Series 90 30 PLC system as described in the Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual GFK 0356 and the Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 After configuration the two analog outputs will correspond to 32 bits in the data table a44739 USER CONNECTIONS SERIAL ao TO PARALLEL Figure 9 4 Analog Output Block Diagram CPU Interface to Analog Modules The Series 90 30 PLC uses the data within the AQ and AI data tables to drive or record analog values as shown in Figures 3 1 and 3 3 The analog data is handled in a 2 s complement format Two s complement for conversion purposes consists of a binary code for positive magnitudes represented by a O zero in the most significant bit and the 2 s complement of each positive number to represent its negative To convert negative numbers from 2 s complement to binary invert each bit and add one The operation below is an example conversion of a 16 bit word 2 s Complement Binary 1100101101010000 0011010010101111 1 0011010010110000 Working in decimal format instead of hexadecimal within the data tables will allow easier calculations when you are working with analog data You can use the data in the AQ an
463. w The top row is labeled A1 through 8 input points 1 through 8 and the bottom row is is labeled B1 through B8 relay output points 1 through 8 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system GFK 0898F 8 1 8 2 Table 8 1 Specifications for IC693MA R590 Inputs Rated Voltage Input Voltage range Inputs per Module Isolation Input Current Input Characteristics On State Voltage Off State Voltage On State Current Off State Current On Response Time Off Response Time Outputs Rated Voltage Operating Voltage Outputs per Module Isolation Maximum Load Minimum Load Maximum Inrush On Response Time Off Response Time Internal Power Consumption Y Maximum load current is dependent on operating voltage as shown in the following table 120 volts AC 0 to 132 volts AC 8 one group of eight inputs 1500 volts RMS between field and logic side 500 volts RMS between inputs 12 mA typical at rated voltage 74 to 132 volts AC 0 to 20 volts AC 6 mA minimum 2 2 mA maximum 30 ms typical 45 ms typical 24 VDC 120
464. ware assembly Sometimes while troubleshooting a module is installed in an incorrect slot by mistake This will create a fault in one of the two system fault tables The module that is in the wrong slot will not work giving the appearance that it is defective The correct configuration module locations can be determined from the Configuration Screens The memory addresses that a particular module is using are listed on that module s configruation screen GFK 0898F Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 3 13 4 System Fault Tables There are two system fault tables the PLC Fault Table and the I O Fault Table The fault tables can be viewed using the PLC programming software These fault tables will not report such things as a defective limit switch but will identify system faults such as Loss of or Missing Modules System Configuration Mismatch CPU hardware failure Low Battery PLC Software Failure Program Checksum Failure No User Program PLC Store Failures System Status References These discrete references S SA SB and SC can be viewed in the System Reference Status Table or on screen if used in the ladder program for determining the status of various conditions and faults For example the SCO0009 bit turns on if a fault is logged in either fault table Another example is that bit SA0011 will turn on if the CPU memory backup battery is low The Series 90 30 PLC CPU Instruction
465. ways reflect the currently active length of the status field Chapter 11 Analog Output Modules 11 25 11 26 Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting address of the status data You can select a specific starting address by pressing the key sequence for the desired address and pressing the ENT key For example to specify the starting address as I17 press the key sequence 1 7 ENT The following screen will be displayed RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S I16 10017 10032 You can press the CLR key at any time to abort the configuration you have just selected and return the slot to EMPTY After selecting the starting I address and pressing the ENT key the following screen appears RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S AQ8 AQ Selecting AQ Reference This screen allows you to select the starting address for the AQ reference by specifying the starting reference in the AQ field You can select the next available address the default or enter a specific address Pressing the ENT key will allow the PLC to select the starting addresses To enter a specific address for example AQ35 press the starting reference number keys and the ENT key For example to specify a starting address of AQ35 press the key sequence 3 5 ENT RO 03 AO 1 00 gt S AQ8 AQ035 AQ043 Note that the length of the status field 8 is displayed as the first two digits following the first AQ on the second line of the display Note This field ca
466. wed Values refers to the values that are valid If a value outside the specified range is sent the module clips it to the nearest valid value before sending it to the Digital to Analog Converter No errors are returned The following table shows values sent from the module back to the PLC for the Input channels Module Mode Sent values to CPU The ALARM LO and ALARM HI data fields allow you to enter values that cause alarm indications to be passed to the PLC Each channel has a low limit alarm value ALARM LO and a high limit alarm value ALARM HI These alarm values cause I points to be set as indicated in the tables on page 3 95 and 3 96 Values can be entered in all high and low limit fields Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive The allowable values are shown in the following table RANGE Possible limit values 0 to 20 mA 0 32760 4 to 20 mA 0 32760 4 to 20 mA Enhanced 8000 32760 0 to 10V 32760 10 to 10V 32768 32760 GFK O898F Chapter12 IC693ALG442 Analog Combination I O Module 12 17 IC693ALG442 Ramp Mode Operation 12 18 The ramp mode operation represents a separate mode of the module s outputs When an output channel is not in ramp mode new values entered in the corresponding AQ reference cause the output to step to the commanded values as shown in Figure 3 52 When an output channel is in ramp mode new values entered in the corresponding AQ reference cause the outp
467. wing graph is a typical 48 VDC power supply efficiency curve A basic procedure for determining efficiency of the 48 VDC power supply follows the figure a44963 50 45W 40 AVERAGE 30 INPUT POWER WATTS 20 5 10 15 20 25 30 TOTAL OUTPUT POWER WATTS Figure 4 7 Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply Note Start up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds maximum GFK_0898F Chapter 4 Series 90 30 Power Supplies 4 4 12 Input Power Current Calculation for IC693PWR328 Power Supply Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in Chapter 12 Use the graph to determine average input power Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current Allow for start up surge current requirements Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations Series 90 30 PLC I O Module Specifications July 2000 GFK O898F Series 90 30 Power Supplies IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply 24 VDC Input GFK 0898F The Series 90 30 DC input High Capacity power supply IC693PWR331 is a 30 watt wide range supply designed for 24 VDC nominal inputs For applications requiring greater 5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed from the 5 V output It will accept an input voltage range
468. zontal row with eight green LEDs labeled Al through 8 points through 8 An insert goes between the inside and outside surface of the hinged door The surface towards the inside of the module when the hinged door is closed has circuit wiring information and circuit identification information can be recorded on the outside surface The outside left edge of the insert is color coded red to indicate a high voltage module This module can be installed in any I O slot of a 5 or 10 slot baseplate in a Series 90 30 PLC system Table 6 2 Specifications for C693MDL231 Rated Voltage 240 volts AC 50 60 Hz Input Voltage Range 0 to 264 volts AC 50 60 Hz Inputs per Module 8 each input point has a separate common Isolation 1500 volts RMS between field side and logic side 500 volts RMS between inputs Input Current 15 mA typical at rated voltage Input Characteristics On state Voltage 148 to 264 volts AC Off state Voltage 0 to 40 volts AC On state Current 6 mA minimum Off state Current 2 2 mA maximum On response Time 30 ms maximum Off response Time 45 ms maximum Power Consumption 60 mA all inputs on from 5 volt bus on backplane Refer to Appendix B for product standards and general specifications GFK OS9SF Chapter 6 Discrete Input Modules 6 3 IC693MDL231 Input Module Field Wiring Information The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input devices and power source to the 240 volt

Series 90-30 Programmable Controller I/O Module

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents